VOL 02 - 02 - Tech. Spec. (P.01) PDF

ARAB REPUBLIC OF EGYPT
MINISTRY OF HOUSING AND URBAN COMMUNITIES

NEW URBAN COMMUNITIES AUTHORITY
(NUCA)
CONTRACT DOCUMENT
( ......../ ........../ ......... .)
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22/(v GIS
Substation
Volume 2 o/2
Technical Specifications
· Part!
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company

EPS
November 2018 Rev. (0)
New Urban Communities (NUC) Contract Document
th
6 October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/S
Volume.2: Exhibit D Technical specifications

TABLE OF CONTENT
Chapter Description Volume

Volume.2
One General Technical Specification and Conditions Part]
Two Specification Schedules
Three Technical Specifications For 220 kV Gas Insulated
Switchgear
Four Earthing and Shielding Systems.
Five 220 kV Outdoor Equipments
'.
Six Auxiliary Power and Lighting
Seven Control, Measuring, Metering & Protection Specification
Eight Telecommunication and SCADA Systems
Nine Cables and Wire System
Ten Technical Specifications for 66 kV Conventional Indoor
Switchgear (N.A)
Eleven Capacitor Banks Volume.2
Twelve Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switch Gear Part II

Thirteen Ventilatiol), Air Conditioning, Fire Protection, Fire
Alarm Systems & Fire fighting of Transformers
Fourteen Quality Assurance and Tests
Fifteen Technical Specifications for Power Transformers
Sixteen Civil Work
Seventeen Spare Parts, Spe.cial Tools and Testing Equipment (refer
to price schedule)
�.,
A�;:',
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Content /'It'? ."'>•·.
,,
Volume 2: Technical Specifications Rev. (0)
\ :,,,c,:•,,:c•
I"'
,,..,.,-..
I
i:
New Urban Communities (NUC) Contract Document
6111 October Eastern Ex1ensions 220/22/22 kV GlS SIS
r,
.... .
f'''•
:
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART(!)
.
i
1 .
!..: Chapter Description
One General Technical Specification and Conditions

Two Specification Schedules
Three Technical Specifications For 220 kV Gas Insulated
Switchgear
Four Earthing and Shielding Systems.
Five 220 1cv·outdoor Equipments
Six Auxiliary Power and Lighting
Seven Control, Measuring, Metering & Protection Specification
Eight Telecommunication and SCADA Systems
,. .
tl
...., Nine Cables and Wire System
IJ
LI
.... , ..,
·
i! •·:
,-·-··:.
fLJ
.L,
i''
.
. ·.
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Content

New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter l
CHAPTER ONE
Gh"'NERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND

CONDITIONS
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 1/33

Volume 2 : Technical Specifications Rev.( 0)
New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA} Chapter 1
6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS SIS
CHAPTER 01\TE
GEJ\TERAL TECH�NJCAL SPECIFICATIONS AND COJ\TJJITIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Clause Description Page
1.1 Project Objective
1.2 Project Interconnection
1.3 Project Description
1.4 Information to Bidders
1.5 Project Scope of Work 4
1.6 Site Visit 8
1.7 Reference List 8
1.8 Dates of Completion and Guarantee Period 9
1.9 General Program 9
1.10 Execution of Works 9
1.11 Names of Manufacturers, Places of Manufacture and Shipping Ports 11
1.12 General Technical Paiiiculars and Guarantees 11
1.13 Design and Design Calculation 11
1.14 Quality and Material 12
1.15 Workmanship 12
1.16 Documentation 12
1.17 Transport of Plant and Contractors Equipment 21
1.18 Packing and Transp01i Marking 22
1.19 Climatic Conditions 23
1.20 Safety Regulations 23
1.21 Progress Reports 23
1.22 Terminals, Wiring and Connections _?"_.,
1.23 Labels and Identification of Plant 25
1.24 Iron, Steel and Metal Works 31
1.25 Bidders Documents 31
.�
1.26 Applied Standards ,,,�\i, ;,,;, 31

1.27 Precedence of Codes and Standards /' ,,,�t;�,:j/
{>'.'�,{�:, \, 31
1.28 Training f \/ 1 '•
/ , ht;... t \ / : V . . '
32
1.29 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT) ? t,,,1 ,,. �i
.
:s:f'
_,
I
. ·"",,,,, , >
', . ,. ,y··•,,,:·:::l
..,,.,
:, :,
1.30 Type Tests \\,� '' . . ·, " 33
' ,. ''...'1 ,, '
( :,>.,,
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 2/33

New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 1
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/2?/''2 kV GlS SIS
CHAPTER ONE
GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND CONDITIONS
1.1. PROJECT OBJECTIVE:

New Urban Conununities Authority (NUCA) pla1111ed to construct new
substation 6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV at 6th October
Citv, in order to face the exoected
. increase of the load demand due to
construction of the Eastern Extension of the city.
1.2. PROJECT INTERCONNECTION:

6tl' October Easten1·Extensions 220 kV GIS substation will be connected
with the Egyptian Electric network as follows:
l. Construct new 220 kV double circuits XLPE cables 2000 mm2, 8 km
cable route October (2) Power Plant/ 6th October Eastern Extensions
S/S.
2. Opening the existing 220 kV 6th October S/S / AI Gamma! S/S single
circuit O.H.T.L (ACSR 2 x 380/50) in/out (2 km) at 6th October
Eastern Extensions 220 kV substation.
1.3. PROJECT DESCRIPTION:

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV, (3 x 125) MVA is turnkey
project include but not limited to the followings:
1.3. l. 220 kV GIS indoor metal clad switchgear.
1.3.2. 22 kV Conventional AIS metal clad indoor switchgear.
1.3.3. 22 kV capacitor Banks.
1.3.4. Three (3), 125 MVA 220/22/22 kV three phase power
transformer with its accessories + one future 125 MVA
transformer.
1.3.5. Telec01mnunication System.
1.3 .6. Protection, control, signaling, measuring, metering of the whole
substation and substation automation system.
1.3.7. One fire fighting system for (3x125MVA+one future
transfonner).
1.3 .8. Civil works.
1.4. INFORMATION TO BIDDERS:
1. The main equipment are:

• 220 kV GIS System.
• 220/22/22 kV Power transfonners.
2. All attached Bid documents drawings are conceptual.

3. For equipment other than main equipment the Bidder may propose
more than one manufacturer for the same equipment but maximum
E]ect:ric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 3/33
Volume 2: Technical Specifications Rev.( 0)
New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter I
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS S/S
three with their complete technical data and specifications. After

contract signature the Contractor is not allowed to change the accepted
proposed manufacturers.
4. The General layout and other drawings attached in the Bidder's offers
are considered conceptual DWG's, either there are comments on these
drawings or not, these don't relieve the Bidder if selected to be
Contractor from full compliance with all Bid documents requirements
(without any additional cost) regarding the technical specifications and
all the drawings which shall be subject to Employer review m1d
approval during design stage.
5. In case there is any discrepancy in the Bid documents and Bidder did
not request clarification for this discrepancy during Biding period, the
E111ployer has the right to select the best for him from his point of view
during contract execution.
6. Bidder should give well defined infonnation in his offer without
discrepancy and he has no right to say: "If there is discrepancy, this
will supersede this". In case of discrepancy in the offer the Employer
has the right to select the best for him from his point of view during
contract execution.
7. Any submitted type test should be in English and within the last ten
years and should be for the smne type and same factory of the proposed
equipment in the offer.
8. Contractor should be responsible for any additional equipment and
works needed to give satisfactory operation of the equipment delivered
by him and should be deemed to be included in the offered prices.
1.5. PROJECT SCOPE OF WORKS:

1.5.1. 220 kV GIS Switchgear:
· The work shall cover on turnkey basis, engineering, design,
manufacture, factory testing, CIF delivery, inland transportation to site,
civil works, erection, testing at site, setting to work, putting in operation,
insurance till provisional acceptance, guarantee, training and assistance
during guarantee period for 220 kV GIS.
The scope shall include but not limited to the following:-
1.5.1.1. 220 kV GIS Switchgear m1d Equipments:

~ The 220 kV switchgear shall be SF6 Gas insulated metal clad (GIS)
./,p· •::::~;;/,)\ingle phase enclosure for all components except bus bar could be
(. ,;:;;l \ 1yiyee pha~e enclosure indoor type,. double bus bars ':ith rated c~rre~t
( ',tJ; t ..l: (2::j00A, smgle breaker configuration and symmetncal short c1rcmt
. " ·;·· / :/; ; ent 63 kA for one second, lightning impulse withstand voltage
i.~,3'.:,;?1 050 kVpeak, and rated voltage 245 kVnns· It includes but not limited
fc"' to the followings and according to the attached single line diagrmn:
···••·-·~-- a. Double three single phase or three phase GIS type enclosure
sectionalized bus bars with rated current 2500A to accommodate
eight (8) bays with rated current 1600A; out of which two (2) line
Volume 2 : Technical Specifications Rev.( OJ
New Urban Communities Authoriry (NUCA) Chapter J
6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS SIS
bays for overhead lines, two (2) cable bays for cable feeders, (4)
transformer bays for the main transformers (125 11VA) one of
them for future 4th transformer and one bay for bus tie/coupler with
rated current 2500A in addition to space for two (2) O.H.T.L's
future bays. Each bus bar section shall include:
1. One (1) three single phase GIS high speed earthing switch.
11. One (1) tlu-ee single phase GIS inductive potential
transformer complete with its GIS isolator and earthing
switch.
111. One (1) tlu-ee single phase GIS longitudinal bus bar
disconnector with rated current 2500 A for the
sectionalizer.
b. One completed bay for bus tie / coupler 2500A contains but not
limited to:
1. One (1) three single phase GIS circuit breaker 2500A.
11. Two (2) tlu-ee single phase GIS isolator switches 2500A
each provided with earthing switch mechanically
interlocked.
m. Two (2) three single phase GIS maintenance earthing
switches for the middle part of the bus bar.
1v. Two (2) tlu-ee single phase GIS current transformers (1250
- 2500)/1/IA.
v. Local control panel.
c. Four completed transfonner bays each contains but not limited to:
1. One (1) three single phase GIS circuit breakers 1600A.
11. Two (2) tlu-ee single phase GIS busbars isolator switches
(1600A) each provided with earthing switch mechanically
interlocked.
m. One (1) tlu-ee single phase GIS maintenance earthing
switches.
iv. One (1) three single phase GIS cu1Tent transfonners (300-
600)/1/1/1/l/lA.
v. One (1) tlu-ee single phase SF6 busduct till one (1) tlu-ee
single phase SF6 / air bushing.
vi. Local control panel.
·····---,, d. Two completed overhead line bays each contains:
11. Two (2) three single phase GIS busbars isolator switches
1600A each provided with earthing switch mechanically
interlocked.
m. One (1) tlu-ee single phase GIS maintenance earthing
switches.
iv. One (1) three single phase GIS current transfonners (800-
1600)/1/1/1/lA.
v. One (1) tlu-ee single phase GIS line isolator switch 1600A.
v1. One (1) tlu-ee single phase high speed GIS earthing
switches.

New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter i
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/2? kV G!S S/S
v11. One three single phase SF6 bus ducts till One (1) three
single phase SF6 to air bushing.
vm. Local control panel.
e. Two completed cable bays each contains:
11. Two (2) three single phase GIS busbars isolator switches
1600A each provided with earthing switch mechanically
interlocked.
m. On_e (1) three single phase GIS maintenance earthing
switches.
1v. One (1) three single phase GIS current transformers (800-
1600)/1/1/1/lA.
v. One (1) three single phase GIS line isolator switch 1600A.
vi. One (1) three single phase high speed GIS earihing
switches.
v11. One three single phase SF6 bus ducts till One (1) three
single phase SF6 cable end box.
vm. One three single phase GIS inductive voltage transfonner
complete with its GIS isolator and earihing switch.
1x. One three single phase GIS surge Arrestor.
x. One three single phase cable end box.
xi. Local control panel.
f. Outdoor Equipment for each 220 kV O.H.T.L bay:
1. Three single phase outdoor surge mTester 214 kV.
11. Three (3) single phase outdoor coupling capacitive voltage
transformers, two phases are suitable for two line traps
erection.
111. Two (2) line traps suitable to be erected on CCVT(it is
contractor responsibility to investigate with himself the
remote end stations to define the phase on which line trap
will be installed).
1v. All 220 kV overhead bare conductors with its
terminations.
g. Outdoor Equipment for each 125 MVA transformer:
1. One (1) three single phase surge arresters (214 kV) on 220 kV
side.
11. One (1) three single phase surge arresters (24 kV) on 22 kV
side.
111. Neutral equipment for 220 kV neutral point contains:
a) One (1) single phase current transformer (300-600)/1/lA.
b) One (1) single phase surge arrester (108 kV).
c) One (1) single phase earihing switch (1600A).
1v. All overhead bar·e conductors with its tenninations.
h. Neutral point equipment of each zigzag earthing transformer:
1. One (1) neutral single phase disconnector (1000A).
11. One (1) neutral single phase current transfonner.
111. One (1) neutral metallic earthing resistor.
E1ectric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 6/33

6"' October Eastern Extensions 220122/22 kV G!S S/S
1.5.1.2. All low voltage control, power and signaling cables, conductors,
accessories, supports and works required to complete installation and
successfully operation of the 220 kV GIS System as specified.
1.5.2. Power Transformers:
The work shall cover on turnkey basis, engineering, design,
manufacture, factory testing, CIF delivery, inland transportation to site,
putting on the transfonner foundations, erection, testing at site, setting to
work, putting in operation,· insurance till provisional acceptance,
guarantee, training and assistance during guarantee period for three (3)
125 MVA power transfonners with its accessories.
The scope shall include but not limited to the followings:
1.5.2.l. Thre.:: (3) three phase power transfonners 125 MVA each, 220/22/22
kV with all its accessories, panels and early fault gas detection device,
the scope also include all equipment required to be installed in the
control room for controlling signaling and measuring the 125 MVA
transfonners as specified in the relevant chapter in addition to AVR
( complete system) for each transfonner.
1.5.2.2. One (1) complete transfonner fire fighting system for (3 x 125 MVA
plus one future tr?~'1sformer) as specified in the relevant chapter.
1.5.2.3. All low voltage control, power and signaling cables, conductors,
accessories, supports and works required to complete installation and
successfully operation of the 125 MVA transfonners as specified.
1.5.3. 22 kV metal clad indoor AIS switchgear in two rows as per single line
diagram as specified.
1.5.4. 18/30/36 kV XLPE cables with cross sectional area not less than 3 x
lC x 630 mm2 Cu/phase for connecting the 22 kV side of 125 MVA
transfonns (each secondary winding) with the 22 kV switchgear as
specified.
18/30/36 kV XLPE cables cross sectional area not less than

xlcx630 rnrn2 Cu/phase for connections between 22 kV switchgear
s~i:ticms (from row to-row) or 22Kv air insulated Bus ducts could be
also.
18/30/36 kV three core XLPE cable with cross sectional area not
less than 3 x 150 rnm2 Cu for connecting the 22 kV side of the
auxiliary transfonner with the 22 kV switchgear as specified.
1.5.7. 18/30/36 kV three core XLPE cable with cross sectional area not
Jess than 3 x 240 rmn2 to connect capacitor banks with the 22 kV
switchgear.

New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chaprer l
th
6 October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G1S SIS
1.5.8. Two (2) three phase auxiliary transformers 22/0.4 kV, 500 kVA each
as specified.
1.5.9. (2) two zigzag earthing transformers 22 kV as indicated on the single

line diagram.
1.5.10. Six (6) 22 kV capacitor banks (each is three stages) as specified.
1.5.11. 0.4 kV PVC cable with cross section area not less than 2 xlC x 500
mm2 Cu/ phase to connect the 0.4 kV side of the auxiliary
transfonner with the 0.4kV main distribution board as specified.
1.5.12. - Protection, control, measuring, metering, signaling, interlocldng

f
and synchronizing systems for the whole substation equipment
L and substation automation system as specified.
1.5.13. Telecommunication Systems and 48 V DC system as specified here
in the relevant chapter.
1.5.14. Protection Works at remote sites as specified.
1.5.15. All gantries, steel structures and overhead connections required for
220 kV outdoor equipments as specified.
l.5.16. Earthing grid and lightning protection for whole substation as
specified.
1.5.17. Lighting (indoor and outdoor) for whole substation as specified.
1.5.18. Low voltage AC and 220 V DC systems for whole substation as

specified.
1.5.19. All Civil works such as 220 kV GIS building, control building and
foundations for 3 x 125 MVA 220/22/22 kV transfonner ... etc as
specified.
1.5.20. Ventilation, Air conditions and fire alarm for the whole substation as
specified.
1.5.21. Any other deliveries/works required to give satisfactory operation of

the delivered equipment and to complete the work for proper
conunercial operation are considered included in the offered p~;~~·~.
1.6. SITE VISIT
, ;. .c•,r:~,
/'•· . ·--.·. · '\
ljF (
/ / ,, '" \'.::,p'
Refer to Vol. I -Instruction to Tenderers (ITT)-Clause 6.
~} ./···i
' ;,.;, h
¼ t"' -.- ,p' )
1.7. Past Experience \ ~;:,:.;. / ll
·.
Refer to Vol. 1. \:-~ .,\
·:,c
;/

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS SIS
1.8. DATES Of COlVIPLETION AND GUARANTEE PERIOD

1.8.l. Bidder's shall state in Schedule (G-1) Vol. 2 the dates of readiness for
inspection, testing and dates for completion and delivery of the various items
of above-mentioned equipment.
These dates shall be given in months reckoned from the cmmnencernent
date.
1.8.2. TI1e completion period shall be as specified in Volume 1 Exhibit B "Special
Conditions" clause 6 & ITT clause 1.
l.8.3. The guarantee period is 24 months from the date of provisional acceptance.
1.9. GENERAL PROGRAM

1.9 .1. Bidders· should submit with their offers proposed work program showing
the critical paths and slack times for each activity.
1.9.2. Any works requiring shutdown periods should be mentioned on the work
program with its early start and late start, early finished and late finished.
1.9.3. To suit the execution of the project it is anticipated that the
commencement and completion dates will be in accordance with the
contract Schedule.
1.9 .4. The Contractor shall submit, within 20 days after letter of award, to the
Employer a detailed schedule of his proposed work program. The
schedule shall be in the form of a network showing the critical path and
slack times and shall cover all the activities such as design, manufacture,
site preparation, delivery, construction, test, commissioning, etc.
1.9.5. The schedule shall further show a breakdown of all main elements of the
work, indicating the approximate dates when such elements will be
readin~ss for acceptance test, arrive on site, completion of construction,
test and ready for commissioning and operation. For the construction
period a detailed breakdown per "milestones" shall be submitted.
1.9.6. Every three months, and at such other tin1es as may be necessary (e.g.
progress meetings), until the works are completed, the Contractor shall
submit to the Employer for his review either a revision to bring the
program up to date, or a statement to the effect that the previous program
is still valid. The revised schedule shall be mailed or submitted not later
than 10 days after revision. The submission to and approval or review by
the _Employer of ~n?.~rogram shall not relieve the Contractor of any o f . - ~
duties or respons1b1l!t1es under the Contract. ,.,•,)3->~: · '· · · •.. \
r;
:,r/r: >',:
1
· \
1.10. EXECUTION OF WORKS: •I{ [i,_ ...-._,__, ,71
1.10.1. All works shall be executed in accordance with the requirements ~d in . ;: /
the manner set forth in the various documents in these Specificatio~, ,. 7
1.10.2. All construction work shall be planned and cairied out in collaboration:.. ·-
with the Employer and executed in compliance with all regulations,
orders and rulings in force in Egypt, which may in any way, affect or be

6'" October Eastern Extensions 200/22/22 kV GJS SIS
applicable to the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall be

responsible for all damages and shall indenmify and save harmless the
Employer from and against all damages and liability therefore which
may arise out of the failure of the Contractor to comply with said
regulations, orders and rulings. The Employer will assist the Contractor
in obtaining assents, way leaves and permissions required for the
perfonnance of the work.
1.10.3. Access to the site shall be afforded to the Contactor by the Employer
immediately after signing of the Contract, and except in so far as the
specification may provide to the contrary, the Contractor is to extend
perrnanent public roads to the substation jobsites and shall provide and
maintain all temporary entrances and roadways necessary for execution
of the Vv'ork under this Contract.
1.10.4. The access to and possession of the site shall not be exclusive to the
Contractor but only such as shall enable him to execute the works.
1.10.5. The Contractor shall assign a skilled superintendent and the necessary
competent construction foremen constantly on the works perfonned at
the sites. The Contractor shall employ such skilled, semiskilled and
unskilled labor as is necessary for the proper execution of the contract.
1.10.6. The Contractor shall have available at site, at all contractual working
times, a member of his organization, with authority, whom the Employer
may contact regarding any problems arising with respect to materials,
workmanship, specification compliance, or works progress, so that
decisions may be obtained on such matters without delay.
1.10.7. The Contractor shall afford to the Employer and to other Contractors
whose names sha!I have previously communicated in ,vriting to the
Contractor by the Employer every reasonable facility for the execution
of work concurrently with his own.
1.10.8. The Employer shall have free access to the site at all times and shall
have free access to places where any part of the works is being executed,
for inspection of such works in progress.
1.10.9. The Employer reserves the right to place his representatives at the site
throughout the entire period of the contract.
1.10.10.The Employer also reserves the right to conduct visitors and/ or
supervisory authorities around the project through the entire construction
and erection period, for the benefit of public relations and for official
inspections.
1.10.11.Labor shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The rate of pay for
local labor at project site shall not be less than prevailing wage scales for
similar duties in the locality. The Contractor shall furthermore make a l ~
efforts to avoid labor disputes, strikes, slowdowns and sin1i•uµ, · • ' ,·. ·;;.
difficulties, which may delay the completion of the contract. /:·;~< ;<:·:'.;:\,
1.10.12.Precaution shall be exercised at all times by the Contractor for/the ,,
protection of persons and property regardles·s of jurisdiction, em~{ciier~. ·.'/' J
ship or responsibility. The safety provisions of applicable \~<t\¥s,
ordinances, codes and good practice shall be observed. Machihe1y, .... :
""~.~~'~'---" . "

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G!S S/S
equipment and other parts of the plant shall be guarded in strict

accordance with these provisions.
1.10.13.The Contractor shall immediately advice the Employer of the occunence
r of any accident at the site or in connection with the execution of the
Contract.
1.10.14.Termination of employment shall be in accordance with the Egyptian
government labor legislation.
1.10.15.The Contractor shall carry out the work on site continuously during the
normal working hours generally recognized in the area.
1.10.16.Should the Employer find evidence of poor workmanship, defects or
other variations from the specifications, the Contractor will be notified
promptly and shall proceed hmnediately to rectify such faults or r,3.uses
of rejection.
1.10 .17. Contractor shall provide his own security measures at site for safety and
guard of project equipment and materials including equipment delivered
for project by others. In this regard contractor should participate the
project consultant and EETC representatives in the visual inspection of
material and equipment delivered by others and sign the materials site
arrival certificate.
1.10.18.The Contractor shall provide an adequate crew at all times for
continuous clean-up work at the site.
1.10 .19. Contractor should Co-operate with other Contractors and provide in the
due time any required, design, information, drawings, etc for the other
Contractor interface with his works.
1.11. NAMES OF MANUFACTURERS, PLACES OF MANUFACTURE

AND SHIPPING PORTS
Bidders shall state in schedule (G-2), Volume 2, the names of
manufacturers and the places of manufacture and shipping po1is of the
various parts of the contract works.
1.12. GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND GUARANTEES

Bidders shall duly complete and sign the technical data schedules. The
contract works shall comply in all respects with these technical data
schedules. Bidders are also requested to submit with their Bid's c01µpl~, .•
technical and operational descriptions, catalogues, design ca!culatiU:111faAd;:/c >:,
all other information concerning the offered material. /;"?( ·· > / \
\ ii ,,, h ,1
1.13. DESIGN AND DESIGN CALCULATION · J;.' s !/
1.13.1. The contract works shall be designed to facilitate tran~~ation,:.,' ,,,_,:,,,<='
//
inspection, cleaning, repairing, dismantling, assembly and continuity-ef--/
service. All equipment shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation
under the climatic conditions prevailing at site and under such sudden
variations of load and voltage as may be met under working conditions of
the system.

New Urban Communities Authority (NLiCA) Chapter 1
6'" October Eastern Extensions 2?0/22/22 kV GJS S/S
1.13.2. The design of all the Equipment shali be such as to minimize the risk of
damage, which may occur due to deterioration in service of any part of
the said equipment due to site and work conditions.
1.13 .3. C01Tesponding parts shall be interchangeable wherever possible.
1.13.4. The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision
for the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of
the contract works and of associated works whether existing or under
erection under other contracts.
1.13.5. All design carried out by the Contractor shall comply with these
Specifications and shall take into account all requirements of the \¥orks.
1.13.6. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all design can·ied out by
him taking in to consideratioTJ .parallel operation of the transformers.
1.13.7. The Contractor shall infonn himself fully of the actual dimensions, levels
etc., of any other existing or proposed structure before commencing the
manufacture of parts dependent on such data. The design calculations for
each member forming part of the Plant shall be based on the most
unfavorable combination of all the loads which the said member or part is
intended to support or assist in supporting either permanently or
temporarily. All design calculations shall be subject to the approval of the
owners.
1.14. OUALITY AND MATERIAL

1.14.1. All materials used whether fully specified herein or not shall be of the
best quality and of the most suitable class for the working conditions
specified, and shall withstand the variations of temperature and climatic
conditions ansmg under working conditions without distortion,
deterioration or undue stresses in any part, and also without affecting the
strength and suitability of the various p&-ts for the work which they have
to perfonn.
1.14.2. No repairs of any kind to defective materials or parts will be allowed, in
such case a new material or part should replace the defective one ( except
under written pennission of the oVvner).
1.14.3. Equipment and materials which use components and substances with
adverse effect on the environment such as polychlorinated biphenyl
(PCB), Halone, etc. should not be used.
1.15. WORKlVIANSHIP
All works, methods of work and workmanship, whether fully specified
herein or not, shall be of the highest order. In all respects, the generally
accepted requirements and commonly recognized good practice for -~"""~
class work of this nature are to be adhered too. All works shall be to
satisfaction and approval of the owner.
f 1.16. DOCUMENTATION
L 1.16.1. Documentation To Be Submitted With Bid:
Bidders shall submit with their Bids in a bound form and under
Electrlc Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 12/33
61h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS S/S
number all the drawings and catalogues sufficient to explain their Bids.
The drawing and catalogues submitted bv Bidder shall include but
not limited to:
a) Detailed catalogue pamphlets and description they may think necessary
to explain the constructional features and function characteristics of the
different equipment they are offering.
b) List of his site tests standard.
c) Single line diagram of the substation indicating the SF6 Gas
r·
; compartments in case of GIS substations.
L d) Layout of all switchgears (indoor/outdoor) with sections showing the
dimensions and clearances.
e) Dimensional layout drawing for each transformer type with list of all
componeilts.
f) Technical specifications of each transfo1mer type and its accessories.
g) Layout of the control building showing the space used for the remote
control panels, bay control panel (BCP), protection relay panel (PRP),
rt the AC/DC room, the offices, telec01mnunication and SCS .. etc.
Copy of type test ce1iificates for same type and same factory of the
L, h)
offered GIS switchgears and same type and same factory of all offered
switchgears equipment conducted by an internationally recog11ized
testing facility different from the manufacturer.
i) General layout of the substation showing buildings, access roads, fences,
entries of the external feeders ... etc.
j) Transformer firefighting system description.
k) List of all telecommunication and SCADA equipment with its panels
and its technical specifications.
1) List of all protective relays with its technical specifications and
protection system description.
Also the drawing and catalogues submitted bv the Bidder for pow,~·~:-
transformers shall in~lude but not limited to: f.;,:11<'._., <\
1.16.1.1. Reference list of all the components. . · / ff \.. \
\!' ·,.""' .
~~ •fl£';\
; ' \,' f)f:
:;
1.16.1.2. Btief description of tlie transfonners and accessories. 1::- ' /
-'.:\'/,
'"'-1, '._":,•c-,;- _- _,,_,,.
1.16. i .3. Description of impact recorders and their location on the transfonne?:.::.:.:::::::./, ·
as required in the specification.
1.16.1.4. Validation that the manufacturers have past experience as required

by bid document.
1.16.1.5. Early fault detection as required in specification of the transformer.
1.16.1.6. Brief description and catalogues of on-load tap chm1ger of the

transfonner.
1.16.1.7. Technical data, brief description and catalogues of the bushings.

New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter J
6'" October Eastern Extensions 270/22/22 kV GIS SIS
1.16.1.8. Specification of oil and confirmation that it can be mixed with any
oil complied Ivith IEC.
1.16.1.9. Transformer outline dimensional drawino-s showino- with its

"' "'
dimensions:
a) Location of impact recorders.
b) Shipping outline drawings showing; dimensions, weights and

Center of gravity of the transfonner ready for shipping.
1.16.1.10. Transfonner outline drawing required for design of fire fighting and
transfonner foundations.
1.16.1.11. Description required giving full infonnation on the transfonner and

accessories.
1.16.1.12. Curves of the relation between the through current of the tap
changer and the life of its contacts for the transfonner.
1.16.1.13. Curves of the relation between the specific loss and flux density for
the steel core. -~·-,
1.16.1.14. ISO 9001 atleast for the followings:
a) Transfonner manufacturer.
b) Tap-changer manufacturer.
c) Bushing manufacturer.
d) Windings manufacturer.
e) Core steel manufacturer.
f) Oil producer.
1.16.1.15. Transfonner sho1i circuit test certificate of similar transfonner as

specified.
1.16.i.16. Calculation of short circuit current in the primary, secondary and

tertiary windings for the transformer.
1.16.1.17. Others which are required by the Bid Document. Such as loading
curves, all type, routine, special, additional tests.
1.16.2. Drawings, Calculations, Samples. etc ... after letter of award:

1.16.2.1. The Contractor shall prepare all drawings necessary for the works. The
drawings shall be based on the specifications and drawings included in
the contract documents.
1.16.2.2. The Contractor shall prepare his drawings to show the most suitable
Electrfo Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 14/33

6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/S
arrangements of all details and accessories having regard to the conditions

applicable at the site.
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer within three months after
contract award five copies (three for the consultant, one for the zone and
one for head sectors of projects of Employer headquarters) for review
within the time named in the specifications or agreed in accordance with
these conditions such as general, workshop and erection drawings,
Calculations, samples, patterns and models as are called for in the
specifications or required by these conditions or as the Employer may
reasonably require.
Copies of all drawings which require to be reviewed by the Employer shall
be provided to him by the Co!ltractor, and the Contractor shall ensure that
such drawings are submitted in sufficient time tc, permit checking and
co1Tecting thereof before they are required to be used. Dispatching of
drawings to and from the Employer shall be effected by the most
expeditious way of transport; each copy of the documents should be
bounded in a hard cover loose - leaf.
IL
The above mentioned drawings and documents required to be reviewed by
t
the owner are as follows:
L a. Detailed design of the transformer.
b. Footing load drawing, showing dimensions of the tank under base, and
the footing and jacking step locations and sizes of freestanding
auxiliary equipment, together with the weights. The weights and
dimensions shall be accurate to within 10%.
J .16.2.3. Transfonner Outline Drawings, Showing:

a. Dimensions, weights, center of gravity and tank access of the
completely assembled oil-filled transfonner.
b. Location and description of all component parts and accessories.
c. Location of equipment and terminal connections for interfacing with
external equipment.
d. Manufacturer's name, catalogue number and characteristics of all
bushings.
e. Minimum height required for removing H.V. bushings.
f. Minimum height required for un-tanking the upper tank.
g. Transformer base details for foundation purpose.
1.16.2.4. Transfonner nameplate diagram.

1.16.2.5. Equipment nameplate diagram.
1.16.2.6. Schematic and wiring diagrams of on-load tap-changer
equipment.
1.16.2.7. Shipping outline showing dimensions, weights, and center of gravity of
the transformer ready for shipping.
1.16.2.8. Schematic and wiring diagrams showing auxiliary equipment cross-
referenced with fully descriptive literature, including manufacturer,
r
L Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 15/33
6th October Eastern Extensions 220122/12 kV G1S S/S
catalogue number and characteristics in the instruction manual.

1.16.2.9. Dimensional drawings specification sheets and/or characteristics of all
component parts and accessories.
1.16.2.10. Design and calculation of ability to withstand thermal and dynamic shoii
circuit on the transformer tenninals.
1.16.2.11. Any other documentation required for proper erection testing,
cmmnissioning, put into operation of the transformer.
1.16.2.12. Within a reasonable period not exceeding one month after receiving
such drawings, calculations, samples, patterns and models, one copy of
each document will be returned to the Contractor, dated, signed and
marked by the Employer and where necessary, with proposed
corrections indicated.
Drawings ilrnrked "Returned for corrections" shall be corrected by the
Contractor and sent to the Employer for his fmiher review.
Upon receipt of a copy of drawings marked Approved, the Contractor
shall send one copy marked "Issued for Construction" to the Employer.
This copy will be returned to the Contractor stamped and Approved by
the Employer for construction.
No drawings prepared by the Contractor, which require to be reviewed
by the Employer, shall be used for manufacturing or erection purposes
until they have been marked Approved and signed by the Employer for
erection or manufacturing. 1v1anufacturing starting prior to receipt of
approved drmving is done at the Contractor's own responsibility.
Review and approval of the Contractor's document (drawings, design
. ~tc.) shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under this
~;.c;ontract. Approved drawing is done at the Contractor's or of his
(t;,}1 ;• ••re~p?J;,~ibility for the correctness of the drawings.
//fc: \._:,
i 1P ) / .. . . soon as the Contractor has the approved issued for construction /
Xr~$:: : · 1na11:u~a.ctur~r ~opies, th~ Contractor shall _in addition to the copies ~or his
',_'::~,. ;'';•::•'s9~f~.use, d1str1bute copies of these drawmgs and such other particulars
1
, : : : : ~ !::as•directed by the Employer, to the Employer (2) paper copies and other
(2) to the consultant each bound in hard cover loose leaf) and to any
other parties who may, in the opinion of the Employer require them .One
copy of the drawings shall be kept by the Contractor at the site and shall
at all reasonable times be available for inspection and use by the
Employer and by any other person authorized in writing by the
Employer. The paper copies shall be used under the manufacturing and
erection period.
Calculations, samples, patterns, models etc., submitted to the Employer

for his review, shall be such as are called for herein or as may be
necessary for proving compliance with the contract. Calculations shall
be submitted in triplicate.
E]ectiic Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 16/33

Volume 2, Technical Specifications Rev.( 0)
6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/22122 kV GIS SIS
1.16.2.13. The Contractor shall submit in due time, nvo copies of preliminary
operation and maintenance instrnctions and service book to the
Employer for conunents. Commented documentation shall be delivered
in three sets to the site three months before cormnissioning and be
updated under the erection and the commissioning period. After
commissioning, the Contractor shall submit two hard copies of each
final drawing and of the operation and maintenance instruction books
with all the design modifications incorporated to the Employer for
review.
1.16.2.14. Installation. Operating and Maintenance Manuals
a) All infonnation and details required for civil works, erection, testing
and c01m11issioning shall be submitted to the owner.
b) One (1) copy of each approved drawing and schematic.
c) Manufacturer's outline drawing and cross-section of all bushings
including catalogue number and other pertinent data.
d) Manufacturer's description instrnctions drawings and ratings of the
on-load tap-changer including detailed instrnctions and drawings for
the replacement of contacts and springs as well as operating
instruction for complete on-load changer control scheme.
e) Manufacturer's brochures for all component parts and accessories.
1) Gas detector relays.
2) Oil level gauges.
3) Oil and winding temperature indicators.
4) Pressure relief devices.
5). Dehydrating breathers.
6) Automatic voltage regulators (AVRs).
7) Fans.
8) Relays and Contactors.
9) Radiator valves.
10) Tank top accesses ladder.
1.16.2.15. Description of all auxiliary equipment shown on and cross referenced to

the schematic and wiring diagram. This shall include a full description,
manufacturer, type, catalogue number and characteristics.
1.16.2.16. Cu1Tent transformer test reports. These shall consist of phase angle and
Ratio measurements, polarity checks, excitation curves and winding
resistance.
1.16.2.17. Insulation power factor of all bushings.
1.16.2.18. Insulation power factor of all windings, measured from winding to
ground and bet\veen windings.
1.16.2.19. Procedures for assembling, dismantling, maintaining and operating the
work and all its components and accessories. This shall include
instructions for-on-site processing and oil filling of the main unit.

Ne:v,.1 Urban Communlties Authority (NUCA) Chapter 1
6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/2?/22 kV GJS SIS
1.16.2.20. Photographs approximately 200mm X 275mm (8"X 11 ") showing views

of the top and each side of the core and winding assembly prior to
tanking.
1.16.2.21. Parts list with quantities of all different parts used in the work.
1.16.2.22. List of spares with catalogue numbers suitable for ordering purposes.
1.16.2.23. Certified transformer test reports. The Owner shall submit these for
insertion into the manuals.
1.16.2.24. Any modifications or amendments found necessary during the course of
field erection.
1.16.2.25. Operational charts indicating winding temperature versus transfonner
loading, oil temperature versus transfonner loading and operating time
versus transformer overloading.
1.16.2.26. Data specifications and servicing.
Beside test certificates and instructions for service maintenance and
adjustment the following documents shall be included:
a) A binding dimension sketch the transformer showing the location of
the motor-operated driving mechanism etc.
b) A Binding sketch of the driving mechanism.
c) An inner connection diagram for the mechanism, with conductor and
te1111inal marking and unambiguous apparatus marking referring to
the description according to point 4 below.
d) Function description, relating to the above-named connection and
circuit diagrams, including all essential data in accordance with these
specifications.
e) Details of any discrepancy from these specifications with view to
possible approval of these.
f) Description of equipment for combined operation with another
transfonner, where such equipment is included in the delivery.
1.16.2.27. Current Transfonner Data

a) Excitation curves.
b) Nominal voltage classes
c) Basic impulse insulation levels (BIL).
d) Frequency.
e) Rated primary and secondary currents.
f) Accuracy ratings atstandard burdens.
g) Steady state ratio error and phase angle error.
h) Continuous-current rating factors.
i) Short-time mechanical current ratings.
j) Short-time thennal current ratings.
k) Current transfonner secondary resistance.
I) Transient performance characteristics.
1.16.2.28. Test Schedule

a) List oftests in the sequence in which they will be performed.
b) For each test state tap position to be used for test.

6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/S
c) Test voltages for all dielectric tests.

d) Circuit diagram for induced Potential test.
1.16 .2.29. Test Reports

Submit test reports in an approved format.
1.16.3. AS-Built Documentation:
1.16.3.1. ·when a drawing contains all design and commissioning modifications it

will be marked "As-Built" and sent to the Employer by the Contractor.
1.16.3.2. The Contactor shall submit to the Employer within three months after
the commissioning five complete sets hard copies and one soft copy, in
addition to five sets of the operation and maintenance instruction book
(one of them is soft copy).
1.16.3.3. The documentation· shall consist of all installation and construction

drawings, operation and maintenance manuals that are required for the
Employer operation, maintenance, dismantling, re-assembling, repairing
and adjusting of all delivered and erected parts of the work.
1.16.3.4. The work will not be considered as completed and fmal taking over
ce1iificate will not be issued until all documentation as specified in this
clause to be delivered by the Contractor.
1.16.4. Layout And Editorial Requirements:
1.16.4.1. For all documents, written or drawn, the SI-system and units shall be
used.
1.16.4.2. Drawing sizes shall conform to the ISO standard i.e.
1. Al (597 x 841mm).
ii. A2 (420 x 5941mn).
m. A3 (297 x 420mm).
iv. A4 (210 x 297mm).
1.16.4.3. Sizes larger than Al shall be avoided.
1.16.4.4. The schematic diagrams, apparatuses and cable lists shall
of A3. Scales to be used on the drawings shall be 1:10, 1:20, 1:40,
1:50, and multiples of this series.
1.16.4.5. All dimensions on the drawings shall be given in mm.
1.16.4.6. All text in the documentation shall be in the English language.
1.16.4.7. Manuals shall be in size A4 and bound in loose-leaf cover.
1.16.5. General Manuals:

1.16.5 .1. The general manuals, covering the whole project, shall be delivered to
the Employer before the works are taken over, they shall be in sufficient
detail to enable the Employer to extend, maintain, dismantle,
reassemble, repair, overhaul, test and adjust all the parts of the works.
Elect1ic Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 19/33

6'" October Eastern Extensions 220i22/l2 kV GIS S/S
The works shall not be considered to be completed for purposes of

taking over until such Manuals have been supplied to the Employer. The
Manuals shall include but not limited to the following.
1.16.5.1.1. A general description of the equipment in this contract.
1.16.5 .1.2. Operating instructions, suitable for training of personnel.
1.16.5.1.3. General maintenance instructions, describing frequencies and

methods for regular inspections, for planned maintenance and for
regular part replacements.
1.16.5.1.4. The instructions shall also include fault location guides.
1.16.5.1.5. The manuals shall include spare part lists with all the information
required for ordering and description of any special tools needed for
service of the equipment.
1.16.5.1.6. All other drawings or manuals, which are not mentioned, but are
deemed necessary for a safe and proper handling of the deliv~9:B~--
equipment. /'. ,f''' · · ·
66
1.l · · ~~~~~~~~;:t~~~ a~~rn~~~:i~::
~
0
not limited to the following: (~):~'-~-,
i.16.6.1. All layout, civil work, construction and installation drawings.'Zi.,;; ;::·
1.16.6.2. All calculations regarding electrical, mechanical, grounding and civi-1::::_.

design.
1.16.6.3. Apparatus lists including all apparatuses installed, sub-divided in

bays and panels. Lists shall include technical data, order number and
reference to schematic diagrams.
1.16.6.4. Cable lists including all cables within the plant. Cables shall be listed
in numerical order and cable type and location of tenninals shall be
indicated.
1.16.6.5. Com1ection diagrams or tables indicating all internal and external

com1ections in panels and cubicles, with references to cable
numbers.
1.16.6.6. Schematic diagrams covering the complete plant in a survey able

way. The diagrams shall contain apparatus numbers, tenninal block
numbers and all contact numbers.
1.16.6.7. List of all apparatus, devices and tools which are used and to be used
for test, maintenance, disassembly and assembly which consider part
of the contract.
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page-20/33

New Urban Communities Authority O✓ UCA) Chapter J
1.16.7. Apparatus Documentation:

For each apparatus Documents for approval shall be delivered as
follows but shall also be included in the as built documentation.
1.16.7.1. In the Bid: Type test certificates and special test certificates.
1.16.7.2. Before erection started:
1.16.7.2.1. Routine test ce1iificates.
1.16.7.2.2. Data lists required by the Employer with amendments incorporated.

The contents of the lists shall c01Tespond to the schedules of this
document. Data lists will be regarded as binding for the manufacturer.
1.16.7.2.3. Dimension sketches. They shall be regarded as binding for the
manufacturer and shall contain measures, weights and features of the
apparatus.
1.16.7.2.4. Reasonable detail drawings as required by the Employer Connection

diagrams, showing all internal and external connections of electrical,
hydraulic and pressurized gas types.
1.16.7.2.5. List of components and details on the apparatus. They may preferably
be included in the dimension sketch.
1.16.7.2.6. In case of alterations, agreed upon by all parties, new documents sh~ll
be issued.
1.16.7.2.7. It is obliging for the Contractor in the foture to give written...-...~~
instructions for repair and also infonnation about improverµeirts ·
possible. This shall be done without costs.
1.16.8. Final Test Report Book: \

\.•
''
1.16.8.1. All final test records - factory and site tests including the compo'r\_ents'
tests--shali be consolidated into one book called, The Test Rep01t_,_
Book (TRB) which will be paii of the "as built documentation". Five
copies of the (TRB) shall be supplied.
1.17. TRANSPORT OF PLANT AND CONTRACTORS EQUIPMENT

1.17 .1. The Contractor shall aiTange and pay for the transport of the plant,
material, etc., and his equipment to the site as well as the return of his
equipment there from. He shall also arrange and pay for all transport,
handling and storage of the plant, materials and equipment within the
site.
1.17 .2. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that shipping is
aiTanged on vessels having suitable equipment for unloading of the
plant and equipment.
1.17 .3. The cost of the supply of all documents necessary for transport,
shipping, customs clearance, etc., shall be included in the contract

6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS SIS
pnce.
1.17.4. The Employer shall review the transpo1i arrangements. The
Contractor shall, in good time, inform the Employer about each
consignment by providing a list of contents, also specifying the
shipping date and the expected date of arrival.
1.17.5. It shall be deemed that all costs in connection with the transp01i,
including storage, insurance etc., detailed above and in conditions of
contract, being the responsibility of the Contractor, have been
included and allowed for in his prices stated in the schedules.
1.17 .6. The Contractor shall arrange and carry out under his own
responsibility and supervision the local transport from the port of
disembarkation to the site.
1.17. 7. The Contractor shall, at his own convenience, gather all necessary
information and arrange for all necessary provisions in order to obtain
accurate infonnation about un-loading and local transport facilities as
well as prevailing local conditions, specifically the safe load bearing
capacity of highways and bridges. The Contractor shall bear every,
and all expenses related herewith which shall be included in the
contract price.
1.17 .8. The Contractor shall use every reasonable means and care to prevent
any of the highways or bridges on the route to the site from being
~----- damaged or injured by any traffic of the Contractor or any of his sub-
/,::; ' .... · ·::;.Contractors. He shall select routes, choose and use vehicles, restrict
/,..;·,Jc .·. ·. . · dnd distribute loads so that ·any such extraordinary traffic that will
I·,/ - /fr(evitably arise from the moving of Contractor's equipment and
I ./; • material from or to the site shall be limited as far as reasonably
\/. · · possible and so thaf no damage or injury may be occasioned to
'< highways and bridges. If during carrying out of the work at any time
thereafter the Contractor should receive any claim arising out of the
execution of the works in respect of damage or injury to highways or
bridges he shall i1mnediately rep01i the same to the Employer and
thereafter he shall negotiate the settlement of any payment of all sums
due in respect of all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs,
charges and expenses in relation thereto.
1.18. PACKING AND TRANSPORT MARKING

1.18.l. All parts of the plant and Contractor's equipment shall be well
packed and protected against loss or damage during the transport by
sea and over land and whilst in storage under tropical conditions. All
packing shall be perfonned in such a way that the plant and
equipment will not be damaged by overturning of the Lots.
1.18.2. Instruction for handling shall be clearly marked on all parts, Lots and
crates.
1.18.3. All parts, Lots and crates shall be adequately marked in order to
enable identification. Each item contained in a Lot shall be clearly

Volume 2: Technical Specifications Rev.( OJ
New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chaµter l
identified on the packing list by its description and pa1i number and
assembly drawing reference, and each item shall be marked or
labeled to correspond with the packing list. The marking system to
be used shall be as instructed by the Employer.
1.18.4. The cost of all equipment necessary for the temporary fixing and
supporting of the various parts of the plant and the various Lots to
crane hooks, rail wagons etc., during handling, transp01i and storage
and the cost of load distribution beams, etc., where they form pmi of
the packing or crates, shall be included in the contract price.
. 1.18.5. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all packing and
unpacking and any loss or dmnage shall be made good to the
satisfaction of the Employer by the Contractor and, except where
otherwise provided, at the Contractor's own expense.
1.19. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

The climatic conditions are shown in schedule (2S1), Volume 2, Chapter
~-
')
1.20. SAFETY REGULATIONS
The Contractor shall comply with all the regulations m1d requirements of
the government regarding machinery m1d electrical apparatus and the
safety of the men working thereon, in respect of any works under test, or
in use for the service of the Employer. No testing or any other work in
connection ·with works liable to be electrically charged from any other
source shall be permitted except under written permit to work, which the
Employer will issue for that purpose.
1.21. PROGRESS REPORTS

1.21.1. The Contractor shall submit to the Employer for review and approval
in such form as may be required, detailed progress reports of the
design manufacture and shipment works covered by the contract and
V'' . . .
all field works. ·
1.21.2. These progress reports shall be considered the base for p a y m e n t ~ .
1.22. TERMINALS. WIRING AND CONNECTIONS
1.22.1. Terminals:
\ ~;
'\ .
1.22.1.1. Tenninal blocks shall be provided to acco1mnodate all circu,t;___ ..
entering or leaving the panels and cubicles.
1.22.1.2. Tenninals shall be of screw type, unit construction, suitable for
mounting on a co1mnon bracket. Tenninals shall be rated for
minimum insulation class of 600 V. Terminals with a disconnecting
link shall be provided to enable isolation of a circuit when
necessary. Isolation of current transfonner's circuit must short the

6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GJS S/S
circuit.
1.22.1.3. Equipment terminals for current, potential and protection trip circuits
shall be equipped with spring-loaded contacts similar to clippon
(Weidmneller) tenninals RSE type.
1.22.1.4. A minimum of twenty-five (25%) spare tenninals shall be provided
as spare for futnre circuits. Tenninals blocks shall be arranged
vertically, mounted at sides of cubicle and set towards rear so that
ferrule numbers may be easily read. Terminals shall be grouped and
labeled according to their duty by strips securely attached to each
tenninal block.
1.22.1.5. Ferrules identified with. appropriate wire numbers sh;,11 be fitted at
both ends of each wire within panels and cubicles.
l..22.1.6. Terminals should be fire resistant.
1.22.1. 7. Current transfonner circuits' terminals should be provided with short
circuit facility.
1.22.2. Wirim! and Connection:

1.22.2.1. Control wiring shall be overall shielded, fire resistant, and vinyl
insulated 70 °c stranded copper of size not less than the following:
1.22.2.2. Panel control wiring single conductor 1.5 imn2 and cunent circuits
not less than 2.5 1mn2 •
1.22.2.3. Wiring / cables external to panels (excluding current transfonner)
>2.5 mm2 .
2
1.22.2.4. Current transfonner secondary wiring 6mm .
2
1.22.2.5. Twisted pairs 1.2 mm •
~f.22-:-2.6.
/ ··.,;. ·: >
Extra flexible wires shall be used for connections to equipment on
./ · · · ' ·. ;,\ hinged frames.
1:22.2:'f)Yi.ll wiring shall be carried out without intennediate splicing. Cables
( .· · ~hall enter panels from the bottom. Flame proof plastic wiring shall
, , be provided at sides and bottom of panels to cany wiring vertically
\\ . 1
/ to terminal blocks. Ducts shall be perforated and shall provide with a
'\.
'"<. . . · ,>· detachable cover.
-~~r:2i.2.8. Wire ends shall be fitted with crimped type tenninals in which the
end is inserted along the full length of the tenninal. Not more than
two (2) wires shall be tenninated on any one (1) stud or terminal.
Each tenninal point on block shall be indelibly labeled in accordance
with wiring designations.
1.22.2.9. DC trip and AC voltage supplies and wiring to main protection shall
be segregated from those for back-up protection and also from
protective apparatus of special purpose.
1.22.2.10. Incoming power supply to each panel shall be through circuit
breakers in such a manner that supply to any one (1) panel can be
isolated from remaining panels. All cubicle and control wiring shall
confonn to following color code:

Volume 2 : Technical Specifications Rev.( OJ
6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GJS S/S
a) Red, yellow, Blue- AC phase connections.

b) Green - Neutral c01mections either grounded or ungrounded.
c) Black - Ac control wiring other than current and voltage
transformer connections in AC/DC circuits.
d) Grey - DC circuit (220 V DC).
e) White - DC circuits (48 V DC).
f) All wire numbering shall be 111 accordance with a system
approved by Employer.
1.22.3. Current and Voltage Transformer Circuits:

1.22.3.1. Cun·ent transfonner secondary circuits shall be terminated on
test/injection links.
1.22.3.2. Voltage trar,sformer secondary circuits shall be tenninated through
MCB mounted in such manner that MCB is easily accessible and
observable.
1.22.3.3. Ground Bus: A 25 1run x 3 1run copper ground bus shall extend
along the length of each panel. Clan1p type connectors shall be
provided for directly connecting together ground busses of adjacent
panels. Bus sha!l be so arranged that it does not interfere with
removal of any panel from a panel assembly or with access to or
operation of equipment mounted within a panel.
1.23. LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION OF PLANT:
1.23.1. General:
1. Labels shall be so designed and placed as to facilitate orientation
both within the switchyard and when approaching it from outside.
All parts of the installation shall be easily identifiable. Label text
shall be in English and comply with IEC standards, (where
specifically mentioned English & Arabic will be provided).
Switchgear, Cubicles, instruments, HV cables and terminal as well
as other special equipment shall be provided with identification
, plates. The labeling system for the plates shall be used for the
identification of parts in drawings, lists etc.
3:. The identification, consisting of the clear text and the number shall
be engraved on the plates which shall be Manufactured of
corrosion resistant metal (aluminum or brass) and be complete with
two drilled holes for screws. The language to be used generally
shall be English, signs which are important for operational or
safety reasons shall also be in Arabic. Labels shall clearly and
unequivocally serve for the orientation of staff and be positioned in
accorda.11.ce with the identification system and contain a brief
readable text. The plates shall be solidly fitted to the respective
plant parts by appropriate means. The Contractor shall submit his
proposal for the type, material and mounting of the plates in due
time so as to enable the Employer to consider alternative proposals
and to decide on a uniform design for the whole plant.
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/')'J.,/22 kV GlS SiS
4. The Contractor shall comply with the Employer's decision,

regarding the design of the plates without any extra charge.
5. The labeling of all equipment, including any equipment provided
by the Employer is part of the extent of supply, i.e. the preparation
oflabeling lists and the supply and labels.
1.23.2.Label material. color:
1.23 .2.1. J\1aterial for labels shall be either enameled sheet metal or fiber-glass
reinforced polyester with an embedded color layer.
1.23.2.2. The label background shall be white.
1.23.2.3. The text shall be red.
1.23 .2.4. There shall be a red frame around the label.

1.23.3. Tvoe of label:
1.23 .3 .1. Necessary labels for orientation in a switchyard are apparatus
designation labels and phase markings.
1.23.3.2. The designation labels shall have the same symbols as used in the
station layout diagram.
1.23.3.3. The phase markings shall have the symbols Ll, L2 and L3 for the
three phases.
1.23.4.Label Size:
1.23.4.1. Labels shall have dimensions according to the table below.
1.23.4.2. The size shall be chosen with regard to location. The same size shall
be chosen for designation label and phase markings in each case.
1.23.4.3.
SizeN2 Unit 1 2 3 4 5
Label height 1mn so 74 105 210 297
Text height 1mn 30 40 60 120 160
Stem width 1mn 4.5 6 8 15 20
Frame width mm 5 6 8 15
1.23.4.4. The label length is dependent upon the number of symbols.
1.23.5.0UTDOOR EQUIPMENT:
1.23.5.l. Location:
1.23 .5 .1.1. Labels shall be placed on bases, cross-anns, consoles etc, or on other
eaiihed paiis of the apparatus which nonnally cannot be removed,

in such a way as to be easily readable.

1.23.5.1.2.Labels shall be placed on the nonnal operating and/or inspection
side of the apparatus.
1.23.5.2. Desilmation labels:

e Line Exits:
a) One label, size 5, on both sides of the cross-arm, in the
middle phase.
b) One line-destination label, size 4, on both sides of the cross-
ann, in the middle phase.
111 Capacitive voltage transfonners: One label, size 3, in the middle
phase.
" Earthing switches: One label, size 1, on each operating
mechanism.
• Line traps: One label, size 3, in one phase or, if required in both
phases.
o Lightning arresters: One label, size 3, in the middle phase.
• Transfo1111ers: One label, size 5, on the service side.
1.23".5.3. Phase markings:

1. Line exits: One label, size 5, in each phase, on both sides of the
cross-arm.
2. Eaiihing switches: One label size 1, on each operating
mechanism.
3. Other apparatus: One label, size 3, in each phase.
1.23.5.4. Fixing:
1. Labels shall be fixed with stainless steel screws.
2. Labels sizes 1, 2 and 3 shall have 2 fixing holes 6 1mn.
3. Labels sizes 4 and 5 shall have 4 fixing holes 6 mm.
4. Enameled labels shall have stainless steel hole- reinforcements to
avoid damage to the enainel when fixing,
1.23.6.INDOOR EQUIPMENT:
1.23 .6.1. Location:
Labels shall be placed on the walls of the building or as so,,u1.1ecv
below.
1.23.6.2. Designation Labels:

• Line Exits:
a) One label, size 3, on the inside of the wall, under the line cx11t.~•,
b) One line-destination label, size 3, placed as above.
c) If required labels may also be placed on the outside of the wall.
• Bus bars: One label, size 3, on both ends of the bus bar enclosures.
• Apparatus: One label, size 1, on each of the operating mechanisms
or tenninal boxes.
6'" Oc!ober Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/S
1.23.6.3. Phase Markings:

,. Line Exits:
a) One label, size 3, in each phase, on the inside of the wall, under
the line exit.
b) If required also on the outside of the wall.
• Bus bars: One label, size 3, in each phase, on both ends of the bus-
bar.
• Apparatus: One label, size 3, in each phase, on the operating
mechanisms or the tenninal boxes.
1.23 .6.4. Fixing:

1.23.6.4.1. Labels shall, if possible, be fixed with stainless steel screws.
1.23.6.4.2. Label sizes 1, 2 and 3 shall have 2 fixing holes, 6 mm.
1.23.6.4.3. Label sized 4 and 5 shall have 4 fixing holes, 6 mm.
1.23.6.4.4. Enameled labels shall have stainless steel hole-reinforcements to
avoid damage to the enamel when fixing.
1.23.6.4.5. In cases screw fixing ·will damage the GIS-enclosures fixing
with glue may be allowed.
1.23 .6.5. Labeling of Low-voltage, Control and Tele-equipment:
1.23.6.5.l. All switchboards, distribution boards and contTol boards and

units thereof, components mounted therein and wiring and
cables, shall be labeled and marked.
1.23.6.5.2. The purpose of the labeling and marking being to make possible
the identification of switchboard and control board and parts
thereof and their relation to the relevant technical documentation
in order to facilitate a rational and simple manner of installation,
operation, trouble-shooting, maintenance and repair. Labeling
and marking shall apply as follows:
I. Each switchboard and control board shall have one label stating
the make, the maker's identification data and rates, insulation
voltage class and one label identifying the board in the plant.
2. Each unit of switchboard or control board (such as a cell, panel,
cubicle or box as well as remote located switching and control
devices) shall have a label identifying the unit and stating its
purpose in the plant. The latter infonnation is in more
complicated cases suitably given in a mimic diagram.
3. All apparatus or units of apparatus in the panels, cell etc., shall
have labels or markings identifying the apparatus or units
thereof (nonnally the relevant apparatus numbers used in the
technical documents for the switchgear or control gear). In some
cases this marking shall be completed with function marking in
plain text. Apparatus labels shall be affixed by means of screws

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GJS SIS
or rivets on the framework, so they remain in place when the

apparatus is dismounted or changed.
4. All tenninals of apparatus or apparatus units shall be clearly
marked. However, this marking may be omitted when the design
and arrangement of the apparatus is such that a marking
obviously is unnecessary.
5. All electronic printed circuit boards shall have type marking.
The electronic cubicles shall have item marking for each circuit
board for identification of the circuit board in the schematic
diagram.
6. All instruments indicating devices and control devices shall
have identification marking in plain te:;,,.1: or simple symbols or
colors. Control devices shall in addition have marking of control
positions (e.g. MANUAL-AUTOMATIC, OPEN-CLOSE) in
plain text, simple symbols or colors.
7. Control cable terminals and, for small load circuits also power
terminals shall be clearly marked for identification.
1.23.6.5.3. The marking system shall be logically built-up from letters

and/or figures in one system consistently used within the
switchgear or control gear.
Internal wiring within switchboard, control board or apparatus

units shall have all wire ends marked, the marking to include as
a minimum the same marking as has the tenninal to which the
wire end is connected. The marking shall be carried out with
sleeves or similar. Tape is not permitted .
.. 1.23.6.. 5.5. Cun-ent and voltage circuits shall also have phase marking and,
where necessary, polarity is marking. Protective earth wires
shall be marked with green/yellow.
1.23.6.5.6. Cables connected to switchboard, control board, external

apparatus etc., shall be marked with cable numbers according to
the cable list and core number according to the external
connection diagram. In addition all cable cores shall bear the
same marking as the tenninals to which cores are connected.
Marking with glued tape is not permitted.
1.23.6.5.7. The marking shall be indicated with ferrules. The fe1TUles shall
be of white insulated material and be provided with glossy finish
to prevent adhesion and dirt. They shall be clearly and durably
marked in black and shall not be affected by damp or oil.
1.23.6.5.8. Trenches with buried cables shall be marked with labels on

walls where applicable or with labels on posts with one set up at

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS SIS
each end of a road crossing, one set up for every point of change
of direction of cable trench, and one set up for each t\venty
meter of a cable trench. The trenches shall be provided with
warning tapes along all the trenches.
1.23.6.5.9. All labels shall be of plastic or metal indoor and of enameled

metal outdoors, and shall have the text or symbol engraved. Text
and symbols shall be of dark color and the surface shall be in
light.
1.23.6.5.10. All labels shall be in English and shal! be subject to the

Employer's approval.
1.23.6.5.11. All labels shall be permanently fixed to the switchboard and

apparatus. Glued labels and marking tape are not acceptable.
1.23.6.5.12. Some of the above required markings and labeling might,

according to the Employer approval, be combined or omitted,
especially as regards uncomplicated parts of the equipment.
1.23.7.LABELING OF MECHANICAL AND PIPING SYSTEMS:

1.23.7.1. All ventilation-and air conditioning equipment including control
equipment shall be marked with laminated plastic signs with
pennanent black text on white background.
1.23.7.2. Piping and ducts shall be marked with arrows and text telling the
transported medium.
1.23. 7.3. Valves shail be marked with numbered valve plates.
1.23.7.4. Marking and technical documentation shall correspond.
~~
Warnings: Warnings markings or notices shall be in English and Arabic/' •I
will be provided. /'t ·
1.23.8.NAMEPLATES:
1/
V
' '
1.23.8.1. Nameplates shall be provided and mounted in appropriate locations to,,
indicate information required on designation and ratings as applicable""· ¾
of all equipment, relays, meters, control switches pushbuttons, etc. --
1.23 .8.2. Nameplates shall be furnished in duplicate, one (1) engraved 111
English, and the other in Arabic. Submit a list of name plates in
English together with the translated in Arabic for Employer review
and approval before fabricating the name plates.
1.23.8.3. The nameplates shall be stainless steel or aluminum.
1.23.8.4. Nameplates approximately 15 mm x 100 mm with Lettering 41mn

height, showing device function for each relay shall be placed on

6'" October Eastern Extensions 220122/22 kV GIS SiS
front and rear each panel. Nameplates for indicating lamps and
pushbuttons shall be identical to those for relays but they shall
measure, 15 mm x 60 mm. Ampere ratings for fuses and also
nameplates with descriptive functions for items shall be provided.
1.23.8.5. Nameplates shall be mounted 10 1mn below relay cases, 5 1m11 below
indicating lights.
1.23.8.6. The equipment continuous current ratings shall be specified at the

1mnd.mum ambient temperature the equipment will experience.
1.23.8.7. Equipment nameplates which contain applied standards and Employer

approved the normal manufacturer's nameplate information shall be
located on or near the specific equipment.
1.24. IRON. STEEL AND l\1ETAL WORKS

As per applied standards mentioned in Clause 1.27 and EUS standard
applied in EETC.
1.25. BIDDERS DOCUMENTS

Descriptive literature, drawings, catalogues etc issued by Bidder is only to
explain his Bid. In those instai,ces where the Bid Documents (BD) and
the successful Bidder's documents is in conflict, Con1.Tactor shall be
obliged to follow the (BD) and he is not entitled to any claim.
1.26. APPLIED STANDARDS

The electrical equipment shall be designed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with the latest edition of the following relevant standards:
l .IEC - Standards.
2.ISO standards.
3.Other referenced codes and standards.
1.27. Precedence of Codes and Standards

In case of conflict between this specification and any of the referenced
codes and standards the following order of precedence shall apply:
This specification.
IEC standard.
ISO standards.
Other referenced codes and standards.

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G IS S/S
1.27.1. Compliance \Vith Standards
All materials and equipment used and provided under the conlTact
must be in accordance with IEC or ISO publications and
recommendations. Where no such recommendation exists then
materials shall be in accordance with such other authoritative
standards appropriate to the country of manufacture as in the opinion
of the engineer ensures an equivalent or higher quality.
If the Contractor offers materials, equipment, design calculations or

. tests which conform to standards other than those mentioned in the
specified applied standards, full details of the differences between
the proposed standard and the specified applied standards in so far as
they affect the design or performance of the equipment, shall be
submitted for Employer review.
The recommendation or standards used shall be those last published
prior to the date of closing of Bids.
1..?8
, . "frammg
· ·
1. 220 Kv GIS:
• One maintenance engineer.
" One central project engineer.
2. Protection & Substation Automation:

• One maintenance engineer.
• One central project engineer.
3. Telec01mnunication:
" One maintenance engineer.
• One central project engineer.
" The central project engineers shall be trained in the design and
engineering office in the factories. No training start without approval
of training material document.
• The contractor shall bear all costs related to training of trainees.
when it is outside Egypt, Contractor shall bear all costs including
VISA, Airplane Ticket, Full accommodation in hotel not less than
three stars, Transportation, medical insurance .......... etc. In
addition, The contractor shall pay 100 USD/ per diem to each
trainee.

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/?2/2'2 kV GiS SIS
o Training for engineers of Substation Automation that include:

o SCS and BCU general overview.
o Operator training.
o SCS & BCU software maintenance.
o SCS & BCU hardware maintenance.
o Communication protocol.
o Engineering tools and system configuration tools utility.
o Building and modifying databases.
o Building and modifying single line diagram
Training for operator

o SCS and BCU general overview.
o Use of the HMI &system software tools.
o Control & supervision philosophy
• All training documentation, manuals shall be handed over to the

trainee.
• Contractor shall include a description of the proposed course content,
duration, and technical level of the instruction.
0 The on job training shall take place at the substation site during site
test and commissioning.
1.29. Factorv Acceptance Tests (FAT):
- No equipment shall be shipped to the owner until the factory tests

for the equipment are completed satisfactorily and all variances
resolved and approved by the owner representatives.
- Successful completion of factory tests shall in no way constitute
final acceptance of any portion thereof.
- Factory tests shall not begin without the prior delivery and
approval of documentation for both the test procedures and the
test plan.
- FAT for all supplied equipment shall be done in the
manufacturer's factory in presence of ovmer representatives.
1.30. Tvpe Tests:
Bidder should submit all equipment test ce1iificates and type test reports, valid
through the last ten ( 10) years according to IEC standard.

!
L
CHA.PTER TWO
SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES

Volume 2: Technical Specifications Rev. (O)
6 !l' October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/S
CHAPTER TWO
SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES
TABLE OF CONTENT
Ciause Description Page
2S-1 Standard Environmental conditions

I 2S-2 220 kV System parameters 4
2S-3 Medium Voltage System parameters 5
2S-4 Min. clearances, factor of safety and degree of protection of

enclosures
2S-5 Technical Particulars 7
Earth Quake Zones of Egypt

I

(2S-1) - Standard Environmental Conditions
Clause Description Value
1- Pressure mb-annual mean. 1013
2- Atmospheric Temperature °C
:Maximum mean daily (Ambient temp.) 50
Minimum mean daily -5
Yearly mean 30
3- Reiative humidity %
Maximum relative humidity 100
Minimum relative humidity 20
Average relative humidity 75
Daily mean. 95
4- Rain fall mean-annual total (mm) 65
5- Maximum wind speed (m/sec.) at 10111 above 35

ground level.
6- Soil temperature at a depth of 1.5 m. 25°c
7- Solar energy radiation W/m2 2:. 1100
8- Wind pressure N/m2 766
9- Absolute black bulb °C max. recorded 75.7
10- Thunder stonns Occasional
11- Sand stonns Occur occasionally specially in desert.

12- Pollution Heavv pollution > 50 µS
13- Seismic load According to Egyptian code and attached map.
Note:-
" This table is valid for altitude (0-1000 m)

Nev.,, Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 2
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/2')/22 kV GIS S/S
(2S-2) - 220 KV SYSTEJ\1 PAR,L"l\fETERS
Parameter Value
~tern I .
1- Frequency Hz 50
2- Configuration 3 phase
3- Neutral an·angement solidly eaiihed I
4- Service system voltage kV,.m.s 220
5- Rated syster,; voltage for equipment kV,.m.s 245
6- Duration of maximum temporary over voltage. sec. 0.5
7- Rated short-time withstand current k.Ar.m.s 63
8- Rated duration of short circuit sec. 1
9- Rated peak withstand current kA 157.5
L 10- Lightning impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 µs (LIWL) kVneak 1050
lone minute power frequency withstand voltage to kV,.m.s 460
11- earth
I'
12- Min. specific leakage path cm/kV service voltage For:
Outdoor Equinment cm/kV 3.5
"
.
Outdoor Surge arrester and cable sealing end cm/kV 4.5
13- Radio interference level. micro. volt. Max.2500

New Urban Communities Authority O-.JUCA) Chapter 2
(2S-3) lVIedium voltage Svstem Parameters

(2s-4)22kV svstem parameters:
J
Item Parameter Value
1- Frequency Hz 50
r
2- Configuration 3phase
3- Neutral arrangement In this Bid
Artificial
earthing
through zigzag
transformer and
neutral
resistance
-
4- Service system voltage kVr.m.s 22
5- Rated system voltage for equipment kVr.m.s 24
6- !Rated short-time withstand current. k.A,.m.s 31.5
~
7- Rated duration of short circuit. sec. .)
8- Rated pea.1< withstand current. kA 80

9- Lightning impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 µs kV 125/145
(LIWL) Peak to earth i across isolating distance.
One minute power frequency withstand voltage to
10- \Earth. kVr.rn.s 50
11- Min. specific leakage path (cm/kVservice voltage) for :

- Outdoor surge atTester & cable sealing ends mm/kV 45
- Equipment : Outdoor mm/kV 35
Indoor mm/kV 25
Inside cubicles mm/kV 20

6"' October Eastern Extensions ?20/22/22 kV GlS SIS
(2S-4) Min. Clearances, Factors Of Safety And Degrees of Protection of Enclosures
Description 220kV 22kV
A. Allowable Minimum Clearance fem)

1- For the receiving steel structure andB.B:
., Bei:\veen live conductors and earthed parts 250 85
. Between phases in air 375 85
2- For the equipment (Indoor/outdoor) :
"' Between live conductors and earthed paiis 210 22
. Between phases in air 240 22
. Between live conductors and access area (ground or Platform)
or from the nearest conductor of one section at which work
may be carried out when the fonner conductor is alive for
indoor. - 285
. " Betv,reen live conductors and ground or platfonn, or from the
nearest conductor of one section at which work may be
carried out when the fonner conductor is alive for Outdoor. 475 . 285
'.3- Road crossing in substation. 800 >600cm
B. Factors of Safetv
., Conductors based on ultimate strength 3
0 Steel structure under max. simultaneous working loading
based on elastic limit
2
. Insulator metal fittings, based upon elastic limit. 2.5
. Insulator unit based upon electromechanical test 3.5
. Tension insulator sets including fittings, based on ultimate
strength 2.5
. Steel structure foundation against ove1iuming and uprooting
__ :,-
?
under max. simultaneous working loading
C. Degrees of Protection of Enclosures
. All the cubicles, panels, boxes etc. which to be provided for enclosing, equipment, instruments,
terminal blocks, M.D.F. etc. should be with degree of protection (IP) not less than the following
NO Description Indoor Outdoor
1. Enclosure of equipment. IP 50 IP 54
2. Components inside the enclosure IP 30 IP 30
..
:
/ .

Nev; Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 2
6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/12 kV GIS SIS
f (2S - 5) Technical Particulars

·No. DESCRIPTION Unit 220kV 22kV
f, General data:
I1 .,1 Service svstem voltage kV 220 22
f·3 ·- Rated system voltage

Frequency
kV
HZ
245.
50
24
50
LA Rated sh01i-time withstand Current kAmis 63 31.5
1.5 Rated duration of short-circuit Sec. 1 ~
.)
r 6 Rated peak withstand current kAr 157.5 80

I :1 Rated insulation level
" -Lightnin2: impulse kVneak
1050 125
L To Earth
- Across isolating distance 1200 145
. One minute power :frequency kVnm,
- To Earth 460 50
I
- Across isolating distance 530 60
1.1.8 Insulation Svstem GIS Metal clad indoor
! .9 System earthing Across Zigzag
['
Transformer and
Solid ·.. resistance
r .10 Insulation level for auxiliarv and control circuits. kV 2 ;i 2
r:r.11 Min'. specific leaka2:e path based on service voltairn for AIS svstem: cm Ref. to (2S-2) I Ref. to (2S-4)
Ll.12 ,l\1in. clearance for AIS svstem 1mn Ref. to (2S-5)
'
1 Specific data for Bus-bars and connections
t''.--i
('
Rated current:
• Busbar
G Connections (feeder/ Bus coupler)
A
2500
1600/2500
~
2500 ..,/
1250 /2500
' l{ated sho1i-time withstand current kAnm, 63 31.5
!:t.2
1"·3 Rated duration of short-circuit Sec. 1 3
t.4 Rated Peak withstand cmTent. kAp 157.5 80
12.s Temperature rise over ambient oc 25 30
j'1.6 Material for:
! .6.1 e For Bus-bars Copper/MAC Copper
12.6.2 •G For Connections Copper/AAAC Copper
,".6.3 For Connectors Cooper/AAAC Copper
; .. 7 Cross section for (Diameter/Thickness):
12.7.1 •G Bus-bar mm/mm Note (2) Note (I)
f .7.2 Connections mm/mm Note (2) Note (1)
t I Specific data for Circuit - breaker
'3.1
.
Rated current:
0 Bus couPler / tie
A
2500 2500
• Outgoing Feeder 1600 1250
• 125 MVA transfonner 1600 --
. -- 1250
& Auxiliarv transformer
• Capacitor Bank feeder --

/4j\ '.' ·.;· ... •,\
,,, 1250
(fote (1) According to manufacturer subject to owner review & approval. / .. ,>'
lJote (2) Contractor should submit in the design stage calculations as per IEC fot,_~1.;ner;eview&· ..ap.• proval. l
\ ,,,, \. 1
V , . I
,, ·, .J'./
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD "·.. _Page-7/23
Volume 2: Technical Specifications · · · ·· ~Rev. (0)
-
(1S -5) Technical
. Particulars (Cont)
NO. DESCRIPTION Unit 220kV 22kV
3.2 - Rated short-circuit breaking kAm,s 63 31.5

current
-'.l; ,::,
~
- Rated short circuit making kA0 157.5 80
current
3.4 - Rated line charging breaking A 125 10
current
3.5 - Rated cable charging breaking A 250 ~'1.)
.) -
current
3.6 - Rated out-of-phase breaking A 25% of the rated short circuit
current breaking current
L
3.7 - Rated small inductive switching A 15 10
current
3.8 - Rated capacitive breaking current A 400 400
3.9 - First-pole-to-clear factor 1.3 1.5
·.·
.j3.10 - Rated transient recovery
voltage (T.R.V) T 100 % kV 364 41
. 3.11 - Rate of rise ofT.R.V
T 100 % kVhtsec. 2 0.47
;3,12 Switching over voltage P.U. 2 2.5
3.13 - Rated operating sequence 0-0.3 sec. co-3min-co
3.14 - Rated break time 111.S <50 <70
- Arcing time 111.S <20 <20
- Dead time 111.S 300 300
-Make time m.s <100 <100
3.15 - Control voltage (DC)
- Closing V 220+ 10% & 220-20%
- Opening V 220+ 10% & 220-30%
3.16 No. of trip coil. 2/ phase 2 for 3 phase

3.17 No. of closing coil. 1/ phase 1 for 3 phase
3.18 Type of mechanism Motor and manual
Motor Spring / hydraulic
charging Spring
3.19 Single or 3 phase mechanism 1/phase 3 phase
4 Specific data for Disconnectors
4.1 - Rated current A
- Bus coupler/ tie
- Line feeder
2500
1600 / r,;,\) ,: : J:250
-
__,_ 3150
- 125 MVA transformer feeder ~,,, Y_,-/",:,S.,_

160 ,Jr,
'
i! "'
•
:
y •
, ..
2500
!!
,
/d
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D · <Page 8/23

6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/?2/22 kV GlS S/S
(ZS - 5) Technical Particulars (CONT.)

NO. I DESCRIPTION Unit 220 kV 22kV
. 4.2 Type of mechanism / Modes of operation DC Motor spring Manual/local and DC Motor sprmg
1 Manual/local
remote
L.3 Material of contacts Copper or copper alloy Sliver plated tinned
-- I Copper or com1er alloy
Jf4
i;
Material of terminals for AIS
Specific data for Earthing Switch
!fJ.. 1 !- Rated sh01i-circuit making current 157.5 80
kA"
5.2 I- Rated short time withstand current k.Arms 63 ~ 1 - .) i .)
·~
)• .J l'vpe of operating mechanism Manual & DC motor locafrv Manual locally
..:i.4 Material of contacts Conner or copper allo J silver plated tinned
. 5.5 Material of terminals for AIS -- Conner or copper alloy
i i
r .
Specific data for Current Transformers l'J
~
',.J.1 Number of poles per circuit 3 :,

6.2 Rated orirnarv current A
i.2.1 Coupler/ Bus tie 1250-2500 2000-4000 1
.i.2.2 Outgoing feeder / Capacitor bank 800-1600 600-1200'/400-800
6.2.3 125 MVA transformer feeder 300-600 1250-2500
f - ,.,
t , ...... 4 Auxiliary transformer feeder. -- 50-100
t - ,..
"'1() •.J Rated secondarv current A 1 1
J6.4 Number of secondarv cores per nhase. ·..
' i.4.1 Coupler feeder 2+2 c 2

' <i.4.2 Outgoing feeder 4 2
'
6.4.3
..
125 MVA transformer feeder 5 -
i i.4.4 Auxiliary transfonner -- 2
',6.5 Continuous rating factor 1.5 1.5
.16.6 Rated burden VA
5.6.1 Measuring core
16.6.l.l Core 1 15 15
.16.6.2 !Protective cores
:i.6.2.1 iCore 2 30 15
6.6.2.2 Core3 30 15
16.6.2.3 Core4 30 -
6.6.2.4 Core 5 for transfom1er CLX -
r6.7 IAccuracy class for measuring cores 0.5M5 0.5M5
16.8 IA ccuracv class for protective cores
6.8.1 IBus coupler/ tie 5P30 5P20
6.8.2 Outgoing feeder 5P30 5P20
16.8.3 125 :tv'IVA transfonner feeder 5P30, CLX 5P30, CLX
6.8.4 IAuxiliarv transfonner -- 5P20
6.9 Intertenn over voltage kV 4.5 4.5
1.6.10 IInsulation level for secondarv winding kV 3 ~
.)
6.11 ~rax. dielectric dissipation factor at

I m/ ✓3 <0.5% -
6.12 !Max. Pariial discharge:
6.12.l 6>.tUm PC < 10 ..
-
',6.12.2 At 1.2 Um PC -- / .. ( '\ ?5 ;<;50
6.12.3 !At 1.2 Um/ '\/3 .
PC <5 I- ·•· ··.·., '.""'' ,, ''-t '
(1) S~e ~LD and protection scheme for C.T techmcal data (numbers(,a. ?c~r··.ac,y,,b~rd. en;
arran,,ements ). : l , •. .
\y : ..· .• /
\\·
~::~ .
'. ,/
./
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD -._,"=•="·Page 9/23

New Urban Communities Authodty (NUCA) Chapter 2
6'h October Eastern Extensions 2?0/22/22 kV GIS SIS
(2S - 5) Technical Particulars (CONT.)
6.13 Winding / terminal, lYiaterial

- Primary Cooner
- Secondary Cooner
6.14 Envelope insulation (for AIS) -- Porcelain
7 Specific data for Voltage Transformer<'>
~
7.1 Number of ooles oer circuit 3 ::,
7.2 Tvoe Inductive and capacitive Inductive

7.3 - Rated primary volta2:e kV 2201-)3 22/ ✓3
7.4 - Nmnber of secondary cores 2 and3 2
7.5 - Rated secondary volta2:e
- Core 1 for measuring . V 100/✓3 100/✓3
- Core 2 for orotection V 100/✓ 3 1001✓3
- Core 3 for orotection V 100/✓ 3 -
7.6 - Rated burden VA
- Core 1 for measuring > 100 50
- Core 2 for orotection > 200 100
- ,, Core 3 for protection > 200 -
- Simultaneous burden > 500 150
7.7 - Accuracy class
- Measuring: core 0.5 0.5
- Protective core . 3P 3P
7.8 - Rated volta2:e factor
- continuous 1.2 1.2
- 30 Sec. 1.5 l.9(for 8 hour)
7.9 Secondary insulation withstand voltage to
OTOund and betv,een windings for one minute. kV 3 3
7.10 Capacitance. P.F ::,:7600 --
7.11 Ma,'{. Partial discharge: PC/kV
7.11.1 AtUm PC :S 10 --
At 1.2 Um PC .. <50
7.11.2
7.11.3 At 1.2 Um/-../3 PC :s 5 <20
7.12 Max. dielectric dissioation factor at Um/✓3 % <0.5 <0.5
7.13 Winding / terminal, Material
.. Primary Cooner
.. Secondary Cooner
Porcelain/
7.14 Envelope insulation (for AIS) -- ..
.~;;jrolymer
..
(2) See SLD and protection scheme and metering scheme for V.T technical ,9f1!~':(i1u'iubers;'.."\
accuracv .,,
burden). · . ,: ·;:/< •cc••.·.
flt!':'/'''.' ,•,-,
· \ ,\
N.B: Offered CLX C.T shall be provided with its parameters Vk@Ik and R,'.:; sel~ctionshall
be based on sizing calculation of the related secondary circuit~' ~ssuhmce the
sensitivity and stability for the minimum and maximum short circuit ~drrent ·· ·
"\.;~•s::J ~,: <
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D ·"rage" 10123
6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/72/22 kV GJS S 1S
Item DESCRIPTION Unit 220kV
8 Gas Insulated
Specific data for SF6 to Air Bushing (outdoor)
Condenser type
8.1 Type SF6 to Air

8.2 Rated.nominal voltage kV 245
•.
A 2000 --~
8.3 Rated current
-
8.4 Rated thennal current le.Ann, 63
8.5 Duration of rated sh01i time current Sec. 2
8.6 Rated dynamic current kAp 157.5
8.7 Min. value of cantilever load N 5000

8.8 Min. specific leakage path (outdoor) referred to ~35
mm/ kVszrvice
service voltage (220 kV) voltage
8.9 Standard Insulation level:

8.9.1 Dry Lightning impulse withstand voltage kVpeak 1050
8.9.2 Power frequencies withstand voltage. kVnns 460
8.10 Maximum permissible Partial discharge magnitude
PC :S10/:S5
at 1.5 Umax./ ✓3 and at 1.05 Umax. / ✓3
8.11 Dielectric dissipation factor (tan 8) at 1.05 Um/ ✓3 % :S 0.5
8.12 Max difference between 1.05 Umax. / ✓3 and Um

% :S 0.1
for (tan 8) value
8.13 Test taps voltage. kV ~2
8.14 Capacitance oftest tap P.F :S 10000
8.15 Envelope material -- Porcelain

6 th October Eastern Extensions ?20/22/22 kV G IS S/S

9 Specific data for Surge Arresters
9.1 - Type and class Zinc oxide Metal oxide
AIS AIS
9.2 - Rated equipment voltage (Um). kV 245 24

9.3 - Rated arrester voltage (GIS / AIS). kV 198/214 24
9.4 - Rated arrester voltage for:
- Transfonner neutral point. 108 15
- Tertiary winding - 24 (3LA)
- Max. voltage to earth under
9.5 System fault conditions based on P.U 1.4 1.7
Um/✓3 -
9.6 - Max. duration of earth fault Sec. 1 3
9.7 - Duration of max. temporary over
Voltage Sec. 0.5 0.5
9.8 Maximum prospective switching over
P.U 2 2.5
voltage at arrester location. Based on Um/✓3
9.9 - Insulation level to be protected
- LIWL kVP 1050 125
- Power frequency withstand
Voltage kVnns 460 50
9.10 - Nominal discharge cmTent (8/20) µ.s kA 20 10
9.11 - Min. energy discharge capability
(kJ/kV of rated voitage)-double
Shots kJ/kV >10 >2.5
9.12 - Short circuit current kA 63 31.5
9.13 - Max. partial discharge at 1.05 Uc PC <10 < 10
9.14 - Switching current A 2000 1000
9.15 - Envelope material Porcelain for outdoor
Porcelain Porcelain/ polymer
inside cubic
9.16 - Min. specific leakage path Cm/kVservice _..,

4< 4.5
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D ,~~_.,,,. Page 12/23

th
6 October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS S-1S
(2S-5) Technical Particulars (CONT.)
125MVA
Item DESCRIPTION Unit 220 kV neutral 22 kV neutral equipment
equipment (Zigzag TR.)
10. Transformer neutral noint eauinrnent
10.1 General
- Insulation type AIS outdoor equipment
- Rated voltage kV 123 24
10.2 Disconnector
- Number of phases / rircuit Single Phase
- Rated current ' A 1600 800
- Type of mechanism Local (motorized/ Manna!)
10.3 Current transformer
- No. of phases/ circuit 1 1
- No. of cores 2 ')
~
- rated primary current A 300-600 1250-2500

- rated secondary current A 1 1
- Rated burden VA 30 20
- Accuracy Classification
Core -1 protection 5P30 5P20
I
Core -2 protection CLX CLX
Continuous rated factor 1.5 1.5
Max. Dielectric dissipation factor at
Um/✓3 ::::0.5% -
Partial Discharge at P.C :,lOatlJm& :,5at!.2 :, 50 at 1.2 Um & :, 20 at
Um/ ✓3 1.2 Um/ ✓3
Insulation level for secondary winding kV "~ 3
Internal over voltage kV 4.5 4.5
10.4 Neutral Resistor
Resistance .Q To be calculated by
- the Bidder
Fault current A - 800
Fault duration Sec. - 30
Rated voltage kVm,s - 24
Insulation level: One minute power kVnn,1kVr
frequency voltage withstand between
resistance H.V terminal and earthed 125
enclosure/ BIL .,r: ;s,1 ,:1,~
..
. .
10.5 Surge arresters
I /,,,"; "'<.
Rated arrestor voltage kVrms ! ',
,_, ", ",, 1 >
108( A
'-. '.l
Thermal Capability kJ/kVrated 4.5 \/. - •i
Discharge Current kArms 20 ,,0, . /
"··,.
NO. DESCRIPTION Unit Data
I
11. !Specific data for Co-axial Cable:
11.1 - Rated characteristic impedance Ohm 75
11.2 - Attenuation at 200 kHz dB/km <1.3
12 Specific data for Transducers:
12.1 - Power transducers for MW & MVAR rnA Refer to
Chapter (8)
12.2 - Voltage transducers. rnA Refer to
Chapter (8)
12.3 - Current transducer. rnA Refer to
Chapter (8)
13 Line Trap
13.1 ~ Rated inductance rnH 0.5
13.2 ~ Blocking resistance Ohm 600
13.3 I- Blocking band width kHz Broad band
13.4 - Rated current A 2000 -s
13.5 I- Rated short circuit current kA/t,.c 63 I 1 sec.
14 Specific data for Earthing System:
14.1 - Earthing Grid resistance in summer Ohm <0.5
14.2 - Touch voltage V <65
14.3 - Earth fault current kA 63
14.4 - Duration of earth fault Sec. 1
14.5 - Type of grid connections (underground surface) Exothe1mic welding
2
14.6 - Main grid copper conductor size 1mn >2x240
14.7 - Cables of joining Busbars
- Number of cores/ cable 1
2
- Cross section of core (Cu)/ cables rnm 630
- Number of cables/ phase 4
-.- __ ·:--·~
14.8 -Materialof the earthing system conductors \ ;:sc;;opP,er
,c:-~~"'..;;;0::·:--<-·'. <"), :"'
including grid and risers. /~. :.-,-._,. --~---"': ,->~.> -,, ,'
14.9 - Material of the rods. •c; Copper clad
' .
,.
.....
.·;; r
steel
·'
\' 2
14.10 - Riser cross sectional area. rnn1-:.. .•>lx240
'"'.;'• (.>f V •

1
6 n October Eastern Extensions 2?0/27/22 kV GlS S/S
NO. DESCRIPTION Unit 220V 48V

15 Specific data for DC Batteries:
15.l - Rated voltage V 220 48
15.2 - Iviax. voltage V 242 53
15.3 - l'vfin. voltage V 198 43
15.4 - Rated capacity (min'.) of each battery A.HR 500 400
15.5 - Rated discharge duration of each battery HR 5 8
15.6 - Number of batteries 2 1
15.7 - Duration during which the A.C supply may fail HR 5 8
lo Specific data for Chargers:
.Number of chargers ~
.) - 2
- AC power supply input V 380 380/220
- AC voltage input fluctuation with constan % ±10 I ±10
I
output DC voltage.
- Nonna! charge voltage adjustment range V 220 to 240 V 48 to 56V

- High rate charge voltage adjustment range V 240 to 260V 56 to 66V
- Max. peak value of the superimposed AC V 0.2% 0.2%
voltage on the floating charge voltage.
.. This value is the mm1mum accepted value; contractor should submit

capacity calculations for review and approval in the design stage.

Volume 2: Technical Specifications
ExhibitD Page 15/23
Rev. (0) I
61h October Eastern Extensions 220/2'>/22 kV GJS SiS
NO. DESCRIPTION Unit 22kV
17 Specific data for Cables and Accessories
17.1 - Rated voltage Uo/U/Utn kV 18/30/36

17.2 - Rated continuous cmTent A As the relative feeders
and S.L.D
17.3 Cable of Power Transformer
- Number of cores/cable 1
- Cross section of core (cu.) / cable rnrn2 630
- Number of cables/phase 4
17.4 Neutral Point Cables
17.4.1 No. of cores/ cable. 1

17.4.2 Cross section of core (cu) / cable mrn2 630
.
17.5 Cables Feedinir Auxiliary
Transformers / CaJ:!acitor Banks
17.5.1 No. of cores per cable. 3/3

17.5.2 Cross section of core (cu) rnm2/phase 150/240
17.6 Cables Sealinir Ends
17.6.1 - Min specific leakage path for cable S.E Cm/kV Service voltage
- Outdoor type 4.5
- Indoor type 2: 3.5

17.6.2 - Lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 125
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Ex.hibitD Page 16/23

111
Item Auxiliary Tr.

DESCRIPTION Unit
22/0.4 kV
18 Specific data for Auxiliary Transformers
18.1 Rated power (at all tapping) - Minimum kVA 500
18.2 Voltage ratio at No load and main tap kV/kV 22/0.4
18.3 Voltage ratio at Full load 0.85 P.F and main tap kV/kV 22/0.38
18.4 Connection group Dyn 11
18.5 Tap changer Off-load
18.5.1 Winding location H.V
18.5.2 Steps 22+2.x2.5%
18.6 Type of Cooling ONAN
18.7 Impedance voltage at 95° C (Primary to secondary) % 5
18.8 Insulation level for primary side
- LlWL kV0
- AC kVr.m.s 50
18.9 Low voltage side withstand voltage for one minute kVr.m.s "
.J
18.10 Noise level dB <57

18.11 Temperature rise (over ambient)
- Oil oc 45
- Winding oc 50
- Hot spot oc 60
18.12 Duration of short circuit current
- Thermal (r.m.s) Sec. 2
- Dynamic (peak) m.s 500
18.13 Insulation class A
18.14 Cunent density at full load for the primary and
A/mm2 ~2.5
secondary
18.15 Fln,'1: density at rated voltage and main tapping Tesla < 1.6
19. Specific data for Auxiliary power supply V
19.1. Single phase to neutral V 220
19.2. Phase to phase V
19.3. DC (Protection & control) V
19.4. DC (Teleco1m1mnication System) V

Voiume 2: Technical Specifications Rev. (0)
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G1S S/S
Item I DESCRIPTION Unit 220kV

20 Specific data for GIS switchgears
20.1 No. of phases per enclosure for:
20.1.1 All equipment /component Single phase enclosure
20.1.2 Busbar Singie or three phase enclosure
20.2 Min. withstand durations without bum-through of
ms 300
enclosures at 63 kA
20.3 Phase voltage at which Paiiial discharge free kV 170
20.4 Gas leakage rate per year for %
- Each compartment :S 0.5
- All system :S 0.5
20.5 Max Temperature rise over ambient temperature at
rated current for:
- Enclosure OK ::;30
- Connections OK :S 50
- Busbar OK 50
20.6 Specific Data for Gas compartments and Gas
monitoring
Max. Length of each separate self content gas
compaiiment and gas weight of: 1n and kg
- Busbar Sectionalized bay by bay
- Bus-Duct < 12 ai1d < 100 kg; ma-x
Components that should have separate self content - Bus bar section per each bay.
gas compaiiment - Circuit breaker
- Potential transf.
- Current transf.
As
- Disconnecter and earthing switch could
Minimum
be in one SF6 compartment.
- Outgoing feeder earthing switch.
- Cable end box.
- SF6/Air bushing
Location of gas monitoring system At each separate self content gas
compartment
Type of gas monitoring system Gas Density and pressure fodicator
monitor
Type of pressure relief per each Gas compartment Rupture disc
'.{:i' l ,\ ' '

ifJ/'f .) .
'ci;J•..

Volume 2: Technical Specifications
Exhibit D Page 18/23
Rev. (0)
j
Ne\v Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 2
· (2S - 5) Technical Particulars (CONT.)

Item DESCRIPTION Unit
220/22/22 kV
l I
21.
2Ll
Power Transformers:
I- Rated Power (at all tapping) for each winding MVA 1?5/62.5/62.5
21.2 Voltage ratio: kV/kV
:' ~ At main tapping at No load 220/24/24
• At main tapping at fuli load and P.F 0.8 lag. 220/22/22 kV
r 71 0
..... J. • .)
21.4
I- Connection group
Tap changer
• Type
Ynidl lid! I
On-Load
I • Number of taps
• Range (step)
17-
+8 X 1.25% Uservicc
21.5 I- Cooling System ONAN/ONAF 1/ ONAF2
L 21.6
21.6.1
- Rated Continuous Operating Load:
ONAN MVA 75.
[ 21.6.2
21.6.3
ONAFl
ONAF2
MVA
MVA
75-lQ0
> 100
r 21.7
21. 7.1
Winding and Tenninal Insulation level
~ .ightning impuls_e withstand voltage
- Primary winding and Line terminal kVp 1050
..
- Primary neutral terminal

[ - Secondary winding and Line tem1inal kVp
550
125
21.7.2 Power Frequency withstand voltage
.
- Primary winding and Line tem1inal kV 460
- Primary neutral tem1inal 230
.
- Secondary winding and Line terminal kV 50
. 21.8 - Winding Insulation Class A
21.9 Flux density at rated voltage, main (princinal) tap Tesla < 1.6
21.10 Current density at rated current and at principal taping Nmm2 .'.c 2.5
..
21.11 lmpedance voltage at rated current (62.5 MVA) main % 13%
apping and at 95°C (primary to each secondary) -
:., HV/LV1 orLV2
21.12 - Temperature lise (Over ambient)
21.12.1 Oil oc 45
.. 21.12.2 Winding oc 50
. 21.12.3 Hot Spot oc 60
.. 21.13 - Duration of short circuit cunent
21.13.1 Them1al sec. 2
..
21.13.2 Dynan1ic msec. /15◊', . •· . . ~
... 21.14 Noise level at ONAF2 or at ONAF Db / ,}:C,8ff"'>cCC ..• , ; \
',, (j'" . ,
,
. ! i'
(

61h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/S
Item DESCRIPTION Unit 220/22/22 kV

21.15 Permissible Duration of 10% overload hr ~2
starting from the full load without exceeding
the specified temperature rise limits at
extreme minus tanning
21.16 Material of windings conductor Copper
21.17 Material of core lamination Cold rolled grain oriented sheet steel
21.18.1 Nominal thickness of core lamination mm ::::0.27
Laser treated
21.18.2 Material of Tank Steel plates
21.19 Min. thickness of tank mm ~ 10
21.20 - Auxiliary power supply
21.20.1 A.C V 220/380
21.20.2 D.C V 220
21.21. Oil tvoe Mineral oil
21.22 Oil Breaking strength k.V/2.Smm
• at factory testing gap ::: 66
• at site after purifying ~70
-/
• Safe lowest operation value <40
21.23 Oil densitv g/cm" 0.895
21.24 Dielectric dissipation factor (tan o) %
• At90°C 0.5
• At20°C 0.1
21.25 On load ta[! changer
1 Rated current related to the highest A ~ 120%
transformer winding cunent to which the
OLTC is connected
~
~ Tapping ranges
• Total number chaps 17
0
• Range ( sten l + 8 X 1.25 % Uservice
J Winding to be connected On Primarv winding
4 Insulation level: Same or higher than the insulation level of
• Lightning Impulse withstand voltage kVp the transformer winding to which the
• Power frequencv withstand voltage k.Vnns 0 .L. T. C is connected
5 Shmt circuit withstand cunent
. Thermal (3 sec.) Same or higher than the transformer
• Dynamic / duration winding to which the O.L.T.C is connected
6 Number of Cycles of operation corresponding Number ~ 500000
to 110% time rated current at principal
7
tapping
Contact material of the diverter and selector
switch j '' /
---
5f??er -Tungs~~,n
- : ' _,· \
{'\;,··
,:\'

6'" October Eastern Extensions ?20/72/22 kV GIS S/S
(2S - 5) Technical Particulars (CONT./
Item At220 kV At22 kV

DESCRIPTION Unit
winding winding
21.26 (125 A1VA Power Trans(!!rmer) Line Terminal Bushing
1 Type Oil I Air
2 - Rated voltage (Um) kV >245 >24
3 - Rated current A > 630 2500
4 - Rated thermal short time current kA 63 50
5 - Duration of rated thermal short time Sec 2 2
6. - Rated dynamic current kA 157.5 125
7 Insulation level
7.1 Lighting impulse withstand voltage kVn 1050 125
7.2 Power frequency withstand voltage kV rm, 506 55
8 - Temporary over voltage kV 196 24
9 Insulation material
9.1 - Class of insulation A A
Condenser type
9.2 - Major insulation material Oil impregnated Porcelain

paper (OIP)
9.3 - Filling insulation material 0·111 --

9.4 - Insulation envelope material Porcelain --
10 - Minimum specific creep age distance cm/kV 3.5 3.5
11
- - Max. Level of Partial discharge:
-At Um PC < 10 acc. To IEC
- At 1.05 Um /✓3 PC <5 acc. To !EC
12 - Dielectric dissipation factor (tan8)

12.1 - Max. Value at 1.05 Um/✓3 <0.007 --
12.2 - Max. Difference between Um and
0.001 --
1.05 Um/✓3
13 - Min. value of cantilever load N 4000 2000
14 Test tap
14.1 - Test tap voltage kV >2 _,,:-:. "! ...-~
'""''. .:~~:
~
14.2 - Capacitance of test tap PF < 10000 ;

/ ',- •...
,t-:--•·" -~-,,,,'
.
15 Angle of mounting (from vertical) <30° I. <30°

6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS s;s
{2S - 5) Technical Particulars (CONT.)
Item DESCRIPTION Unit At 220 kV winding
22. (125 }11VA Power Trans(prmer) Neutral Terminal Bushing

22.1 Type Oil/ Air
22.2 - Rated voltage (Um) kV > 123
22.3 - Rated Cunent A > 630
22.4 - Rated thermal short time cunent kA 63
22.5 - Duration of Rated thermal short time Sec 2
22.6 - Rated dynamic current kA 157.5
22.7 Insulation level
22.7.1 Lighting impulse withstand voltage kVn 550
22.7.2 Power frequency withstand voltage kVnn, 255
22.8 - Temporary over voltage kV 123
22.9 Insulation material
22.9.1 - Class of insulation A
22.9.2 - Major insulation material Oil impregnated paper (OIP)
22.9.3 - Fiiling insulation material Oil

22.9.4 - Insulation envelope material Porcelain
22.10 - Minimum specific creepage distance Cm/kV 3.5
22.11 - Ma.,"'i:. level of Partial discharge:
-at Um PC < 10
- at 1.05 um/✓3 PC <5
22.12 - Dielectric dissipation factor (tan o)
22.12.1 - Max. value at 1.05 Um/✓3 < 0.007
22.12.2 - Max. difference in (tan o) value
0.001
between Um and 1.05 Um/✓3
22.13 - Min. value of cantilever load N 3150
22.14 • Test tap voltage kV 2: 2
• Capacitance oftest tap P.F < 10000
9
22.15 Angle of mounting (from vertical) -.~
.A:H'J
1<:i:'''..,· . •.: ' .. . :-,,-
f', 1.,,: ,,, ;,--,
•
~····· .. ,' .

New· Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 2
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/S
r.
l~tem Description Unit Data I
I I I
I 23 AC Supply !
I
I
23.1 Service Voltage
. Three Phase V 380
.. Single Phase V 220
.I 24 Ventilation and Air Conditioning

'
I 24.1 Minimum Air change (A. Ch) rate
S,vitchgear building A.ch/hr 10
"
0 Transformer rooms A.ch/hr 10 I
Battery rooms A.ch/hr 20
"
i
:! " Rectifier room A.ch/hr 10 ,I
I Other indoor areas- A.ch/hr )

"
i 24.2 Air conditioning:
I
!,
1. I
11
Temperature within the conditioned area I
. Control / relay room oc 20 RH40±5%
' . PLC room, DC. AC oc 20 RH40±5%
I
I ,. Offices oc 22 RH50±5%
• Guard Room oc 22 RH78±5% I

I 25 _ Transformer fire fighting(*)
I
I 25.1 Capacity of Tank 125 MVA Tr's 1n
3
40 I
25.2 Service pressure Kg/ cm2 10
Time range for extinguishing of fire in one
25.3 Sec. ::, 120
transformer
,, , A
-',),, Duration of water sprinkling for all transformers Min. 5
?
25.5 Pressure at nozzle at the upper ring pipe Kg/ cm" 3.5
25.6 Jockey pump time to charge the water vessel hr ./2e'./' .':::£;",~,
25.7 Jockey pump flow rate m3/hr Ii 1/ 'i ''
/clot·-_··•··
,, _ '\ 1i;
f
* Fire fighting system adequate for the supplied transformers and futur~ ~ansfonner asJI;"
t l ~ . . .,
specified. ' (,'

New Urban Communities Authorjty (NllCA) Chapter 3
CHAPTER THREE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 220 KV GAS

INSULATED SWITCHGEAR
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page J/38

6 1h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS SIS
CHAPTER THREE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 220 KV GAS INSULATED
S\VITCHGEAR
Table of Contents
Clause Description II Page I

3.1 General I
3.2 Design Criteria 7
3.3 Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS) components 12
3.4 Support Structure 28
3.5 Grounding 28
3.6 Gas System 29
3.7 Thermal Expansion 33

-
,.,,.,
.
3.8 Local Control panels, terminal and wiring .J .J
3.9 Crane 34
3.10 Nameplates 35
3.11 Submittals 37
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page2/38

CHAPTER THREE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GAS INSULATED

S\VITCHGEAR
3.1 GENERAL
The quality of items and services supplied by the Contractor shall be

controlled to meet the requirements of this Specification, referenced codes and
standards as mentioned below.
Ref,erenced Codes and Standards

A."NSI C2 National Electrical Safety Code
ANSI C37.20 Switchgear Assemblies Including Metal-
Enclosed Bus
ANSI C57.13 Instrument Transformers (Current and Voltage)
ANSI C37.010, .04 -.12
ANSI C37.122 Gas-Insulated Switchgear (GIS) Standards,
Recommended Practice and Guides
A.NSI C76.l, C76.2 Outdoor Apparams Bushings
ASMEVIII Unfired Pressure Vessel Code
ASTMD2472 Sulphur Hexa.fluoride
IEC61869 Instrument Transformers
IEC 60376 Specification And Acceptance of New Sulpher
Hexa Fluoride.
IEC 62271/203 Gas Insulated Switchgear
IEEE C57.19.00 General Requirements and Test Procedures for
Outdoor Power Apparatus Bushing
IEEE C57.19.01 Perfom1ance Characteristics and Dimension +M•.-~~~
Outdoor Apparatus Bushing.
NEMA SG6 A-C High-Voltage Circuit Breakers
NEMASGC6 Power Switching Equipment
3.1.1 Definition
Gas insulated switchgear (GIS) shall mean multi component assembly,

enclosed in a grounded metallic housing in which the primary insulating
media is a compressed gas (Sulphur hexafluoride, SF6) and which
consists of totally enclosed busbars, switchgear and associated
equipment.

New Ul·ban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 3
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G1S S/S
3.1.2 Extent of the \:Vorlc
Work of this Chapter consists of design, manufacture, factory testing,

transportation to site, installation, field testing and commissioning of
220 kV SF6 gas insulated switchgear.
The switchgear shall be a fully integrated system and shall consist of but
not limited to the follO\;ving components:
1) Circuit breakers, current transformers, voltage transformers,
isolators, grounding switches (maintenance and high speed),
busbars, SF6-to-air bushings to outgoing lines and for
transformers, and GIS cable box for cable outgoing bays.
2) Separately mounted electrical/ mechanical control panels for

operation of switchgear, one (1) per switchgear bay.
3) Switchgear equipment interconnections including all insulating

gas pipework, gas supervision system, hydraulic pipework for
switchgear operating mechanism (in case of hydraulic operating
mechanism) and also the control cables to and from the
separately mounted local control panels and the individual
switchgear control mechanism cabinets.
4) Overhead cranes, complete with supp01ts, rails, trolley~, and all

other items necessary to provide a complete and operating system.
5) Portable handling equipment for installation, servicing storage

tank for SF6 and maintenance of gas insulated switchgear and
associated equipment.
6) Steel structures for the support of gas insulated switchgear and

associated equipment and steel structure to provide access to
equipment for inspection and maintenance.
7) Main ground bus, ground pads and connectors with

interconnections between the gas insulated switchgear and
associated equipment and station ground.
8) Initial filling of the gas insulated switchgear and associated~

equipment with sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) to the nominal,1g(s • · 0
tt.
::;,},
density, and nominal gas pressure. / !i\\'s:• \

I . . ; ;"
. ·i". l '\
;'; 1:/ i
9) Maintenance materials and equipment, including the units used · .) f f
for charging, discharging and regeneration of SF6 gas. \ i//
""· ./
10) The GIS shall be located in pennanent building, which will be

ventilated and maintained reasonably dust free.

6 111 October Eastern Extensions 220/22/21 kV GlS S/S
11) Other items not specifically listed herein but considered by

contractor to be an integral pmi of the design and supply of the
GIS and associated equipment are included in the contract
package.
3.1.3 Common Features:
1) This specification covers the requirements for the manufacture,

supply and install up to commission of 220 kV metal- clad, gas-
insulated, indoor switchgear.
2) The . switchgem· shall be fully metal-clad and of sulphur-

hexafluoride (SF6) GIS insulated type. It shall be constrncted for
the indicated busbar system, and shall include all necessary
switches, current and voltage transfonners. The switchgem· shall
· be supplied complete with all auxiliary equipment necessary for
operation, routine maintenance, repairs and extensions.
3) The switchgear shall be designed for continuous operation under

all system operating conditions including sudden change of load
and voltages, short circuits within its ratings, and under
atmospheric conditions at site.
4) All GIS HV equipment shall be single phase enclosure

(accommodated in three separate compartments/ tubes). 220 kV
bus bar could be single or three phase enclosure.
Fmiher on, the GIS- design shall provide to be very space-saving

lightweight. The local control panels shall be free standing
and shall be factory-tested,
The Bidder shall clearly indicate the outer din1ensions of the

quoted GIS as well as the static and dynmnic loads and the floor
requirements (e.g. floor evenness, capacity of lifting facilities
etc.).
7) The GIS shall be of modular design; cubicle design and oddity

shaped designs are not accepted.
8) The temperature rise linuts shall be in accordance with IEC 62271-

203. The switchgear shall be capable of canying the specified rated
cunent continuously at maximum an1bient shade temperatures in
closed rooms as specified. The maximum temperature rise of the
e>..iemal surface of enclosures accessible during nonnal operations
shall not exceed the specified value in Chapter 2 (2S-6).

9) Components that may require to be renewed and standard assemblies

that may be transfeITed from one circuit to another, shall be
interchangeable and where required this shall be demonstrated by the
contractor. To secure minimum time of repair, all driving
mechanisms shall be interchangeable to those of other feeders or
spare parts as a complete unit. The arrangement of the switchgear
shall be i11 such a way that any part can be removed without
dismantling, inte1ruption · or disturbance to adjacent feeders or
circuits.
10) The switchgear shall be designed to withstand the mechanical and

thermal stresses due to short circuit cmTents as specified in volume 2,
Chapter 2 (2S-6).
11) Suitable atTangements shall be provided for the thennal expansion

and contraction of the busbars without application to stress to the
supporting structure.
12) The fully enclosed busbars shall be made from high conductivity
copper alloy or almninum alloy. They shall be with adequate cross
sectional area rated for the continuous operation of the switchgear
under the environmental conditions as specified without
exceeding their pe1missible temperature rise.
13) Busbars · and electrical con11ections shall be made of approved

materials, and suitable measures shall be taken to prevent corona
discharge, particularly at edges and comers .
. · The switchgear bays each shall be earthed through an appropriate

';tinned copper earth bar which is to run also along the full length
'of the switchgear, and be suitably connected to the station earthing,
,at least at two opposite points.
'}
The gas bamer insulators should furthermore confme any internal

faults to the respective compartment oftl1e switchgear. Each insulator
used shall be tested for partial discharge as a routine test prior to
assembly in the switchgear.
16) Rupture diaphragms shall be provided in each compartment to allow

for pressure relief and a high degree of protection under fault
conditions. It shall be ensured that nobody standing close to tl1e GIS
equipment is exposed to any danger.
17) Particular attention shall be paid to the sealing of the housing joints,
so tl1at the SF6 gas need not be replenished within reasonable

periods. Particular preference ,vil! be given to switchgear ,vith low

gas losses guaranteed.
18) The Bidder shall indicate the requirements and provide the lifting
appliances as appropriate to the size and weight of the switchgear
parts that require to be lifted in respect to erection, maintenance or
repair.
19) Any suppmiing structures shall be made of hot dip galvanized steel.
20) All motors shall be in accordance with IEC 60034.The starting

cmTent at full voltage is not to exceed six times the rated foll load
current. Motors are to be designed to operate 20% below and 10%
above nominal voltage without injurious over-heating.
21) All supp01iing structures for the switchgear bays, for the related
overhead line, cable, and transfonner- connection enclosures shall
be a part of Bidder's supply.
22) Cable feeder connection chambers if any have to be designed as cable

tennination receptacles. The means tenninations of the cable on the
switchgear shall be possible with minimum effort and ·without
evacuation of the SF6 gas in the cable connection chamber.
3.2 Design Criteria:
3.2.1 Environmental Condition:

The equipment shall be designed to suit the environmental conditions
for the proposed site of the substation as given in schedule 2S-1
(Chapter two- Volume two -Part I).
3.2.2 Electrical Characteristics:
The 220 kV SF6 gas insulated switchgear and associated equipment

shall be designed to meet the following electrical characteristic:
1) Rated voltage 245 kV
2) Rated frequency .--~-- 50 HZ
3) Rated continuous
Current:
- Main busbar As per single A
line diagram
- Line bay 1600 A
- Transformer bay 1600 A
4) Rated short-time
Withstand current
(1 sec.) 63 kAnns

5) Rated peak Withstand Cmrent 157.5 lcA.peuk

6) Voltage at which GIS equipment shall be 170 kVrms
paiiial discharge free
(Phase to ground)
7) Insulation level to earth
- Rated lightning Impulse withstand voltage 1050 kVpeak
- One minute Power frequency withstand 460 kVmis
voltage
8) Insulation level
across open contact for isolator switch/
circuit breaker
- Rated lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage 1200 kVoeak
-Rated powe1' frequency Withstand voltage 530 kVrm,
9) System earthing Solid
10) Bus Bar Enclosure Isolated phases enclosures/ 3 phase Bus
bar enclosure
11) Equipment / components enclosures Isolated Phases enclosures
12) Time for bmn through of the GIS enclosure. Not less than 300 ms at 63 kA
13) Gas leakage of the GIS per year Max0.5%
14) Cable end box and SF6 / Air Bushing Both should be separate gas compartment
15) Bus duct length and gas weight per each :S: 12 meter and :S: 100 kg gas
compartment
3.2.3 Requirements for the SF6 Gas Insulated Switchgear:

3.2.3.1 General:
a. SF6 insulated switchgear shall be installed indoor at substation
and shall be in accordance with the single line diagram drawing.
b. The 220 kV bus bar systems shall consist of double bus bars system.
The system configurations are illustrated on Single Line
Drawings (SLDs).
c. All interconnection with the out-going high voltage circuits
shall be via SF6- to air bushings and SF6-Gas-lnsulated-Bus Duct
outside the switchgear building (The busduct should be one or
more independent Gas Compartment length of each not more
than 12 meter and not more than 100 kg SF6 gas), unless
otherwise indicated. The bushings shall comply with IEC standard
IEC 6.0137 and the internal surfaces of all porcelains shall not be
glazed. 220 kV interconnection with the main power transfonner
shall be via SF6 GIS bus duct ai1d SF6 / Air bushings.
In some cases the interconnection is required to be through XLPE
cables and GIS Cable box.
d. The gas insulated switchgear shall comprise an isolated
phases enclosures except 220 kV Bus bars could be single or
three phase enclosures, pressurized and modular design SF6
switchgear system suitable for indoor installation. The various
switchgear components shall be pre-assembled 111 contractor's

G'h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GJS S!S
factory in the latest modular units compactable with the

limitations of shipping capabilities. The overall layout of the
gas insulated switchgear and associated equipment shall be
such that the installation is provided without limiting personnel
access to any operational area for inspection and maintenance.
e. A proposed physical layout of the SF6 switchgear, if shown
on drawing, is not intended to be the final layout. Bidder shall
submit the proposed physical arrangement. Physical and electrical
clearance constraints, fire and explosion barrier concepts and
maintenance access shall be indicated in the bid data.
f. Adequate space between equipment shall be provided for
mctintenance and inspection purposes. Fixed ladders, fixed
platfonns and gratings necessary for easy maintenance and
operation of any component at the GIS system shall be included.
g. The switchgear s.hall be designed to operate under the service
conditions and not exceed a temperature rise as specified in IEC
Publication 62271-203.
h. The equipment shall be designed to withstand the short circuit
forces resulting from the specified short circuit cmTent
(symmetrical) ,vithout undue stress or permanent deflection.
Bidder shall state the safety factor including in the design and
should not be less than the factor of safety stated in chapter (2) "S-
Schedules".
1. The voltage at which the GIS equipment shall be partially
discharge free is 1.2 U1rJ 13 phase to ground voltage.
J. Metal enclosures shall be designed for maximum shielding to
minimize electromagnetic forces caused by short circuits.
k. Counter pressure compensator should be used for long SF6 pipe-
lines and in the busbars to insure that a balance of forces is
present at every gas pressure and in every position of the
compensator. In this way it is possible to compensate even
considerable thermal changes in length without any forces
affecting the bearing points.
1. Secondary and control wiring within a high tension compartment
and to all control panels shall be protected by grounded static
shields.
m. Bolted connection shall be used to facilitate installation and
maintenance. Welding of pieces to fom1 each module may be
perfonned in contractor's works as required. Welding of modules
during site installation is not acceptable.
n. Insulators throughout the gas insulated switchgear shall meet or
exceed the electrical requirements of the specified components

6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/'J.2/22 kV GIS S/S
and shall be compatible with the compressed gas insulation and

the decomposition products of the gas when exposed to electric
arcs. Insulators associated with specified components shall be
interchangeable where possible.
o. Insulation coordination studies shall be performed to ensure that
the positioning/ quantity of surge a1Testers are adequate to protect
the GIS installation against lightning and switching surges.
p. Provision shall be made for field testing of switchgear components.
Bidder shall list built-in test facilities provided in the bid.
q. Each switchgear operating components shail be sectionalized
(modular f01m) so that It may be disconnected from the :;ystem
for replacement or maintenance without loss of pressure to
adjacent modules or prolonged shutdown periods.
r. When SF6 pipeline are connected directly to the transfonners
Oil/SF6 bushing are used to separate the insulating media.
s. Suitable means of expansion shall be provided in the metal
enclosures pipelines to absorb the actual or relative thennal
expansion and contraction of the SF6 equipment and to facilitate
alignment of switchgear assembly.
t. The GIS equipment should be provided with capacitive
..-------_ voltage divider for very fast transient measurements.
u. Each GIS compartment should be provided with built in sensors
for partial discharge measurement.
3.2.3.2 Extension:
-----cL--- .The quoted switchgear shall be of modular design and capable of

extension in the future by the addition of extra feeders with its associated
equipment of different design and manufacturer without necessarily
dismantling any major pruis of the equipment.
Where a double busbar system is specified, it shall be possible to extend
the switchgear by adding further feeders with at least one of the busbar
systems and the existing feeders remaining continuously in service.
2) The bidder is requested to demonstrate clearly in his submitted
documents the suitability of overall system's design in these respects.
3.2.3.3 Repair:
Where a double busbar system with one circuit breaker configuration is

specified: In case of any internal arc fault in a busbru·, busbar
disconnector or circuit breaker, repair works must be possible without
shutting down the complete substation and at least one busbar and the
undisturbed feeders must remain in operation.
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page l 0/38

In the submitted documents, clear demonstration concerning this

requirement shall be given by the bidder, i.e. sequence of repair work
steps and description of necessary restrictions during these works.
3.2.3.4 Pressure Relief:

1) Automatic pressure relief shall be incorporated for each of the
sectionalized gas enclosures as a precaution against explosion in
the event of an internal arc fault.
2) Pressure relief shall be by means of bursting discs with deflection
devices to ensure that personnel who may be present will not be
endangered.
3.2.3.5 Sectionalized:
1) The switchgear gas enclosures must be sectionalized, with gas
tight- baITiers between sections or compartments. The sections
shall be so designed as to minimize the extent of plant rendered
inoperative when gas pressure is reduced, either by excessive
leakage or for maintenance purposes, and to minimize the quantity
of gas that has to be _evacuated and then recharged before and after
maintaining any item of equipment.
2) Each bay shall consist as a minimum of the following arc and gas-
tight high voltage independent Gas compartments:
a) Bus bar section/ per each bay.
b) _ Circuit breaker.
c) Potential transformer.
d) CmTent transfonner.
e) Isolating & grounding switches (in case of 220 kV GIS
with one breaker configuration the bus bar disconnector
with earthing switch can be with the bus bar section / per
each bay).
f) Cable Box.
g) SF6 / Air Bushing.
h) Qutgoing feeder earthing switch.
3) The arrangement of gas sections or compartments shall be such

that it is possible to extend existing busbars without having to take
out of service more than one busbar at any time. For limitation of
any internal arc to the concerned bay and to reduce the extent of
necessary gas works each busbar must be sectionalized bay by
bay.
4) The electrical connections between the various gas sections shall

preferably be made by means of multiple contact connectors so
that electrical connection is automatically achieved when bolting
one section to another. The surface of the connector fingers and
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page ll/38

New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chap,er 3
conductor tubes on such connections shall be silver plated.

5) Each gas compartn1ent must be independent.
6) External gas pipe connections are not acceptable.
3.2.3.6 Support Insulators And section Barriers:

J) The support insulators and section barriers/ insulators shall be
manufactured from the highest quality material. They shall be free
from all voids and the design shall be such as to reduce the
electrical stresses in the insulators to a minimum. They shall also
be of sufficient strength to ensure that the conductor spacing and
clearances are maintained when short circuit faults occur.
2) Insulation material used for post type and gas tight type insulators
shall not be stressed more than the indicated by long term tests on
full scale insulators, to_ allow for ageing effects.
3) Routine tests shall be carried out during the manufacture of

the switchgear to ensure that all insulators are free of paitial
discharge at the specified voltage.
4) Gas section barriers including seals to the conductor and

enclosure wall shall be gastight and shall be capable of
withstanding the maximum pressure differential that could
occur across the barrier, i.e. with a vacuum drawn on the one
side of the barrier, and on the other side at least the maximum
gas pressure that can exist under normal operating or
maintenance conditions and in case of internal arc fault with
the safety factor greater than or equal 2.0.
3.3 Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS) Components:
3.3.1 Busbar Compartment:

1) Conductors and connections shall be designed to carry the full rated
current continuously and not exceed the specified temperature rise. The
minimum continuous current ratings of the GIS isolated bus segments
shall be as follows:-
a) Main busses as per single line diagram.
b) Transmission line and transformer feeder 1600 A.
2) All bus joints and connections to other equipment shall be made in such
a manner that their equivalent resistance will not exceed the resistance
of an equivalent length of bus.
3) The busbar material shall be made of bare, electrical grade, high

6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS SIS
conductivity copper alloy or aluminum alloy with adequate cross

sectional area for the ampacity requirements and the temperature rise
limits given in IEC standard 62271-203. Interconnection of individual
sections of i:he busbar and connections to the switchgear components
shall be by plug and socket type or tulip type connections to allow for
thermal expansion of the busbar.
4) The contact surface in all joints shall be silver plated.
5) Busbar compartments shall be factory assembled and tested.
6) Welding of busbar connections during site assembly of the GIS is not

acceptable.
7) The Busbar Gas enclosure must be sectionalized, at least one

independent Gas compartment per each bay.
3.3.2 Circuit Breakers:
-1) The circuit breakers shall be designed and fabricated to meet the
specifications stated in 2S-6 Schedule, Chapter (2).
2) The circuit breakers shall be single pressure, puffer type three single
pole, (isolated phases enclosures).
~7~ The circ~it bre_ake~ shall be designed so ~s _to ensure that the rate ~f gas
/ ,Ji · :,>.•::leakage 1s mamtamed at an absolute mm1mum and that the moisture
/t•'.j '?bµtent ot: the sulphur hexafl~oride ga~ is su~ficiently low so as to ~voi?
Ii •. coµdensat10n fonns on the mtemal msulatmg surfaces of the circmt
\. l -. •breaker.
'. I •, ,
\ \·
. \':: . 4.) /Materials used in the construction of circuit breakers shall be fully
'-·~'--~~:-~ .: .. compatible with SF6.
5) The pressure/travel characteristics of the circuit breaker interrupter units

shall not be impaired when operating at the minimum specified ambient
temperature.
6) Associated circuit breaker poles shall be mounted adjacent to each other.

Circuit breaker shall be located such that servicing of interrupters may
be easy perfom1ed.
7) Breaker inte1TUpter(s) service cart shall be included to extract the

inte1TUpters should a switchgear layout proposing horizontal access to
breaker poles be submitted. Details of the service caii shall be provided
with the bid data.

6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/2?. kV GIS SIS
8) The breakers shall be trip-free and shall include at least the following
features:
a) Closing system and duplicate trip coils (feeding from different
DC sources), together with a manually operated mechanism for
maintenance and emergency operation. A slow acting manual
operating device shall be provided for inspection and
maintenance purposes.
b) Anti- pumping device.
c) Self- wiping contacts.
d) Supervision for closing and tripping circuits, which will give

alann when there is discontinuity in these circuits.
e) Phase disagreement device.

In the event of one (1) or two (2) phases failing to complete a
closing or tripping operation, provision shall be made for
automatic tripping of all three (3) phases after a time delay
adjustable in the range of one (!) to three (3) seconds and an
alann initiated.
f) Working parts of the mechanism shall be of corrosion resisting

material and all bearings which require frequent attention shall be
located in readily accessible positions. Bearings pins, nuts, bolts
and other components shall be adequately secured to prevent
loosening or changing adjustment with repeated operation.
g) Closing and tripping pulse duration control (duration depend on

the C.B. itself).
9) Breakers shall be factory assembled, tested and shipped as completely

assembled as practicable.
10) Breakers shall be equipped with a separate position indicator for each
independent operating mechanism on the breaker and shall have the
necessary auxiliary switches to provide immediate tripping of the
breaker if any of the operating mechanisms fails to close its portion
breaker interrupters.
11) Each breaker shall be furnished with all necessary equipment including
piping, conduit wiring and all accessories, requiring only connections to
the switchgear electrical control system.
12) Pressure gauges, pressure switches, reduction valves and relays, etc.,
shall be readily accessible and located at a suitable control panel.

New Urban Communities Autbority (NUCA) Chapter 3
6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GJS SIS
13) All valves, piping and fitting shall be non-rusting metal, and shall be
leak proof and suitable for the service and test pressures for which they
are intended.
14) Provisions shall be made for timing all breaker contacts including main,
resistor and isolating contacts as may be supplied in any individual
design.
15) Each breaker shall be equipped with but not limited to the following
accessories for satisfactory operation and maintenance.
a) Breaker open/ closed position indicator, visible from outside

without opening the breaker cabinet door.
b) Nameplates giving complete breaker infonnation and ratings.
c) Gas pressure gauges.
d) Line disconnectors shall be electrically interlocked with

adjacent breaker.
e) Local control shall be allowed by manual operation of

electric control switches, to close and open the breaker
.during maintenance then this operation shail be under
condition that the disconnectors before and after C.B. are
opened. An emergency manual tripping device is required
and shall be protected against accidental operation.
f) Local/ remote selector switch with lock on the local control

panel.
g) Operating counters.
h) · Breaker opened/ closed indicator; push button controls and

mimic bus for the bay on the face of the local control panel.
i) MCB for the control.power.
j) Convenience outlet.
k) Control cabinet light and switch.
1) Cut- off switch for AC power.
m) Terminal blocks for all control, alann and auxiliary circuits.
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExJ1ibit D Page 15/38

New Urban Communities Authority (NUC A) Chapter 3
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GiS SIS
n) Auxiliary switches to cover all operating and interlocking

requirement. A minimum of five ( 5) additional spare reversible
contacts per pole shall be ·wired out to tem1inal blocks for owner
use.
16) Operating mechanisms shall be complete with all control equipment and
the only exte1nal requirements for operation shall be electrical supplies.
17) Requirement for hydraulic operating mechanism:
a) Operating pressure shall be maintained automatically, a gauge

being provided to give indication of the pressure available. The
pressure gauge shall be suitable damped to ensure that it is not
subject to transient pressure oscillations either during pumping or
during operation of the circuit breaker.
b) Low pressure shall be detected by an approved method and

depending upon the pressure of the fluid, shali initiate one ( 1) or
more of the following:-
i) Start pump motor.

ii) ·Block auto-reclosiri.g if the pressure is insufficient to
complete an open- close/ open (0-CO) operation.
iii) Block closing if the pressure is insufficient to compkte a
break operation.
iv) Block tripping if the pressure is insufficient to complete a
v) Break operation.
Alarm contacts shall be provided to indicate conditions (b ), ( c)

and (d) above blocking of tripping shall apply to both systems.
Circuit breakers which have independent operating mechanisms

on each phase shall block tripping closing and auto-reclosing of
all phases if the operating pressure is low in one (1) or more of
the mechanisms.
e) The running time of the pump motor shall be monitored,

operation being blocked in the event of this exceeding the normal
maximum period. A contact shall be provided for remote
indication of this conditions. In the event of a failure of the pump
motor, hand charging of the systems shall be possible.
f) Receiver shall be protected against overpressure by a safety-

valve with hand jack for testing. Safety-valves, pressure vessels,
piping and other equipment shall fulfill the valid authorized

requirements.
18) Requirement for motor-spring operating mechanism:
a) Motor circuits shall be designed for 2-pole control from motor

protection, limit switches and contactors.
b) The closing spring shall automatically be charged immediately

after discharge. The time for spring charging shall be adapted to
suit the relevant rated operating cycle. A device for easy manual
charging of the closing spring shall be provided.
c) Mechanical indication which correctly shows charged or

discharge closing spring shall be provided. By "discharged
spring" is meant the condition at automatic start of motor.
ci) If the operating mechanism cannot withstand discharging of a

charged closing spring against a closed circuit-breaker, a
mechanical interlock against such a function shall be provided.
e) A device which prevents closing with an incompletely charged

closing spring and open circuit-breaker shall be provided.
f) Motors:
1. Motors may be dimensioned for intennittent operation, but

shall at rated voltage be capable of charging the spring 10
times in succession, without impermissible rises m
temperature, and without tripping the motor protection.
11. .Motor shall be protect against switching over voltages

caused by operating mechanism auxiliaries.
m. Starting current and maximum current during the spring-

charging sequences shall be specified.
g) Direct on line starter for motor:
1. The motor shall be overload protected by a direct on line

starter with two pole contact function for controlling the
motor. Manual closing and opening ought to be possible.
11. When manual operation is not possible, an extra two-pole

switch shall be provided. This shall have the necessary
making and breaking capacities for a fully braked motor.
m. The operating device shall be labeled MOTOR.
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page. li/38

6'" October Eastern Extensions 220i22/22 kV GIS SIS
1v. The manufacturer shall specify the mmunum and

maximum MCBs sizes for motor feeder.
h) Limit switches:
The following number of contacts shall be provided:
1. For control of motor:
2 contacts, Closed for uncharged or not completely
charged closing spring, open for charged
sprmg.
,---
I 11. For control of closing coil during single and three pole
L operations:
2 contacts, Closed for charged closing spring, open for mid
or uncharged spring.
111. For alann:

1 contact, Closed for charged closing spring, open for mid
position or uncharged spring.
1v. For line protection and automatic network- restoration

equipment:
1 contact, Closed for charged closing spring, open for mid
position or uncharged spring.
v. Other.necessary contacts for the design; The number and

function of such contacts shall be specified by the
manufacture.
v1. The data for the limit switch is chosen with regard to
whether the motor is controlled directly or via contactors.
For direct control, the limit switch shall be 'capable of
making the motor starting current and breaking its
maximum load current.
vu. The contacts shall preferably be mechanically operated

(forced motion). \¥here forced motion only occurs in one
direction, this shall disconnect the motor.
i) Contactors:
1. Contactor in motor circuits shall be dimensioned for

switching in and out a fully braked motor.
11. Contactors shall be chosen with at least operation frequency

class 0.3 and for at least 1 million operating cycles in

6'" October Easte,n Extensions 220/22/22 kV GJS S/S
accordance with the relevant IEC standard.

3.3.3 Isolators and Grounding Switches:
1) The isolators and grounding switches shal! be designed and

fabricated to meet the specifications stated in volume 2, chapter
(2) (2S-6).
2) All isolators (associated with circuit breaker and line exit

connections) shall be indoor, GIS SF6 phases insulated motor
operated single or double break design.
3) The grounding switches associated with the line exist isolating

switch (line exit earthing switches) shall be motor operated
ground switches, fully interlocked with line exit isolating
switches.
4) The grounding switches associated with the circuit breaker

should be motor and hand manually operated ground switches,
no-fault making, fully interlocked with associated circuit breaker
and isolating switches.
5) Line exist grounding switch shall be fault makii,g type high speed
earthing switch in both on-off operation. It shall be equipped with
a motor drive allowing emergency operation and a stored energ,;
mechanism to provide fault making capability (acc. to IEC
62271-102).
Fault making earthing switch shall be capable of closing against a

full short-circuit, i.e. Fault making operation with the rated short-
circuit making currents. Such operation of the earthing switch
shall not be danger for adjacent compartments nor cause
contamination or damage to the extent that immediate overhaul is
necessary.
7) All grounding switches shall be indoor, GIS SF6 type connected

directly with earth bus bar (i.e. not through the enclosure) and
shall be of single break design.
8) The isolators and grounding switches associated with a circuit

breaker shall be considered as a unit for mechanical interlocking
purposes in addition to the electrical interlocking.
9) Line isolators shall be electrically interlocked with adjacent

breakers.
10) Line exit grounding switches shall be capable of safety

6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/21/22 kV G!S SIS
interrupting induced voltages and currents that may encounter on

the system provided that isolating switch enclosure with which
they are associated is de-energized.
11) Contractor shall provide adequate access for maintenance and/ or

removal of the switch main contact assembly.
12) Isolators and grounding switches shall be equipped with an

indicator to show whether t.'1.e device is in the open or closed
position. The indicator shall have a positive, well proven
mechanism which can only be operated by direct action of the
switch main contact. The i11dicator shall be clearly visible from
ground level at all times.
13) The isolators and grounding switches shall be equipped with

auxiliary contacts adjusted so that one (1) set of contacts is closed
when the device is fully closed and the other set is closed when
the device is fully open:
14) The mechanism shall be so designed that it shall complete its

nonnal travel to either "open" or "closed" positions, once started,
without holding the control switch handle continuously in that
position.
15) Local pushbuttons and heater switches shall be supplied at the

motor operator.
The isolators shall be controiled from local control panel and

remote control points.
Grounding switches shall be operated from the local control

panel only. It shall be made impossible to electrically operate the
motor once the manual operation handle has been inserted in the
mechanism. Manual operation shall consist of the appiication to
the actuating mechanism of suitable force.
18) Isolators and their operating mechanisms shall be completely

assembled, adjusted, operated and tested at the factory.
19) Switches contact surfaces shall be of high pressure silvered type.

Contact pressure springs shall be corrosion resistant and shall not
carry cun-ent. Ferrous metals shall not be used for any current-
carrying parts of the switches.
20) Switch operating mechanism shall meet at least the following

requirement:

New Urban Communities Authority (Nl)CA) Chapter 3
a) Operating mechanism shall have provision for padlocking

in both the "open" and in the "closed" positions.
b) All operating mechanisms shall be completed and shall

include necessary shafts, interconnecting rods, offset link,
operating pipe and all other fittings to provide a proven
reliable and safe mechanism.
c) The grounding switches associated with a breaker shall be
equipped with regular padlocks.
d) In the case of any outgoing feeders, the isolator mechanism

shall have a regular padlock for locking.
e) The grounding switch used to ground a transfonner

section, bus section or a feeder shall have provisions for
padlocking.·
f) Grounding switches utilizing stored energy operating

mechanisms shall not be pennanently charged.
(g) Interlock cancellation switch with padlock shall be

provided on the local control panel.
(h) Each ·isolator and grounding switch shall be fitted with

limitation of the "full open" and "full closed" position of
the main contacts.
21) Isolators shall be provided with the following mmunurn

accessories for satisfactory operation and maintenance:
a) Nameplate giving complete isolator information and

ratings.
b) Isolator position indicator.
c) MCB for the control power.
d) Additional spare auxiliary contacts providing for future

remote indication of isolator position. (at least two
normally opened and two nonnally closed contacts).
3.3.4 Current Transformers:

1) The cmrent transformer shall be arranged as per the attached
protection schemes drawings of each bay and shall be designed
and fabricated to meet the specifications & requirements stated in
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibH D Page 21/38

Volume 2: Technical Specifications Rev. (OJ
Volume (2) chapters (2) and (7).
2) Current transformers shall be single phase SF6 gas insulated,

self- cooled, suitable for installation as integral part of GIS and
shall be used for relaying and metering purposes.
3) CmTent transformers shall form an integral part of the GIS and

shall be housed in self- contained gas insulated compaiiments.
4) Secondary winding turns around core shall be evenly distributed
at all taps.
5) All current transfonner leads shall be tenninated at tenninals

designed with clainping screws and with facility to exert
continuous positive pressure on each connection leads shall be
continuous from cmTent transformer to tenninal block and shail
be labeled for polarity phase, and tap identification.
6) Transformer secondary terminals shall be designed to include

individual and ground shorting bars. Tenninals shall be located in
a position which is safely and easily accessible while current
transformer is energized. Tenninal box doors shall be gasketed
ai1d bolted.
7) Naineplates shall be provided g1vmg complete current

transforrner infonnation in accordance with IEC standard
61869-2.
3.3.5 Voltage Transformer:

1) The voltage transfom1er shall be designed ai1d fabricated to meet
the specifications stated in chapter(2), (S-Schedules) Volume (2).
For busbars voltage transfonners shall be SF6 gas insulated,

electromagnetic type in metal enclosures, single phase self--
cooled, suitable for installation as integral part of GIS and shall
be used for both protection and measurement purposes.
3/ In considering the physical locations of the voltage transformers

with respect to the overall layout of the GIS installation as
specified, contractor shall prevent switching configurations
which may cause a Ferro resonant condition to develop between
the voltage transforrner inductance and the capacitance of the
circuit breaker and busbar. Where this requirement is in conflict
with the proposed location of voltage transfonners shown in the
basic single line diagram contractor shall advise the owner.
4) The busbar voltage transformers shall fonn an integral part of the

Ne,v Urban Communitles Authority (NUCA) Chapter 3
GIS and shall be housed in self-contained gas insulated

compartments. The high voltage (HV) tenninal shall be suitable
for the connection to the GIS busbars through disconnector
switch, equipped with earthing switch.
5) All leads from each secondary winding shall be brought out inro
the terminal box located at the voltage transfom1er.
6). The leads shall terminate on terminal blocks of the stud type or
spring loaded contacts.
7) Secondary tenninals shall be l0cated in a position which is safely

and easily accessible while voltage transfonner is energized.
8) Ground secondary when required at the terminal box.
9) Tenninal box doors shall be gasketed and bolted.

10) Nameplates shall be provided giving complete voltage
transformer infonnation in accordance with IEC standard
61869-3. & 61869-5.
3.3.6 Enclosures:
1) The enclosures shall be designed using the JIS boiler and

pressure vessel regulations or equivalent with the same quality or
better. The material specification shall be consistent with
requirements for conductivity, corrosion resistance and
mechanical strength.
2) The enclosure shall be designed to withstand an external pressure
of one (1) atmosphere (with a 1.5 safety factor) with zero internal
pressure absolute and be designed and tested to withstand internal
routine test pressure of 1:3 times the design working pressure for
welded Aluminum and welded steel enclosure or two times for
cast Aluminum for at least 1.0 min.
3) The enclosure shall be designed so that overpressure caused by

internal faults are limited by using pressure relief devices with
deflectors or other suitable means. Pressure relief devices, shall
be located so that they do not cause a hazard to operating
personnel.
4) The enclosure material of GIS shall be chosen so the losses are

minimized. The enclosure shall with respect to over-pressures
during normal operation be designed to meet the requirement of
the pressure ves·sel code.

5) The enclosure shall be designed to withstand the effects of

internal arcs and not burnt-through before the fault is tripped. (i.e.
time for trip from first step of relay-system plus time alive due to
single shot reclosing and automatic reclosing). The time for burn
through of the enclosure shall be not less than 0.3 sec. at the rated
specified short circuit current.
6) Test report for Burn through shall be submitted in the offer as per
IEC 62271-203.
7) Enclosure material shall be either steel or aluminum alloy with

thickness suitable to withstand rated short circuit current of (63)
kA for 0.3 sec. without bum through.
8) The enclosure shall be divided into several self-contained

compartments or sections separated by Gastight bmTiers
pem1itting removal of operation of sections from service for
maintenance without affecting adjacent sections. The gas system
shall be designed to pem1it sections to be isolated.
9) The enclosures shall be designed and fabricated so as to reduce

losses or heating from hystersis as well to minimize heating due
to induced circulating curr_ents.
iO) Connections between enclosure compartment and co1111ection of

the enclosure to the switchgear components assembled at the
factory or site shall be made by bolted flanges with a sealing
system of proven design for the specific application to provide a
gastight joint. All seals shall be easily replaceable.
Insulators shall be compatible with compressed SF6 gas insulation

at1d interchm1geable with other component insulators where
, possible.
The voltage and insulation level requirements shall match that of

the connected equipment.
3) The insulator profile shall be designed to provide a unifonn

voltage gradient on the insulator surface between the bus at1d the
enclosure. Insulators shall be impervious to the effects of arc
products of the SF6 insulating gas which result from arcing faults
at1d shall be designed to withstand the ambient at1d operating
temperature ranges specified in IEC 62271-203 without suffering

6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/22122 kV GIS S/S
changes that compromise their dielectric or mechanical integrity.
4) Gas barrier insulators shall be designed to withstand for five (5)

minutes at least three (3) times the maximum operating pressure
at 40°C on one side and atmospheric pressure on the other side
and shall be routine tested to twice the design pressure for one
minute.
5) Insulators and spacers shall be vacuum cast epo:x-y type.
3.3.8 SF6 to Air Bushing:
1) The SF6 to air bushing shall be condenser type bushing and shall
be designed and fabricated to meet the specifications stated in
chapter (2), (2S-Schedules) Volume (2).
2) Unless otherwise indicated bushing shall comply with IEC
standard 60137.
3) Bushing insulators shall be of an approved type and designed to
provide the required mechanical strength at the factor of safety.
4) The bushing insulators shall be secured in an approved manner
and shall be fitted wi.fa suitable lifting arrangements.
The bushing insulators shall be of porcelain type not more than
one piece only for 220 kV system. The internal surfaces of all
porcelains shall not be glazed.
6t- The bushings shall be erected to be 111 alignment with steel
.gantry/power transfonners.
7) The SF6/Air bushing shall be separate gas compartment.
3.3.9 Cable Box:
All cable end boxes (terminals) shall be suitable for connecting single
core, XLPE cables for max rated current of the bay and in general a core
cross section of500 up to 2000 mm2 .
The cable and boxes shall be fully dry insulated, free of maintenance,
includes fae cable stress cone and epoxy insulator for fitting in the cable
end unit.
Suitable cover plates and seals shall be provided as part of the switchgear
for sealing each aperture where a cable sealing end is to be fitted, to
enable the GIS switchgear to be completely filled with SF6 gas and tested
when a cable sealing end is not available or fitted.

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G1S SIS
The cable end box shail be separate SF6 gas compartment.
Removable bolted links or similar connections shall be provided. The

design of the link and connections shall ensure that when removed the
resulting gap can withstand the impulse and power frequency test
voltages applicable to the GIS switchgear/ the cable HVDC test voltage.
The 220 kV cable will be tested with mobile test set at a test voltage in
accordance with IEC 62067.
3.3.10 GIS surge arrester:
1) Surge arresters shall be heavy duty 20 kA class "Zinc Oxide"

resistors type without spark gaps and with impulse characteristics
suitable for use with SF6 gas insulated equipments.
2) Surge arresters shall ·be single phase SF6 insulated, self cooled
suitable for installation as integrated part of GIS switchgear and shall
be housed in self - contained gas insulated compartment.
3) Surge arresters shall be designed and tested in accordance with the

requirements ofIEC 60099-4, -5, -1, IEC: 60037, 38, IEC 60694 and
any additional requirements of this Specification. Routine tests shall
be carried out in accordance with the section on test requirements of
IEC 60099-4 Specification.
4) The surge arresters form part of the overall GIS switchgear therefore
~ " ·they shall be positioned as near to the equipment to be protected and
1/·, · ' · · ·• • must be connected with as short connectors as possible to both line
/,. and earth; so that surge arresters can provide maximum protection in
{ I, ac'cordance with IEC 60099. The contractor shall demonstrate by
\ ·p calculations to substantiate the location of the surge arresters and that
\":. tJ:ie selection of surge arresters will adequately protect the switchgear
. .<:.~__. : . :- / ·.
;arrangement and connections to the outgoing feeders.
5) A suitable copper ground strap shall be provided to follow the most

direct route from arrester to a clamp type ground connector mounted
at the base of structure.
6) All surge arresters shall be fitted with a pressure relief cliaphragn1

which shall prevent explosive shattering of the housing in the event
of an aiTester. failure and the arrester shall be tested according to the
high ai1cl low current tests specified in IEC 60099-1.
7) The internal components of arresters shall be arranged to minimize

radial voltage stresses, internal corona and to ensure minimal

6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/22122 kV GIS SIS
capacitive coupling with any conducting layer on the outside of the

enclosure housing.
8) Good electrical contact shall be maintained between resistor blocks

taking account of any thermal expansion and contraction of the block
or mechanical shock during transport and erection.
9) Each surge arrester shall be identified by a rating plate in accordance

with the requirements ofIEC 6099-4.
10) Each surge arresters shall be provided with surge counters one per
phase and a leakage current meter with a bio-linear scale for ease of
reading. The materiai used for tenninals shall be compatible with
that of the conductors to which they are to be connected.
11) The surge counter shall be operated by the discharge current passed
by the surge arrester. Surge counters shall be of the electro-
mechanical type and designed for continuous service. Auxiliary
contacts shall be provided to signal remote indication of counter
operation. The surge counter shall be placed in an accessible and
visible location to be read from ground level with the arrester in
service.
The surge counter shall be connected in the main earth lead from the
diverter in such a manner that the direction of the earth lead is not
or its surge impedance materially altered. A bolted link
sl).all be provided so that the surge counter may be short circuited,
when required. Suitable means shall be provided to remove surge
.counter without disconnecting surge aiTester out of service.
The leakage current meters shall be for installation in the earth

connection of the surge ai-resters and shall be designed for
continuous operation and shall be placed in fill accessible and visible
location to be read from ground level with the arrester in service.
14) The following information should be included in the bidder offer:
a) Resistive and capacitive components of the continuous current at

ambient temperature.
b) Reference current and voltage at ainbient temperature.
c) Power frequency voltage versus time characteristics.
d) Lightning impulse residual voltage at 0.5,l and 2 times the nominal
discharge current.
e) Cleara11ce and mounting specifications.
f) Dimensions and weights.
g) Type of arrester tenninals and possible conductor size.

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/12/22 kV GJS SIS
h) Maximum permissible length of lead between aiTester and surge

counter and between surge counter and earth.
3.4 Support Structure:

1) Structural supports, access platforms, ladders , stairs, cable
raceway, conduit and other auxiliary equipment required for
operation and maintenance shall be provided by contractor as an
integral part of the design as required. Such equipment shall be
coordinated with the GIS components so that advantage may be
taken for access during installation of the GIS.
2) _The structure shall be designed so that the temperature rise in any

of its members or in any adjacent members does not exceed the
limits specified in IEC 62271-203.
3) The support structure, platfonns, ladders, stairs ... etc. shall be

fabricated of hot dip galvanized steel.
3.5 Grounding:
1) Contractor shall comply with the technical, fabrication and
manufacturing requirements of grounding systems and as
specified herein and relevant section for the general grounding.
2) The GIS shall be provided with a grounding system consisting of

suitably buried and located ground electrodes, a main copper
ground bar and subsidiary copper ground bars connected to the
metal framework of each main compartment and auxiliary item,
cable sheaths, structural steel work of the switchgear building
metal baITiers and all extraneous metalwork to ensure (I) that the
. potential of the conductors of the systems are maintained at a
-' level consistent with the insulation levels applied, (II) a low
resistance is provided for the flow of fault currents to achieve fast
and definite operation of protection relays and (III) to prevent the
appearai1ce of dangerous voltages on metalwork to which
personnel have access under normal and abn01mal conditions.
3) Subassembly - to - subassembly ground com1ectors, or their

equivalents, shall be provided to assure maintenance of safe
voltage gradients between all intentionally grounded paiis of the
GIS.
4) A sufficient number of ground connection points shall be provided

to limit induced voltage in the busbar enclosures to 70 V (to
ground) at design fault level, also the step voltage shall be
according to IEC.
Elecn·ic Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 28/38
6th October Eastern Extensions 2:20/22/22 kV GIS S/S
5) In addition to the ground pads for grounding of the GIS, ground

pads shall be furnished for all mechanism cabinets, local control
cabinets and steel support structures, etc. Larger structures, e.g.
the suppo1i steel for the circuit breaker, shall be supplied with
two (2) ground pads located at opposite ends of the structure.
Each opposite provided shall be readily accessible and have
sufficient mechanical strength to withstand electromagnetic
forces and nonnal usage and shall be capable of caiTying the
maximum fault current that can be anticipated in that po1iion of
· the circuit without overheating for the duration of the flow of
ground currents.
3.6 Gas System:

3.6.1 Insulating Gas:
1) Sulphur hexafluoride gas SF6 shall be employed in the GIS both
for insulation and for arc extinction in the circuit breakers. The
gas shall comply with the analytical requirement of IEC
publication 60376 and shall be physiologically inert.
2) SF6 gas shall be suppiied in the liquid phase in standard steel

cylinders having a capacity of 40 kg.
L
3} , Facilities for handling the SF6 cylinders along with all necessary
.'fittings, regulators, pressure gauges, hoses ... etc. for connecting
the cylinders to the filling valves on the gas insulated switchgear
.and associated equipment shall be provided.
Sufficient quantity of SF6 gas shall be supplied for filling all the
gas insulated switchgear and associated equipment to contractor's
reco1mnended operation gas density with due allowance for
normal gas· losses during installation, field testing and any gas
leakage during the first year of c01mnercial operation.
3.6.2 Gas System Description:
1) The GIS shall be subdivided into independent gas systems, the

arrangement of which shall be compatible with the operational
requirements of the switchgear. The subdivisions shall be
achieved with gastight barrier insulators such that each
independent gas system can be depressurized for inspection,
maintenance or repair after it has been electrically isolated from
other system while keeping the other system energized and at
operating gas density.

2) The gas leakage per compartments per year will not exceed 0.5%
the gas insulating pressure > 3 .5 bar for 220 kV switchgear.
3) Under nonnal conditions, the gas system shall operate and be

monitored for each gas compa1iment as a three single phase
system. Valves and manifolds shall be provided to permit
individual phase segregation for maintenance.
4) All gas and air piping fittings, gauges, covers and other
connections shall be made leak proof. Junctions between
porcelain and porcelain, or porcelain and metal shall also be
made leak proof by gastight seals.
5) Valves used in gas system shall have seals. Stationary and

moving seals shall be designed to insure a leak proof system with
low maintenance requirements
6) Operating shafts entering _the pressurized area shall pass through

suitable welded bellows or equivalent.
7) Each independent gas system shall have conveniently located,

adequately sized provisions for filiing, evacuating , filtering and
circulatL.,g the gas.
8) The circuit breaker gas system shall be separate and independent

"from the other switchgear gas systems.
9) Each self.contained gas compartment shall be provided with

pressure relief devices and gas filters. The pressure relief device
shall be designed to limit the maximum pressure rise below the
bursting level of the enclosure and barrier insulators.
10) Gas filters shall be utilized for absorption of moisture and

decomposition products of SF6 in each compartment. The filters
shall be of the activated alumina or molecular sieve type and shall
be suitably housed and located to prevent filter particles being
disbursed into the compartment.
11) Bidders shall provide devices with each gas compartment which
continuously monitor the gas density and pressure and shall
provide two (2) sets of contacts for alarm purposes.
12) Means shall be provided for routine testing of the gas system
without draining the gas section. Suitable valves shall be provided
for gas filling, purging and sampling.

6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS S/S
13) Suitable pressure/vacuum connection points shall be provided in

each separate gas compartment for connection to the gas handling
equipment.
14) Details shall be submitted of the precise procedure to be adopted

by maintenance personnel for handling equipment which has been
exposed to the products of arcing in SF6 gas.
1iJ
-) Recommendations shall be submitted for suitable protective
clothing, methods of disposal of cleaning utensils and other
relevant matters.
3.6.3 Gas Leak and Moisture Content:

The gas leakage rate from the GIS shall not exceed 0.5 percent per year.
After stabilization the moisture content shall not be greater than the
value stated in the latest addition of the relevant IEC.
3.6.4 Gas Monitoring System:
1) Each independent gas system (gas compartment) must have its

own independent gas supervision and alann systems with contact
density gauges for alarm and indication. Alarms shall be wired to
and indicated in the control cubicles.
2) Monitoring devices for each independent gas system m the

switchgear shall provide at least the following functions:
a) Pressure gauge.
b) Temperature compensated gas density relay with two (2)
sets of indepen<lently variable contacts to provide two (2)
levels of alarm, one set to initiate an alarm when the
density is at the minimum insulation density, the other to
cause appropriate gas compartment to be filled with SF6
gas urgently when further deviations from the alarm
density limits are obtained.
3) In addition, the circuit breaker compartment shall be provided

with a low pressure relay to lock either the closing circuits or
open circuits of the breaker and associated isolating switches if
pressure in the breaker tanks is insufficient for a co operation and
to block the circuit breaker before the pressure reaches a value
below which full interrupting capacity cannot be obtained.
3.6.5 Gas Handling Equipment:

1) Gas handling equipment for installation, servicing and
maintenance of the gas insulated switchgear and associated
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exl1ibit D Page 31/38

Ne\V Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 3
· 6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G!S SIS
equipment shall be supplied. The gas handling equipment shall

consist of the following basic items:
a) Portable gas handling and storage plant suitable for the

following functions:
i) Evacuation of switchgear compaiiments and
associated equipment.
ii) Extracting SF6 gas from switchgear compartment
and associated equipment and storing the gas in the
liquid phase.
iii) Filling of switchgear cumpaiiments and associated
equipment after evacuation or refilling with SF6
gas.
iv) Filtering and drying of SF6 gas during storage
filling or reclaiming operations.
b) The gas servicing plant sha!l be complete with vacuum

· pump, oil-free compressor, aluminum or molecular sieve
gas dryer, heat exchanger, high pressure gas storage tank
meeting ASJ\1E or equivalent standard requirements, and
valves, filters, stainless steel pipe-work, hoses and
connectors suitable for com1ection to the gas insulated
switchgear, associated equipment and SF6 storage
cylinders. Tb.e ratings of the gas servicing plant and the
SF6 storage shall be compatible with the extend of the GIS
with consideration for the requirements of the future
extension of the switchgear.
· c) Portable gas leak detector with adequate sensitivity and
repeatability for detecting SF6 gas leaks of 10 ppm and
which will not require repeated calibration while in use.
Leak detectors based on the principle of operation of
measurement of the ultrasonic noise produced by the leak
source will not be acceptable.
d) Dew hygrometer, a direct reading type of instrument
suitable for dew point measurement of better than -10°C at
the SF6 gas design pressure is preferred, alternatively ai1
electronic hygrometer, Beck.J.n8n or equivalent approved
by owner representative, may be supplied.
e) Gas density relay calibration and test set per contractor's
recommendations.
f) Amdliary relays.

6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GJS S/S
g) Indication lights.
h) Annunciators.
i) Gas monitoring devices .
.i) Terminal blocks.
3.7 Thermal Expansion:

1) Expansion and installation alignment shall be considered in the
design of the bus bar and enclosure and expansion joints shall be
provided. The number and location of expansion joints shall be
detennined by contractor.
2) · Bellows provided to pennit movement caused by expansion and

contraction or foundation settlement shall have specially design
means to preserve the mechanical strength of the equipment.
3) When bellows are provided in the enclosure for installation

alignment, means shall be provided to prevent movement after
alignment_ is complete.
3.8 Local Control Panels, Terminal and Wiring:
3.8.1 Local Control panels:
_.--"-1) Control panel shall be installed on the GIS buildings floor.
2) Mimic bus shall be fixed on the external face of the panel

showing the main single line diagram of the bay. Mimic color
shall be red.
3) Local control panels and interface cubicles shall be self-

supp01iing, having hinged doors at front or rear of panels. Door
shall be provided with handle suitable for locking. Cables shall
enter the panels from the bottom.
3.8.2 Terminal:
I) Terminal blocks shall be provided to accommodate all circuits

entering or leaving the panels.
2) Terminals with a disconnecting link shall be provided to enable

isolation of a circuit when necessary.
3) Equipment tem1inals for current, potential and protection trip

circuits shall be equipped with spring loaded contacts.
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 3~/38

4) Terminals shall be rated for minimum insulation class of 600 V.

A minimum of ten (10%) percent spare tenninals shall be
provided for spare or future circuits.
5) Terminals blocks shall be labeled according to their duty.
6) Control wiring shall be overall shielded, heat retardant, stranded

copper of size not less than the following:-
a) Panel wiring single conductor 2.0mm2

b) Current transfonner secondary 4.01111112
c) Twisted pairs 0.9 1m11 diameter
d) Cables external to the local control panels 2.5 !IDTI2
3.8.3 Wiring:
\Viring t~ main protection shall be segregated from those of back-up

protection.
3.9 Crane:
3.9.1 General:
1) Contractor shall supply motor operated crane(s) complete with
rail(s), rail supports and controls. The crane(s) shall be sized to
lift the heaviest portions of the gas insulated switchgear with a
margin of twenty percent (+20%).
2) The rails shall be extended all over the 220 kV GIS building.
3.9.2 Electric Supply:
Electrical supply for power and control will be as follows:
i) 380 V 50 Hz three phase for motors and control

transformers.
ii) 220 V, 50 Hz single phase for control circuit, heaters,
lighting and distribution.
iii) 220 DC for control circuits (alternative).
2) The crane shall be provided with (but not limited) protection

control as required, limit switches as required, the all are subject
to owner approval.
3.9.3 Grounding:
1) All exposed metal parts of the hoist including pendent controls
E1ectric Powei Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 34/38

New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Crnpter 3
6'" October Eastern Extensions 220i22/22 kV GIS SIS
shall be electrically connected together so that the entire crane is

grounded in installation.
-2) Grounding conductors shall have green colored insulation.
3) Grounding conductors for flexible cords shall be separate from

cord.
4) Ground com1ections shall be protected against mechanical injury by

means equivalent to those provided for live conductors, whether
such connections are busbar or insulated conductor.
3.10 Nameplates:
3.10.1 General:
1) Nameplates shall be provided and mounted in appropriate
locations to provide information required on designation and
ratings as applicable of all equipment, relays, meters, control
switches pushbuttons, etc.
2) Nameplates shall be furnished in duplicate, one (1) engraved in

English, and (1) engraved in Arabic. Contractor should provide
list of nameplates in English and Arabic for review and approval
by owner representative before submit the nameplate.
3) The nameplates for the GIS system shall be stainless steel or

aluminum. The nameplate for all other equipment shall be 3 mm
thick play laminated plastic with white face to black core.
Nameplates approximately 15 mm x 100 mm with lettering 4
mm high, showing function numbers for each relay shall be
.. placed on front and rear each panel. Nameplates for indicating
1
' lamps and pushbuttons shall be identical to those for relays but
· they shall measure 15 mm x 60 mm, Ampere ratings for fuses
and also nameplates with descriptive functions for items where
these item may not be assigned a specific functions shall be
provided.
5) Nameplates are to be mounted l01mn below relay cases, 5mm

below indicating lights.
6) The equipment continuous current ratings shall be specified at

the maximum ambient temperature the equipment will
experience.
7) Nameplates of the following types with the mmunum

infom1ation as noted shall be furnished:

6th Octobe;· Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G!S SIS
a) GIS ratings nameplate.

b) Equipment nameplate.
3.10.2 GIS Rating Nameplate:
1) GIS and all its operating devices and main components shall be
provided with na..meplates, the name plate shall be durable and
clearly legible, and the GIS ratings nameplate shall show the
following rating:
a) " Maximum ambient temperature.
, Rated frequency.
" Rated voltage.
" Rated normal cu1Tent for: - Busbars
- Circuits
b) Insulation withstand voltage (factory test):
" BIL. --
. • SIL.
• Power frequency, for one (1) minute.
• Chopped ,vave (if none, so state).
c) Short circuit currents:
• ·symmetrkal (nns).
• Short time (rms).
<> l:VIomentary (nns and peak).
" Close and latch (nns and peak).
d) Total weight of gas at rated density.
e) :tvfuiirnum gas density for insulation.
f) Rated and maximmn gas pressure for operation.
g) Rec01mnended minimum gas pressure for operation.
h) .Design pressure for enclosures.
i) Auxiliary voltages.
j) Contract order nmnbers.
k) · Dew point temperature at maximmn gas pressure.
1) Total weight of equipment.
2) The ratings nameplate shall state to which item of the GIS

equipment the ratings apply.
3.10.3 Equipment Nameplates:

1) Equipment nameplates which contain the normal manufacturer's
nameplate infonnation of the following categories of equipment
shall be located on or near the specific equipment:

New Urban Co!11mLmities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 3
th
a) Circuit breakers.
b) Isolating switches.
c) Grounding switches.
d) Voltage transformers.
e) Current transformers.
f) Terminations (Cable Box/ SF6 to Air Bushing).
2) Serial numbers and other data that are not common to all units of a
. category of equipment shall be shown on the equipment nameplates
mounted on or near the specific equipment.
3.11 Submittals:
1) Submittals drawings, calculations, test reports and literature

pertaining to specified items of material to be supplied under this
section. Submittals shall include but not limited to following:
a) Layout drawings of completed switchgear package and
single line diagram indicating the gas compartments.
b) Outline drawings of components.
c) Outline drawings of each preassembled transport unit.
d) Shipping details.
e) Foundation details.
f) Grounding details including study and calculation reports for
. approval.
g) Building requirements and detail requirements.
h) Control schematics.
i) Control logic diagrams.
j) Nameplate drawing.
k) Wiring diagrams.
1) Interlocking schematics.
m) Isolator and grounding switch operating mechanism
drawing.
n) Breaker operating mechanism drawings.
o) A full description of the quality controls used in
manufacture.
p) A full description with all layout and detail drawings of the
gas system, including gas segregation between individual
busbar and operational sections, circulation treatment,

storage pressure measurement and control devices, flow

diagrams, single line and detailed wiring diagrams.
q) Nameplate diagrams showing current transformer and
voltage transformer connection diagram.
r) Instrument transformer magnetizing curves and thermal short
circuit rating calculations.
s) Manufacturers brochures.
t) Full parts list.
u) Steel structure drawings.
v) Test reports and/or calculations for tests outlined in clauses.
w) Detailed test program and procedures for field testing,
including method of test, proposed test circuit and acceptable
test levels as well as necessary equipment for testing at site.
x) Unpacking and installation instruction manual.
y) Operation and maintenance manuals.
2) Tlie Bidder has ·to comply with the relevant clause in Chapter 1
volume 2 for the Documentations to be submitted with the Bid.
Electric Power Systems Enginee1ing Company Exhibit D Page 38/38

Nev,, Urban Communities Authority (NUC) Chapter 4
CHAPTER :FOUR
EARTHING AND SHIELDING SYSTEl\tIS

!
L
New Urban Communities Authority (NUC) Chapter4
CFIAPTER FOUR
EARTHING AND SHIELDING SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Clause I
I Description Page
4.1 Em1hing System 3

4.2 Temporary Eai1hing Devices 8
4.3 Substation Protection Against Lightning 8
4.4 Submittals
•·

Nev,, Urban Communities Authority (NUC) Chapter 4
6L½ October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS S/S
CHAPTER FOUR
EARTHING AND SHIELDING SYSTEMS
4.1 Earthing Svstem:
4.1.1 Definition:
4. 1.1.1. Earthing system of the substation shall mean a complete high conductivity
copper conductor earthing grid system which includes all conductors,
ground rods, connectors, equipotential mats, equipment and other
measures required to complete earthing of the substa,ion and earthing of
the equipment and metal parts.
4.1.1.2. Reinforcement bars or any other metal pai.is of the substation must not be
taken as a part of the eaithing system.
4.1.2. Design Criteria:

4. L2. l. Substation Earthing shall provide safety to personnel by lin1iting step and
touch voltages to tolerable values and limit total potential rise above true
eai.ih potential within acceptable limits during fault conditions. Design the
Earthing system will be in accordance with IEEE-80 (2000) "Guide for
safety in AC Substation grounding". The soil resistivity shall be measured
by the contractor during summer season before the design of the ea1ihing
system; the measuring procedure should be submitted to EETC for
approval before doing this measurements.
4.1.2.2. The cross section of the main grounding grid conductor shall not be less
than 2x240 mm2 strai.1ded soft drawn annealed copper.
4.1.2.3. All electrical appai.·atus in the substation including trai.1sformer neutral
and, casings, circuit breakers taJ.lks, earthing switches, lightning aJ.Testers,
steel structures, instrument transformers, station fence and all other metal
parts in the substation shall be eai.ihed by using two wires connected to
different pai.ts of the earthing network.
4.1.2.4. Bai.thing conductors should be protected from action of weather
conditions, chemical substance and contact surfaces.
4. 1.2.5. The followino desiiffi arameters shall be used in oundin° !lrid desi 0 n:
RMS Symmetrical Earth Fault Current 63 kArms
RMS Symmetrical Grounding Grid Current during
earth fault
Eai.·thin ° resistai.1ce in summer < 0.5 olun
Fault clearin o time = 1 Sec.
Allowable higher temperature of earthing Copper
conductor durino one second eriod of ea1ih fault
Max temperature (melting / fusing) of the grid copper
conductor, takino in consideration the exclusive use of
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page ,3110

Volume 2: Technical Specifications :R,e0. (O)
New Urban Communities Authority (NUC) Chapter 4
6"' October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/S
exothermic connectors on the buried ground 2:rid.

- Surface layer. resistivity gTavel 3000 ohm meter (min)
- Duration of fault current for determining allowable LO sec. or backup
body current clearing time
- Depth of ground grid conductors 0.5 to L5 meter
- Typical spacing between parallel conductors 3 to 15 meter
- Current projection factor for future svs,em 21:owth LO
2
- Cross section of the main grounding grid >2x240111111
- Facilities for measuring the earthing system from at least five points, should be
provided, access to these points and connections with the earthing measuring
instrument should be easv and annroved by Owner representative.
4.1.3. General Dimensioning:

4.1.3.1. The grounding grid of substation shall be designed for an earth fault
current (short circuit cmTent) 63 kAnns and duration 1 Sec. as specified in
chapter 2 - Schedule 2S6.
4.1.3.2. When the order is awarded drawings of the earthing system shall be
submitted to owner representative for approval.
4.1.3.3. The resistance of the earthing system shall not be more than 0.5 ohm
during summer period. It shall be measured by the Fall-of-Potential
method. The potential between any earthed part inside or outside the
station and the su1Tounding earth shall not be more than 65V in case of an
earth fault inside or outside the station.
4.1.3.4. Steel structures with sufficient areas and cu1Tent ca1Tying capacities may
be used as parts of the protective earth connections of apparatuses and
insulators. If so, any kind of paint or anti corrosion treatment (except
galvanizing) of the electrical contact surface for the connecting leads to
the grid will be applied after completed installation of the leads.
4.L3.5. Minimum Conductor cross-sectional Area for equipment safety

2:r01111din ,...
,,..
- Risers. 240 mm2 Cu
- Instrument transformers 240 mm2 Cu
- Lightning anester 240 mm2 Cu
- Steel structure 240 1111112 Cu (at two locations
diagonally oooosite)
- Circuit breaker and disconnector 240 1111112 Cu (at two locations
dia_gonally onnosite)
- Potential equalization. >50mm2 C u ~
- Station service transformer 120 m1112,(Zq,,) '.cc,;,;: •· · .:,\,
- Metal enclosed switchgear 240 mmf <?li (afJlifee focatiqns one at
I !I ':'.h•
t ./ ,,
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 4/I0
New Urban Communities Authority (Nl.JC) Chapter 4
6'h October Eastern Extensions ?20/22122 kV GIS S/S
each end and middle)

- Control Cables 95 mm2 Cu at both ends
- Lightning Masts 2401111112 Cu
- AC/DC main distribution panels 1201111112 Cu
- Remote & local control panels and 240 mm2 Cu
relay nanels
- Metal fence / Gate 2401111112 Cu
- Cable tray/ metallic conduits 50mm2
- Power cables (11 kV and above) 240 mm2 at one end
4.1.3.6. The conductor cross sectional area of connections to the main grounding
grid (Risers) will be according to the earthing system design but not less
than 240 mm2 annealed soft copper wires.
4.1.3.7. If the shortest distance between the live parts and the object is greater
than 10 m for 500 kV and 5 m for 220 kV, it is stated that flashover
cannot take place.
4.1.3.8. If there is any possibility for a conductor to fall down on a steel strncture
· this structure must be connected to the grounding grid with a connection
able to sustain the eaiih fault current, i.e. the connection shall be not less
- ?
than 240 mm- Cu.
4.1.3.9. For connection of low voltage equipment, local transformers and other
· kinds of equipment outside the systems, the conductor area is to be
dimensioned for the highest possible fault current in the actual point
allows 240A/mm2 and duration of 1.0 sec.
4.1.3.10. Wire mesh fence ilill be grounded with the conductor of 240 rnni2
connected to the fence every (3) meters, also metal part of the boundary
fence shall be eai~thed.
4.1.3.11. Each single phase surge arrester shall be connected with the earthing grid
via ground rod; this is also applicable for the neutral point of power
transformers.
4.1.3.12. The eaiihing grid shall cover the whole area of the substation including
the reserved space for future extension.
2
4.1.3.13. Connection oflightning arrester eaiihing terminal> 70 111111 Cu.
4.1.3.14. All eaiihing conductors installed above ground inside or outside
buildings shall be solid copper rectangular cross section bar except risers
from the earthing grid.
4.1.3.15. Contractor should submit in the design stage the earthing principles and
details (EP & ED) documents for owner review and approval.
4.1.3.16. The followings must be taken into consideration:
a) The connection between the electrical paii of the eq·.~~.1.eernt ·.and
earthing grid shall be via riser completely separate,irom any· other
earthing connections till the earthing grid. /. · · • · 0
b) Rods are copper clad steel. / · '
I
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD ,Page 5/10

c) Use birnetal in connections when it is required, such as earthing of:

transformer's rails, wire fencing, equipment casing, steel structures,
marshalling kiosk ... etc.
d) Al! bolts, nuts and washers shall be stainless steel.
e) Soft copper conductors 95 1111112 shall be installed on the L.V cable
trays inside cable iTenches.
f) All eaiihing system inside buildings shall be copper flat bars
(stranded conductors are not accepted).
4.1.4. Joints, Connections:

4. 1.4.1. All connections underground shall be exothem1ic welded (Cad weld or
equal) .Bolted clainps shall be not used underground. Connection to
equipment or structures shall be bolted type.
4.1.4.2. Connections· between risers a11d steel structures or equipment shall
normally be made with compression type cable fittings. Two whole
contact pads shall be used. Welding Will Not Be Accepted
4.1.4.3. If some parts of the equipment, transfom1er casings for exfilllple, have
been provided with eaiih terminal clamps, these shall be used.
4.1.4.4. Each steel structure can-ying insulators or apparatus shall be connected to
the earthing grid. To ensure contact even, if a connection fails or a cable is
r cut off, each structure will be com1ected via two different risers to two
different pa..-ts of the earthi..'lg grid. Steel structures with more tha11 one leg
should have two legs c01mected to the grid. These legs that have a great
spacing between them are chosen.
4.1.4.5. Disconnecter switch or circuit breaker frameworks are not considered as
proper conn.ections between steel structures.
4.1.4.6. If there ai·e no connections between the legs capable of carrying the
cunent all legs shall be connected to the grid with their own risers.
4.1.4. 7. Operating mechanisms a11d motor drives placed on separate sta11ds shall be
connected as above.
4.1.4.8. If temporai-y earthing switches or contacts for portable devices are
mounted on single pole supports these supp01is must be connected to each
other by a11 extra conductor with a cross- section not less than 240 mm2
cu.
4.1.5. Transformer Earthing:
4.1.5.l. Whichever type oftransfom1er is used, its casing shall be connected to the
ground grid at two (2) locations diagonally opposite each with copper
L conductor size 240 mm •
2
4.1.5.2. The neutral points of a transformer shall be connected to tb.e__,,0 1:cmnding

grid via ground rod a11d riser isolated from the transfo/~nk;~ •.·
i ,· ..
/\.-'
j,
\< j
! ;,;
.,
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD J Page 6/10

Volume 2: Technical Specifications I Rev. (0)
'L
6'' October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/S
4.1.6. Earthing Of Fixed Earthing Switches, Instrument Transformers, Circuit

Breakers, etc:
4.1.6. l. Connections benveen any type of ea1ihing device, e.g. earthing switch,
and risers from the eaiihing grid shall be made through a copper wire 2':
240111111 2 connected between the eaiih contact of the eartJ1ing device and a
riser. This wire should be properly clamped to the steel structure ai1d laid
in close to the steel structure along the way but isolated from it.
4.1.6.2. If the three earthing devices in one group are mounted on the same
structure then the above method apply to the short-circuiting
interconnections benveen the phases.
4.1.6.3: Each one of instrument tra11sformer's ;,eutrals ai1d lightning airester's
eaiihing te1minal should have its own earthing connection to the ea1ihing
grid risers and shall be separated from any eaiihed steel structure a11d
metals.
4.1.7. Other Types Of Earthing Within The Substation:
4.1.7.1. To give increased protection to operators, a ground mat shall be laid
2
beneath the operators place. This mat should consist of 35 mm Cu wire
laid down in a -spiral of about 1 m dia111eter with about 0 .2m distance
benveen wires and with one end cmmected to the operating mechai1.ism.
The mat shall be buried about at a depth of about 0.5m (or be laid out
above the nonnal ground grid).
4.1.7.2. Connection boxes for low voltage or control cables shall be connected via
one 35 1mn2 wire inespective ;f whether the box is mounted on earthed
steel structure or not.
4.1.7.3. It is to be noted that risers of earth conductors are not allowed to come
into close contact with control cables.
4.1.7.4. For poles lighting a11d · other types of metal structures. within the
substation area, nor mentioned before, shall be connected to the earthing
grid via 35 mm2 Cu, one connection for each item. The only exception is
radio a11tennas, the ea1ihing of which follows other principles not stated
here.
4.1.7.5. The boundary fence shall be earthed each 10 meter, Also all metal gates
shall be earthed.
4.1.7.6. The Contractor shall be observant of the risks for corrosion of buried
galva11ized steel structures if they are connected to the copper ground grid.
That is, since all structures within the substation ai·ea must be connected to
the grid, buried steel structures shall be avoided.
4.1.8. Grounding of Gas insulated switchgear (GIS)

The single phase units of a GIS enclosure have to be connected to each
other at least ~t every input and output term!nal by com1ections ,1~ can
cany the maxmrnm load current. The maximum temperature .ns.e of the
! ":
connections due to this load cunent is 30°C. These conneftt~11s shall

t ?;
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D \ Page 7/10

Volume 2: Technical Specifications \ Rev. (0)
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/5
constitute parts of the GIS. The enclosure shall be connected to ea1ih. All
material parts which not belong to a main or an auxiliary circuits shall be
earthed.
The connections at the input and output terminals shall be grounded with
240 mm2 Cu-conductors, Benveen these connections and grounding points
the single phase units shall be connected and grounded at points which
make the distance between two neighboring grounding points not greater
than 20 m. These connections and grounding shall be of 240 mm2 Cu.
4.2 Temporarv Earthing Devices:

4.2.1.fatrthing for working shaU normally be achieved with the help of both fixed
earthing switches and p01iable earthing equipment. \A/here portable ea1ihing
equipment is used, phase conductors and steel supports shall both be
equipped with fixed contacts to which the portable earthing equipment shall
be connected by an operator in safe position. Other solutions of comparable
technical quality can alternatively be used after approval by the owner
representative. -"
4.2.2.For po1iable earthing devices no IEC standards exist and therefore the
method of using the equipment, as well as testing procedures, shall be
- approved by the owner representative.
4.2.3 .All earthing tmits (parallel p01iable eartl1ing devices included) intended for
connection to conductors shall as a rule be capable of canying the full
fault currents for the station.
4.3 Substation- Protection Against Lightning:

4.3: I.The substation shall be protected against direct lightning strokes by shield
wires or vertical lightning rods (poles).
4.3.2.Effective shieldi..1Jg is applied · to all phase conductors, equipment and
buildings such that lightning strokes will be terminated on the overhead
shield wires or masts.
4.3.3.The designing of the lightning protection system shall be according to IEC
62305, Effective shielding shall be designed in accordance with system
parameters, and the local isokeraunic level (15 thunderstorm days).
4.3.4.Calculations shall be performed at the shield wire support points and masts
and shaJI be in accordance with the electro~geometric model and shali be
approved by owner representative.
4.3.5.The width of the protected zone on each side of one shield wire may be
assumed to be equal to the heig..1-it difference benveen the shield wire and
the protected object or part of it.
4.3.6. The volume protected by :'ertical conductor has the ~hape _of a ~ ' f ~ 0
protected zone has a radms of about half of the height d1:t;f4~nJe.b ;~een \
the lightning rod and the protected equipment. i · ·- ;;- ,~<1 '·"<;. \ \
0
-~·
0
~ - ( )i\c~,,; . \C'i .; 1
6'" October Eastern Extensions 2:20/22/22 kV GJS SiS
4.3. 7. Combinations of shield wires and lightning rods give higher efficiency and
must be used in the substation.
4.3.8. The end points of the shield wires and lightning rods shall be connected to
the earthing grid at least in nvo points. The time constant of the emihing
grid should be less than the front time of the lightning wave. The cross
section of the shield wires must not be less than 200 mm2 Al or 70 mm2 Fe.
4.4 Submittals:
4.4. l. Submittals Required With Bid:
Submittals required with bid are, three copies each of:
Bid schedules fully completed.
A guaranteed ex-works delivery date m1d the estimated time required for
tra11sp01i from to the designated stores or site in the A.R.E shall be given.
The supplier's quality assurance program or manual together with a list of
international/ national standard specifications covering raw materials,
components, processes, tolerm1ces,- test procedures, etc. a11d a list of tests
normally carried out one raw materials with a description oftest equipment.
A sh01i description of the manufacturing processes a11d equipment
· employed in grounding material production shall be provided.
In addition to the specified three copies one set of reproducible drawings
showing grounding materials shall be provided.
Detailed drawings of each type of drnm that will be used for packing
conductors including the constituent material and the method of
manufacture shall be supplied.
4.4.2. Submittals Required Following Award Of Contract:
Submit drawing, calculations,· test reports a11d literature pertaining to the
specified items, submittals shall include but not be limited to the
following:-
• Soil resistivity measuring procedure.
• Resistivity measurement of the surface material used.
Calculations of touch and step voltages, station gourd potential rise,
and the total calculation of substation grounding system design.
• Layout drawings of the ground grid.
• Detailed drawings showing the connections benveen all equipment
and the ground grid.
• Layout drawings and design calculations of shielding system.
• Detailed description of shielding system materials.
• Detailed description of various connectors and connecting processes
used to the ground grid.
• Test reports.
No work shall be proceeded until these calculations a11d drawings have been
approved.

New Urban Communities Authority (J\TUC) Chapter4
6"' October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/S
Final approval of the grounding grid system shall be after site test
measurement of the grounding grid resistance.
Details of manufacturing, test and shipping schednles.
Certificates covering raw materials used in manufacture of conductors.
Certificates covering sample tests canied out on wires before stranding of
conductors.
Certificates covering the routine tests ca1Tied out one wires after stranding and
on complete conductors before shaping of conductors.
A list giving per drum, the dnnn number, the size of conductor, the exact
length, the net weight, the gross weight, the number of any joints made during
stranding and their distance from the outer er,J.

6'" October Eastern Extensions 2?0/22/22 kV GIS SIS
CHAPTER FIVE
220 KV OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT

New Urb,;_n Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 5
6 th October Eastem Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS SIS
CHAPTER FIVE
220 KV OUTDOOR EOUIPMEJ\lT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Clause
I Description Page
5.1 220 kV Capacitor Voltage Transfonner(CVT)/ Coupling
Capacitor Voltage Transformer (CCVT) and wave traps
5.2 220 and 22 kV surge anesters 5
5.3 Current Transformer 6

New Urban Comrnunitfos Authority (NUCA) Chapter 5
CHAPTER FIVE
OUTDOOR EOUIPldENT
5.1 220 kV Capacitor Volta2:e Transforrner(CVT)I Coupling Capacitor

Voltage Transformer (CCVT) and Wave Traps:
5.1.1. SCOPE OF SUPPLY
1- Two (2) 220 kV V/ave Traps (in direction of Al Gamma! 220 kV

S/S) (inter phase coupling) with all the necessary suppo1ied parts
for pedestal moun,ing (on CCVT's) as specified. The traps shall be
equipped with bird barrier and corona cups, and should have
blocking resistance of 600 ohm. Both the blocking B.W and
frequency ranges will be defined later.
th
2- Two (2) 220 kV Wave Traps (in direction of 6 October 220 kV
S/S) (inter phase coupling) with all the necessary supported parts
for pedestal (mounting on CCVT's) as specified. The traps shall be
equipped with bird barrier and corona cups, and should have
blocking resistance of 600 ohm. Both the blocking B.\V and
frequency ranges will be defined later.
3- One (1) three single phase 220 kV CCVT's (in direction of Al

Gamma! 220 kV S/S) two of them are suitable for wave trap
installing on it (Contractor has to visit the remote end to identify
on which phases wave trap shall be installed) as specified,
included in the total supplied number for the substation, it should
include the maintenance earthing switch.
th
4- One (1) three single phase 220 kV CCVT's (in direction of 6
October 220 kV S/St) two of them are suitable for wave trap
installing on it (Contractor has to visit the remote end to identify
on which phases wave trap shall be installed as specified, included
in the total supplied number for the substation, it should include
the earthing switch.
5.1.2. Technical Specification for the voltage transformers:
1- The voltage transformer shall be designed and fabricated to meet

the specifications stated in chapter (2) (2S-Schedules).

6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/?2/22 kV GIS S/S
2- For 220 kV O.H.T.L the voltage transformer is outdoor coupling

capacitive voltage transformer and shall confirm to IEC standards
(61869-5) last edition.
· 3- All leads from each secondary winding shall be brought out into
the terminal box located at the voltage transformer.
4- The leads shall terminate on terminal blocks of the stud type or

spring loaded contacts.
5- Secondary terminals shall be located in a position which is safely

and easily accessible while voltage transformer is energized.
6- Ground secondary when required at the terminal box.
7- Terminal box doors shall be gasketed and bolted.
8- Nameplates shall be provided giving complete voltage transformer

infonnation in accordance with IEC standard 61869-3& 61869-5.
9- For purposes of connecting DPLC equipment:

• CCVT wiil be connected to the carrier accessories in t.'le LMU
which consists of drain coil, protective spark gap, and earthing
switch.
• CCVT should be suitable for line trap erection on it and will be
connected to phase B of each line (but at any case it should be on
the same phase of the remote end station which should be
investigated by the contactor).
10- CCVT Rated capacitance not less than 7600 pF.
11- CCVT Creepage distance not less 7700 mm.
5.1.3 'technical Specifications for Line Trans:
1- The supplied traps shall be designed and fabricated to meet the

specification stated in Chapter. (2) (2S. Schedules).
2- Should confinn to IEC 60353 standards.
3- .. Should be of single phase, dry and air cooled type.
4- Should be include protective and shunt tuning devices.
5- Should be designed and equipped with anti-corona cups to reduce

Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 416
New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter .5
6'h October Eastern Extensions 2"0112122 kV GlS SIS
corona discharge effect on PLC channels performance.
6- Should be equipped with bird barriers which shall be impossible to

pass a l 6Jm11 (5/8 inch) diameter sphere through any opening in the
line trap.
7- Should be of the type mounted on CCVT.
8- Nominal rated current should be 2000 A.
9- The blocking bandwidth shall be wide band in the range from 50 to

500 kHz, the exact blocking band shall be defined by EETC later.
10-Withsta.,.d a thermal short circuit rating not less than 50 kA/1 sec.
11-Rated inductance of0.5 mH.
12-Should have resistive impedance not less than 600 Ohm in its
blocking band. Exat blocking band shall be defmed by EETC later
13- The line trap will be connected on phase B on each line (inter circuit
coupling) - but at any case it should be on the same phase of the
remote end station.
5.2 220 and 22 kV surge arresters:

~ .
.. / .· · l.c: ;E[ectrical specifications of surge arresters shall meet the
1 ·· ·sp()cifications stated in chapter (2), (2S-Schedules).
r
t:
2° Surge arresters shall be heavy duty station class "Zinc Oxide" type
\
.···. with impulse characteristics suitable for use with outdoor
· .equipment and SF6 gas insulated switchgear.
3- Each surge arrester shall be provided with an electromechanical

type weather proof surge counter placed in accessible and visible
· location. Insulators shall be provided as required for the arrester
base and ground connection to ensure operation of counter.
Leakage current meter shall be provided. Suitable means shall be
provided to remove surge counter without disconnecting surge
arrester.
4- The surge arrester shall be conventional type as follows:

a) Surge arresters shall be sealed to permanently prevent the
entrance of moisture, dust, and shall be suitable for live
line washing.
b) Insulators shall be of suitable color glazed porcelain, all

6th October Eastern Exter:sions 210/22/22 kV GlS SIS
exterior metallic surfaces shall be bare aluminum, or any

other suitable recommended material.
c) A suitable copper ground strap shall be provided to follow
the most direct route from arrester to a clamp type ground
connector mounted at the base of structure. 220 kV surge
arrester shall be provided with aluminum corona rings.
d) Pressure relief directional apertures or parts shall be
located at each end of each surge arrester unit to relieve
the internal pressure which would occur in the event of
sustained 50 Hz power frequency current through the
arrester, and to prevent bursting of the porcelain housing.
Surge arresters parts used for insulating purposes and
which are continuously subjected to applied voltage shall
be of ceramic.
5- Additional infonnation to be given by bidder:
a) Resistive and capacitive component of the continuous

current at ambient temperature.
b) Reference current and voltage at ambient temperature.
c) Power frequency voltage versus time characteristics.
d) Lightning impulse residual voltage at 0.5, 1 and 2 times the
nominal discharge current.
e) Clearance and mounting specifications.
f) Possibilities of mounting drilli..'lg plans and base.
g) Type of arrester tenninals and possible conductor size.
h) Maximum permissible length of lead between arrester and
surge counter and between surge counter and earth.
i) Dimensions and weights.
5.3 Current Transformer:
The current transfonner shall comply with IEC 61869-2 and according
to chapter 2 (2S-schedule).
Electric Puwer Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 6/6

New Urban Communities Authority (}'!UCA) Chapter 6
6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/2? kV GlS SIS
CHAPTER SIX
AUXILIARY POWER AND LIGHTING
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 1/20

th
6 October Eastern Extensions 120!22i21 kV GIS S/S
CHAPTER SIX
AUXILIARY POVJIER AND LIGHTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Clause Description Pa 0� e
6.1 General
6.2 Auxiliary Transformers
I 3
6.3 A.C. System 5
6.4 D.C. System 6
6.5 Batteries 8
6.6 Rectifiers I
6.7 Low Voltage Equipment 11
6.8 Substation Lighting and Power Installation 13

:,;-:·-·�
�
6.9 Electrical Installation in Buildings 14
6.10 Emergency Lighting 18
6.11 Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) 18
6.12 Sub1nittals 19
Table (1) Lamps & Illuminatton;r.I::;e-vels -..

20
--
. //" /i•
r - -.
)
i\,,;

CHAPTER SIX
AUXILIARY POVVER AND LIGHTING
6.1 General
The low voltage systems in all aspects such as design, manufacturer,
testing ... etc. shall be in accordance with the relevant IEC last edition,
EUS-E16 and technical parameters mentioned in Chapter 2.
Auxiliary power supply system should be According to technical
specifications and comprise both A.C and D.C systems necessary for
supply the substation low voltage loads such as but not limited to the
following:
• Indoor and outdoor lightilig.
• Emergency lighting.
• Power transformer cooling equipment, tap changer and fire fighting
system.
• Control equipment.
" Protective relaying equipment.
• Indications and alarms.
• Air conditioning system and ventilation .
., Low Voltage motors.
6.2 Auxiliarv Transformers

a- General:
I. The power supply of the substation shall be fed from two auxiliary
transformers.
2. The auxiliary transformers shall be connected by power cables to
medium and low voltage switchgears.
3. The transformer shall be oil immersed, naturally cooled three phase unit
and have enclosed MV and LV terminals and suitable for indoor use in
accordance with IEC 60076.
4. The continuous rating of each transformer shall not be less than 500 kVA.
5. The transformer shall be designed with cable entry boxes for direct
connection of cables on the high and low voltage sides. Oil or compound
filling cable boxes is not pennitted.
I>- Ratio of Transformation and Connections:

The No-Load ratio of transformation of the auxiliary transformers shall be
22/0.4 kV/kV, at main tap. The connections shall be delta/star (Dyn 11),
with earthed low voltage neutral. /-----~---
c- Voltage Control: /: ,,,

The transformer shall be equipped with an off-loaq' tip-changer installed
on the high voltage side for + 5% transformat\qn -ratio adjusted in
±2x2.5% equal steps. \ / _·
\;~.~.-..
~--·

d- Limits of Temperature Rise:
The transfo1mer shall be able to deliver its maximum continuous ratings
with the tap changer set at the middle tapping of the primary winding,
without exceeding the following temperature rise limits above ambient
temperature 50°C:
- Oil temperature rise at top level 45°C
- ·winding temperature rise by resistance method 50°C
- Hot spot temperature rise 60°C
e- Overload Capacitv:
The transformer shall be capable of withstanding an overload capacity of
10 (Ten) percent of its maximum continuous rating for a period of two
hours following continuous running at full load without injury and without
exceeding the specified temperature rise value.
f- Construction:
Bidders shall submit full detailed specifications, design drawings,
maintenance and operating manuals and catalogues of the offered
transformers.
The constructional features of the auxiliary transformers shall meet the
requirements stated for the applicable codes and standards of the
following:
• IEC- International Electro-technical Commission 60076, 60137 and
60296.
• The tank shall be of the sealed construction type. The top cover shall be
bolted to the main tank and sealed with a neoprene bonded cork
gasket, suitable for temperatures specified in this specification.
• Transformer tanks shall not be leak and tested against leak. The
criterion of leakage shall be discoloration by oil white wash applied
externally at points where leakage is likely, such as at seals and joints, at
an oil temperature of90°C, or other approved method by the owner.
• The transfonner tank shall be connected to the earthing grid near the
transfonner.
g- Accessories and Fittings:

The auxiliary transformers shall be supplied with all the necessary___ _
accessories and fittings including but not limited to the following: i:"/ w+ ~ '
• Off load tap changer for external operation with clearly th.ar~ed
position indication. {1 ; ? \
• Expanding vessel.(Conservator) !. {- iJ. 1
• Oil level indicator. \ ,
• Eye bolt nut and two eyelets. \ •· ..
• Gas protection device (Buchholz relay) with two stage signals, on;Tor
alann and the other for isolating the transfonner.
Electrical Pmver Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 4/20

6'" Ocmber Eastern Extensions 270/22/22 kV GJS SiS
• One indicating top-oil thermometer with two adjustable contacts for
alarm and tripping. The thermometer shall have red marking indicating
the maximum permissible temperature.
• Cable clamps (suitable area for earthing wire).
h- Bushillf!s:
" The 22 kV and 0.4 kV sides shall be completely isolated. All bushings
shall be porcelain type designed that there will be no excessive
stressing of any parts due to temperature changes and adequate means
shall be provided to accommodate conductor expansion.
• The bushings on both sides shall be of the outdoor type.
• MV and L V bushings shall be replaceable without difficulty.
Cemented in bushings are not acceptable. Replacement shall not
require removal of the top cover.
• Sufficiently robust to withstand transports risks.
• The LV porcelain bushings shall be located on the top of the
transformer tank, on the side opposite the MV bushings. The LV phase
and neutral bushings shall be provided.
• The MV bushings shall be labeled-U, V, W and the LV bushings
u,v,w,n. The marking of phase identification by adhesive stickers or
painting is not acceptable.
i- ivfarkings:
The transformer shall be equipped with rating plate giving the
following infonnation:
Standard adhered to and their data, manufacturer, type designation,
serial number, year of manufacture, number of phases, frequency, rated
power, voltage and cunents, measured sh01i circuit impedance,
impedance voltage, cooling method, total weight, oil weight, insulation
level.
j- Transformer Room:
• The transformers shall be installed in a room.
• The bays for the connecting devices and the transformer shall be
separated.
• The transformer bay shall be equipped with an oil tray.
• The foundation shall be equipped with holes for L V and MV cables--
• All metal parts shall be equipped with cable clamps for com1ectfo11 to
the earthing grid (185mnr or 240nm12 ) earthing wire. /"/:
" The room shall be equipped with indoor light and socket$ as}v/ell as
openings for ventilation system. \, / ' ' ·
\. .
\:
\
6.3 A.C. Svstem:
a) The low voltage 380 V A.C. system shall be a y-coupled, solidly earthed,
4-wiresystem. The neutral point of the auxiliary transformers shall be
connected to eaiih via the A.C. main board.
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 5/20

6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/S
b) The two incoming feeders to the A.C. main board shall be connected
via an automatic and manual transition system with bus-tie circuit-
breakers, to prevent parallel operation of the auxiliary transformers.
c) During normal operation, one of two auxiliary transformers will feed
the main board, and if a fault arises on any transformer, the transition
system shall connect the loads to the other transfonner. The automatic
transition system shall be fed from the D.C. system.
d) Distribution to equipment shall be performed via sub-distribution
boards connected to the A.C. main board. This connection shall be
made by power cables.
e) The power supply to the cooling equipment of power transformers or to
any area shall be separated in two groups each group shall be fed from
one section of the A.C. main b0ard via separate cables.
f) The sub distribution boards shall be installed close to each A.C load
where local power is necessary.
g) The common neutral and earthing conductor in a 4-core incoming cable
shall be connected to neutral busbar in the main distribution board
which shall be connected to the earthing busbar in the respective board
via disconnectable link. The earthing busbar, metal clad, and steel
structures shall be connected to the earthing grid close to the board.
6.4 D.C. System:

a) The function of the D.C. system is to supply auxiliary and operating power
to equipment designed for a D.C. supply.
D.C. is normally supplied from the A.C. system across rectifiers, but if
the A.C. supply is lost, the batteiies take over the power supply without
any interruption of operation and control of the substation equipment as
well as to supply substation emergency lighting.
b) The substation shall have one 220 V D.C. system supplying protection and
control equipment of switchgears. Filters should be provided in the battery
chargers to minimize any superimposed or transient waves on the system.
The 220 VD.C. system shall include but not limited to the following:
• Two Batteries nickel-cadmium type.
• T!11"ee (3 phase) charging Rectifiers one of them is back up for the
other two.
• Copper busbar in h¥o sections with bus-tie C.B.
• Control, measuring, protection, distribution boards etc. as req~~---,,,
/ , ,\, ,,.
and approved by Owner. "' \,

• The battery charger shall be enclosed in painted steel ch~~sis with a :\
degree of protection IP 50. \
c) System Design: "

\ .
1) The D.C. system shall be designed so that fault's frequency wi!lbe_Jc)o ..
low.
2) The D.C. system design shall be based on the following principles:
- High selectivity.

Volume 2: Technical Specifications Rev. (OJ
6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS SIS
Main distribution board located adjacent to the battery room.
Main distribution boards should be equipped with C.B to disconnect
the battery from DC system when it is needed.
Each battery should have a fused disconnecting switch located in the
battery room in order to isolate the battery during any works on the
battery.
No risk of short-circuit occurrence between the battery and the main
D.C. distribution board.
Since the entire system cannot be designed so that short circuits will
never occur, it must be provided with short circuit protection. These
shall provide, absolute and safe selectivity, so that tripping is
confined to a minimum.
D.C. system can be isolated. This implies that provision shall be
made for isolating the battery and the associated rectifier from the
load.
Allow unloading tests, boost charging and maintenance of each
battery during normal operation. This implies that provision shall be
made for protecting equipment from over voltage during boost
charging of any of the two batteries.
d) Battery Connection:
1) The first switching device (seen from the battery) shall be fused
discon..1ector located in the battery room and shall be contained in
separate enclosure for the positive and negative poles respectively. The
enclosures shall be made of insulating nonflammable material and
antiacid.
2) The connection between the battery poles and the automatic circuit
breakers shall consist of single conductors and shall be run so that they
are protected from physical damage.
3) Each battery is connected to its own section in the main DC board Via
automatic circuit breaker, and every battery shall have its own
supervisory, measuring, protection, signals, and control equipment.
4) Each pole shall have its own earth signal. ~-"
5) The battery distribution board shall consist of group of main ii,utoJI1at1c
circuit breakers, a group for connection of the discharging r~isi:qr; and
ft
groups for connecting the rectifiers and supervisory equipment.( /
e) Connection of the Charging Equipment: '{2~i;::;,\;;, .· ·

1) The battery charger shall be designed for charging one barter?·'"·
system and S/S D.C loads in parallel.
2) The spare hot standby charger shall replace automatically any faulty
charger out of the two operating chargers. The two load bus sections
shall be kept isolated through opening of the tie CB under normal
operational conditions. However, upon failure of anyone of the main

6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/2?/22 kV GIS S/S
chargers plus the hot standby charger, the tie CB should allow
connection of the two DC bus sections manually. When any of the
two faulty chargers is fixed and needs to be connected to its battery
system, the tie CB is first be switched off manually.
3) The charging rectifier shall be located as close as possible to the
battery.
4) The cl).arging rectifier shall be controlled by the battery terminal
voltage; the control voltage shall therefore be obtained at the battery
via separate automatic circuit breaker control cables.
f) Charger rating:
The charger shall be 3 phase rectifier with output DC rating sufficient to
supply the substation equipment load and recharge one battery systen,
from fully discharged condition in no more than 10 hours. Further the
· charger shall have spare capacity to compensate aging and temperature
nse.
g) Battery Rating:
1. The battery capacity is determined by the drawings up a load profile,
which specifies the load current on the battery as a function of time.
The necessary battery rating is determined by means of the load profile
plus 25% for future use by Owner (at any case the battery capacity
should not be less than the specified value given in Vol.2, Chapter 2-
Schedule 2S6).
2. The factors specified below shall be taken into account in determining
the rating of the battery:
• Load profile as approved by Owner.
• Time during which the A.C. supply is not available (5 hours).
• Highest and lowest pennissible pole voltage and the allowed
voltage variant.
• Factor of safety to allow for ageing of the battery and incomplete
charging.
• Battery type.
• Ambient temperature.
h) Under voltage disconnect device (LVD):

This device disconnects the substation battery bank from the 220V ~ DC--..
-'
bus when voltage drops to a value at which the battery bank 1:9-~ be' ·
damaged. / ,.'.,
The LVD device should remain open until AC restoratiorf 't~rr;
,it ·.
should be automatically closed and charger starts to rechru.·g~ tli~ .
battery. \ztt'
""¼"
6.5 Batteries: ··· ...,. .•
a) The batteries shall be of the nickel-cadmium type of medium discharge
rate and intended for stationary use. The battery cells shall be of the
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 8120

New Urban Communities Au!liority (NUCA) Chapter 6
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GJS SiS
vented type in single or multi cell containers and the containers shall be
transparent or - semi-transparent to allow check of the electrolyte level
through the cell wall. The battery shall be delivered dry charged, the
electrolyte in a separate container and with all necessary accessories.
Sealed-maintenance free type would also be acceptable.
b) Batteries shall have nominal voltage specified herein. The battery shall
be dimensioned for calculated load-profile without the final voltage
falling below 95% of rated battery voltage.
c) The cell capacity shall be tested by a constant-current-test, showing that
the final-voltage of individual cell does not under pass the minimum
final-voltage specified by the manufacturer. The maximum allowed
deviation during this test for an individual cell is ± 1.5 % from the
medium value of the final voltage p::r cell of the whole battery.
d) Plugs shall be of flame-resistant material and shall allow the battery to be
topped-up with water without removing the plugs.
e) All current-carrying parts, such as terminal bolts, links and connection
shall be adequately protected to prevent personnel from coming into
contact with them with a degree of protection of at least IP 40. However
provision shall be made for measuring the cell voltage without removing
such protection.
f) Each battery shall be .provided with all necessary equipment for
maintenance.
g) The cells shall be numbered and mounted on stages of wood or plastic- ·
covered steel (battery racks).
h) Battery rack of more than two levels is not permitted.
i) If the batteries are located together in two rows, there must be enough
space for maintenance along the two sides.
j) Batteries shall be mounted on insulated stands resistant to the electrolyte
use. The height of the stands shall be such that the batteries will be at a
convenient working height. Batteries wider than 0.7 m (including;,th~::-"",
tray) shall be installed so that access for service can be gained frQ1'q tlie. ·,
two long sides. The passage way for service shall have a clear flodi- ,space
of at least 0.8 m. !) ·
t y}
\•~· f
6.6 Rectifiers: \\., .·.:"·' -, i
,:
L
a) Constant output D.C. voltage at (±10%) fluctuation of 380 V.A.C. input•·····
,.
The rectifier characteristics shall be subjected to the following requirements, . . , ..·.. /'
and 0-100% load variation.

b) The output D.C. voltage must not deviate by more than (0.5%) of the
preset value while the A.C. voltage is simultaneously varying between
(85%) and (110%) of the rated value and the frequency with± 0.5 HZ of
the nominal frequency, the load between 0 and 100% of the rated cun·ent
range of the rectifier and the ambient temperature between (+ 10°C
and 50°C).
c) The rectifier shall be equipped with a current limiter; with limit value
equals the rated current.
d) Faults in the internal control circuits of the rectifier shall, as far as
possible, cause the output voltage to decrease. In the event of failure of

6 111 October Eastern Extensions ?20/22/22 kV GIS SIS
external control wiring, tbe rectifier must not deliver a voltage exceeding
(102%) of the preset value under any operating conditions.
e) Tbe A.C. component of the D.C. output current supplied to tbe battery
must not exceed a RMS value of (1) A per (500) AH of battery capacity.
f) Tbe peak value of the superimposed A.C. voltage must not deviate by
more than (0 .2 % ) of tbe floating charge voltage, this sball be applied
through the entire frequency range.
g) The maximum permissible voltage surge occurring in the rectifier under
floating charge conditions in the event of an instantaneous reduction in
load from (100% to 10%) of the rated cunent, or in the event of an
instantaneous change in the supply voltage ranging from (0 to 110%) of
the rated value, must not be more than 5% or less than 0.5% after 4
seconds.
b) The rectifier cmTent must not fluctuate under static loading conditions
of any kind.
i) The rectifier shall be·intended for connection of external control cables
for compensation of the voltage drop in outgoing cables.
j) A facility shall be provided for blocking of boost charging function of
each rectifier at the end of charging / recharging process. The floating
charge function shall be in automatically when boost charging ceased.
k) The rectifier shall be equipped at least with the following facilities:-
!- On-off switch on the A.C. supply side. Spring-return switches are no(
acceptable.
2- Operating switch for the floating and booster charging functions
3- Devices for adjusting _the floating and booster charging level.
4- Sockets shall be provided on the front for the connection Voltmeter
5- Cables shall be installed in and connected from underneath.
Connection blocks shall be dimensioned for the connection of cables
of the required area with regard to voltage drop, although at least I 0
2
mm.
6- An alarm signal in the control room should be provided to show the
rectifier out of service due to internal and external faults.
I) The rectifier shall be equipped with: AC voltameter, DC voltmeter and
DC ammeter.
m) Rectifier should be controlled by electronic controller.
n) Alarm Requirements:
The following alanns shall be provided for each charger by two
potential free contacts for each alann wired up to the charger terminals
and to the main control panel:
Mains failure.
Low charger voltage.
High charger voltage.
Rectifier failure.
Earth fault+/-.

6.7 Low Vo!ta(!e Eauipment:
a) Distribution Boards
Low voltage A.C. & DC boards (Main and Distribution Boards) shall
be metal- clad enclosed assembly in accordance with IEC 60439 and
comply with the following:
l. The boards shall contain all necessary equipment like circuit-breakers,
2,ir-break switches, MCB, current transformers and contactors.
2. ·All boards should be provided with earth leakage relays to initiate a
sound alarm in the control room and visual signal on the board, at any
earth leakage on any circuit supplied from the board.
3. Degree of protection shall be IP 50 for indoor and IP 54 for outdoor
installation.
4. The boards shall have copper busbars (adequate for 1000A as
minimum current rating for 500 KVA Aux. transformer) of the same
cross-section for phases, for the neutral (N) and for protective earth
(PE). The neutral busbar shall also have full insulation against earth
and be connected to the earth bar with one link in the main board only
.The busbars shall be designed for short circuit as well as the rated
current with the permissible over load; the temperature rise shall not
exceed 30°C.
5. The earth busbar shall preferably be located near the outgoing cable
terminals.
6. All cables shall be connected to the board with terminal blocks of
approved type located near the cable entry. Cables with large cross
section areas may be connected directly to the apparatus.
7. The doors shall be of the Ii-ft-off hinged type with locking facilities.
The operation devices for switches and control switches shall be
operated from the front of the board without the need of opening the
doors. When the door is opened it shall be possible to test auxiliary
circuits without touching live parts. ~-,.
8. The expanding gases developed in case of sho1i circuit lsh,al1 be
directed
.
in a safe direction in order to prevent injury Ip'i?g~i;sons
, . .· .
standmg near the board. i '; i ,. ,, . ..
9. The A.C. main board includes an automatic changeover ec{;uipi'uenfof
the circuit breakers with a possibility to operate the circuif1;>real5ers
manually. '", ·
10. All boards except battery distribution boards shall be connected to'·the · ·
main earth wire system by a separate earth conductor.
11. At least 25% spare terminals equipped with circuit breakers and cable
clamps for future extension for all boards shall be delivered except the
A.C. main board which to be equipped with spare terminals for six (6)
100 A circuit breakers plus five (5) 150 A circuit breakers and one (1)
250 A circuit breaker complete with circuit breakers and cable clamps.
12. The cubicles shall also include separate devices for temporary earthing
on both sides of incoming circuit-breaker. Earthing shall preferably be
performed behind a closed door. Earthing devices shall be designed for
L Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 11/20

necessary short-time current.
13. All boards should be provided with C.B. and signal lamps on the
incoming feeders.
14. The A.C switchboard should include two outgoing feeders with circuit
breaker of rated current not less than 150 A for feeding outdoor
boundary fence and not less than 250 A for feeding residential
building.
15. D.C boards should be equipped with the following:
An indicating signal for earth leakage.
An indicating signal for increasing and decreasing of the D.C voltage
(i.e. under voltage and over voltage).
An indicating signal for D.C Joss.
One fluorescent lamp for each pauel with suitable lighting intensity
controlled by ON/OFF switch and all other auxiliary materials.
b) Circuit- Breakers:
1. Circuit-breakers in the main AC board shall be designed in
accordance with IEC standard, three pole or one pole molded case or
air break type with breaking current 50 kA for three poie and 20 kA
for one pole. The circuit breakers shall function as a disconnector iri
the withdrawn position. (If any) Each unit shall be provided with a
test position where the main contact is opened, while the auxiliary
contacts are closed. In the withdrawn position the breakers shall be
lockable.
2. It shall be possible to operate the breakers by push buttons on the
front, and remotely, motor driven operating mechanism maximum
current and over-load relay and position contacts shall be included.
3. Miniature circuit breakers shall be used for circuit with rated current
up to (100) A, it shall be provided with remote signal contact for
circuits of control, signal, measuring and protection.
4. The sub-distribution board shall be rated for S.C.C = 20 kA at~~~:]~
<' ,c,;'
c) Current Transformers: /: •;: .

Current transformers shall be of the dry type for mounting bu1b~ts\~ith
a secondary cun:ent of lA and accuracy class of 5P15. \/
\ ,·
\'•,
d) Instruments: · ..,
1. The A.C. 11ain board shall be equipped with operating instrume~ts~ity- .
main feeders and busbar. The instruments shall be flush- mounted of
the front panel and be of square shape.
2. The indicating instruments shall be of square type indicating e1Tors
shall not exceed± 0.5% of the full scale value.
3. Each bns bar section shall be equipped with voltmeter (0-500V) with
7 positions selector switch. Each incoming feeder shall be equipped
with 3 ammeters (0-1000 A) at least with accuracy class not more
than (1.5) & kWH with accuracy class 0.5.

Ne·1v Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 6
6th October Eastern Extensions '120/22/22 kV GlS S/S
e) l\1ode of operation:
The contractor should supply the necessary devices to fulfill the following:
1. The parallel operation of the two auxiliary transformers shall not be
permitted.
11. In case failure of the operating auxiliary transformer the other shall be
automatically put into service.
111. In case of A.C supply failure the D.C supply shall be put into service
automatically.
6.8 Substation Lighting and Power Installation:

The following lighting and socket outlets shall be supplied and installed in
t:::.e substation:
6.8.1 General:
The contractor shall supply and install the outdoor, the indoor and the
emergency lighting and all the necessary power outlets for the whole
substation as described here in this Chapter.
AC supply for lighting, power outlets, air conditioning units, etc
shall be supplied from the main low voltage AC distribution board
via more than one sub-distribution board.
D.C supply for emergency lighting shall be supplied in case of A.C
supply failure.
The minimum lighting levels shall be not less than values
mentioned in Table (1).
6.8.2 Outdoor Electrical Installation:

- The electrical installation shalJ be designed to achieve the specifi-es;L
levels of illumination and lighting colors. ../~~ ··· ' '
The minimum illumination level shall not be less than 200 Lux.
All outdoor light fittings and power sockets shall have 1fi minimum
degree of protection IP 54. '.
The Lighting shall be high-pressure sodium vapor lamp typi, \ .:
·
6.8.3 Switchyard and Transformers Area:

Light fittings for the switchyard may be mounted on the ·steel
structures of the busbars and the incoming feeders (if applicable).
Those for the transfonners area shall be located on steel columns not
less than 8 mt heights· bolted to a concrete foundation and have
separate junction boxes at the height of 1.5 m from ground to supply
lamps or on the fire walls if possible.
Light fittings shall be fed by circuits operate by means of photo cell
and manually by push-buttons from the control room.
One 3 phase power socket 125A, with rated voltage 380 V, shall be
installed close to each unit of power transfonner tanks to supply power
to the oil treatment plant.
One Three phase power socket 32A, with rated voltage 380 V, shall be
installed on outside each marshalling box.
E1ectrica1 Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 13/20

- Mini. Illumination level at power transformers / switch yard areas shall
be 200 LUX.
6.8.4 Road Lighting:

For the main road and access roads around control and switchgear
building or any other buildings, the minimum illumination level shall
not be iess than 20 lux. The light fittings shall be mounted on steel
columns not less than 8 m height (street lighting).
6.8.5 Main Gate and the security room Lighting:

The lighting fittings for the main gate and the security room shall
be provided with high pressure sodium vapor lamp (floodlights), 111
addition to the internal lighting as specified here in table (1).
6.8.6 Boundary Fence Lighting:

The lighting fittings for boundary fence will be directly mounted on
its top using brackets suitable for two luminaries to illuminate the
boundary fence from both sides provided with high pressure sodium
vapor lamp (street lighting).
6.8.7 Guard Towers Lighting:

The lighting fittings shall be provided with high pressure sodium
vapor lamps (flood lights).
6.8.8 Exterior Lighting for S/S Buildings: ~'

The lighting fittings for the S/S buildings perimeter sh'.)JY~be)> ;
provided with high pressure sodium vapor lamp (street light~i*}J~ ::::, '
The lighting fittings shall be located on the exterior wa!ll ;,1sij1gy
brackets with Suitable length. I { q i' ·
\(/':,,
6.9 Electrical Installation in Buildings
6.9.1 General:
The AC indoor electrical installation shall be supplied from more than
one sub-distribution boards (DB), which are connected to the main
low voltage AC distribution board.
The lighting and power sub-distribution panels of the control building
shall be located in the control room.
Power outlets circuits will be supplied from a sub-distribution panel.
Lighting circuits will be supplied from another separate sub-
distribution panel.
All indoor light fittings, switches and power outlets shall have a
minimum degree of protection IP 30 except those of battery room
shall be anti-acid weather proof with a minimum degree of protection
IP 54.
All lighting for indoor installation shall be LED tube lamps.
6.9.2 Control Building and Switchgear Buildings:
The lighting installation shall be designed to give the illumination levels for

New Urban Communities Autlioriry (NUCA) Chapter 6
61h October Eastern Extensions 220/12/22 kV GlS SIS
the respective areas set out in table (1) which gives types of lamps to be used,
type of suitable mounting for each area type of power sockets and the limits of
glare index requirements.
Luminaries shall be selected for ease lamp changing, cleaning and durability.
LED tube lamps shall be Self-Ballasted.
Light fittings selected for control room shall be low brightness type.
LED tube lamps shall generally be (9, 18 watts).
Lights for Control room and 22 kV halls (also 500, 220, 66 kV switchgeaI
buildings) are to be switchable from all entry points.
6.9.3 Guard Room & Dormitory Building:

The minimum illumination level shall not be less than 100 lux.
LED tube lamps shall be installed in all parts of the building except on
outside wall of the building where incandescent lamps shall be used.
6.9.4 Other Buildings and Areas:

Rather than those items mentioned herein, the whole substation
structures illumination and all electrification works are part of the
contractor's works such as parking area ... etc.
6.9.5 Sockets:
a) The various types of sockets should be provided with a switch and:'
signal lamp.
b) Sockets of battery room shall be anti-acid weatherproof with a
minimum degree of protection IP 54.
c) All sockets shall be mounted at 0.4 m above floor level except in the
kitchen and the toilet whicp should be mounted at 1.2 m above floor
level.
d) Sockets with rated current higher than 16 A - 380 V should be
provided with a locking device to prevent insertion or removal of the
plug if there a tension (voltage) on its terminals.
e) Each socket should be provided with its plug with the following
~=-.. ratings:
- All sockets shall be provided with separate eaiihing pins connected
to the yellow/green part in the feeder's cable.
· - Sockets for lOA and with rated voltage not exceeding 250V shall be
in accordance with IEC 83 group C, international standard.
- Sockets for 16 A with a rated voltage 380V shall be in accordance
with IEC 309-l-2-309A.
- Sockets for 125 A with a rated voltage 380V, shall be in accordance
with IEC 309-l-2-309A.
- Sockets for 250A rated voltage 380V, shall be in accordance with
IEC 309-l-2-309A.
Sockets in substation shall be m accordance with table (1) and
located as follows:

Nev,,· Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 6
1) Switchyard and transformer area:
- One three phase power Sockets 125A, rated voltage 380 V
shall be installed close to each power transformer to supply
power to oil treatment plant.
- One three phase socket 32 A, rated voltage 380 V shall be
installed outside each marshalling box.
2) Control building and switchgear buildings:

One three phase power socket for 32 A, rated voltage 380
V at least shall be installed for every three bays (for indoor
S/S).
Minimum of three sockets- single phase shall be installed
in each room except in control room, 22 kV hall where a
single phase socket shall be installed every 15 meter along
their perimeters.
3) Other rooms:
Sockets for 16 A with rated voltage 220V shall be installed
in all rooms. Distance between sockets should not be more
than 8 m, at least two sockets in each room.
Sockets for 16 A with a rated voltage 380V shall be each 4
i11, at least one socket in each room close to A/C boards,
distribution boards, relay boards and control boards.
4) Basement:
Sockets for 63A, rated voltage 380V, one socket every
I Sm at least.
6.9.6 Switches:
The contractor shall supply the required type of lighting switches for the
different areas.
- Switches of battery room shall be anti-acid weatherproof with a
minimum degree of protection IP 54.
- DC switches shall be distinguished than AC switches by supplying
them in different type / shape / or color.
- Lighting switches shall be mounted at 1.2 m above floor level.
6.9.7 Lighting and Power Sub-Distribution Boards:

6.9.7.lType and breaking capacity:
Lighting and power sub-distribution boards shall be metal clad type
suitable for wall mounting, incorporating circuit breaker, fuse
units, miniature circuit breakers (MCB), contactors and all
necessary equipment.
The sub-distribution boards shall be rated for a rupturing capacity
of20 kA at 380 volt.
The sub-distribution boards shall contain space for future circuits
Electrical Power Systems Enginee1ing Company Exhibit D Page 16120

at least 25% of those required in the initial design and capacity will
be available for future use.
A provision of 25% extra spare miniature circuit breakers of each
type for each rating used shall be delivered as a substitute.
6.9.7.2 Bus bars:

Sub-distribution boards shall include 3-phase busbars, neutral
busbar and protective earth (PE) of high conductivity . copper
supported to withstand all nonnal and fault condition stresses.
The neutral busbar and (PE) shall have a rating not less than that
of the associated phase bus bar.
6.9.7.3 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB):

Circuit breakers shall be of the thermal / magnetic type with
suitable rating. The rupture capacity of the MCB shall not be less
than that of the distribution board itself.
6.9.7.4 Feeding cables:

All cables shall be copper conductors PVC insulated 0.6 /1.2 kV.
2
General light circuits shall be wired in not less than 3 mm cables.
General p~wer circuits shall be wired in not less than 4 rnrn2
cables.
General power circuits (three phase) shall be wired in not Jess than
6 rnm2 cables.
Different circuits for power sockets in the same room shall be fed
from the same phase for safety provision.
The cabling shall be made as follows:
• Indoor installation:
PVC insulated cables laid into tubes (conduits).
·.. - The percentage conduit fill shall not exceed 40% of the
conduit cross section area.
• Outdoor installation:
Armored cables laid on cable trays -and in case crossing road
steel pipes shall be used.
Earthing:
Neutral shall be connected via link with the protective earthing
busbar in the main distribution board and protective earthing
busbar shall be connected directly to the earthing grid.
A separate protective earthing conductor shall run along all feeders
and where all frames of apparatus and junction boxes shall be
connected to. This conductor shall be insulated by yellow - green
colored PVC or it shall be marked in all connection points by
yellow - green tape.
All installation shall be connected to the main earth grid system.
Unless otherwise mentioned earthing system is the contractor

Ne\V Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 6
61h October Eastern Extensions 220/2'2/22 kV GlS SIS
responsibility to be as per standard specification.
6.10 Emer>!encv Lhihtinl!:

• Emergency lighting shall be supplied from the DC distribution board in
case of AC supply failure.
• Emergency lighting system shall be automatically supplied in the event
of:
e AC supply failure of substation's main AC.
,, AC supply failure of main Lighting board.
• Lighting's miniature circuit breaker failure for any one of the
lighting circuits.
• Emergency lighting should be installed in all the substation rooms,
switchyard, main roads, access roads, gli&rd room and main gate and
operated as follows:
• Emergency outdoor lighting system shall be manually operated.
• Emergency indoor lighting system shall be:
1- Directly operated automatically in the following mentioned areas:
Control room.
Telecommunication room.
22 kV hall.
AC I DC and charger rooms.
-- Conidors and entrance of control building.
Manuaily operated by means of DC switches which shall be
•. ·. installed in the following places:
- Offices.
- Workshop / store.
Kitchen /toilets.
Auxiliary transformers rooms.
Battery room.
Fire Fighting room.
- H.V switches gear buildings.
• Emergency lighting shall be designed to give lux level not less than 5%
of the nonnal lighting lux level with minimum level of 10 lux.
• Only incandescent lamps with porcelain holders are allowed to be used.
• Emergency exit signs are required at all exits and along escape routes.
• Portable emergency lanterns which will be automatically light a pilot
lamp in case of AC supply failure shall be supplied (nmnbers not less
than five units).
6.11 Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS):
• The contractor shall provide a properly sized UPS system to feed the
SCS at the substation level .The UPS shall be a redundant one. The two
units shall be supplied from different AC boards. Moreover, if
substation batteries are used with the UPS, then each UPS shall be
connected to each 220 V DC system and this should be considered in

the calculations of the battery and charger capacity. There should be a
dedicated distribution board and dedicated sockets for the AC supply
of the control room SCS equipment.
6.12 Submittals:
Drawings, design calculations, test reports, catalogues and literature
pertaining for the specified items of material to be supplied under this
section. Other submittals listed hereunder shall include but not limited to
the following:
a) With Bid:
1) The arrangement of the D.C and A.C auxiliary power systems.
2) P1otection, measuring, metering control and alarms of the D.C and
A.C auxiliary power systems.
3) Charge/discharge curves of the batteries.
4) Brief description of the auxiliary power and lighting systems.
5) Earth leakage protection and alarms.
6) Different types of plugs, sockets and luminaries.
7) Others which are required by the bidding documents.
8) Block diagram of the 220 V DC system drawing charger rating
battery rating and capacity as well as AC & DC boards. ·
b) At the design and erection stages:

1) Detailed design calculations and arrangement of each system.
2) Samples and catalogues of the components of the systems.
3) Erection drawings of the system.
4) Operation and maintenance drawings and manuals.
5) Others which are required by the contractor and the owner.

Nnv Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 6
6'" October Eastern Extensions 2"0122122 kV GIS S/S
Table 1
Lamps and Illum.ination Levels
Min. Power outlets

Glare Type oflamps Mountin
Illumination (Sockets)
Index 0-
b
Area level
X Main Emergency Type 1- ¢ 3-$
(Lux)
22 kV hall/ HV. SWG. ✓
200 - LED' I C+W
BLDGS.
Control & relays room 500 16 LED" I C ✓
Offices 500 19 LED'* I C -
I
Telecommunication
500 16 LED** T
i C -
room
Workshop 300 - LED'' I C ✓
AC/DC & charger room 200 - LED' I C ,/
Battery room 200 - LED' I C ✓
Store 150 - LED' I C -
Kitchen 100 - LED' - C In aIJ -
areas
Toilet JOO - LED' I C - I
Corridor 100 - LED' I C -
Aux. Transformer room 100 - LED' I C+W ·✓
Entrance 100 - LED' I C+\V -

Fire fighting room 200 - LED' I C ✓
Power transformers &
200 H.P.S IF I S.C/\V ✓
shunt reactors areas
Basement 50-100 - LED' I C ✓
Guardroom 100 - LED' - C -
Dormitory 100 - LED' - C -
Main & access roads 20 - H.P.S I s.c - -
Control and switchgear
20 - H.P.S I S.C/W - -
BLDG'S pem1eter
Switchyard 200 - H.P.S I s.c - -
Outdoor installation 200 - H.P.S I S.C/W - -
NOTE: . .
LED": LED tube lights T8 9W 60cm-Millk-y-A+
LED"": LED tube lights T8 18W 120cm-Milll-.-y-A+ !/ •.
I: incandescent lamp
C: ceiling mounting
W: wall mounting ·•.·
H.P.S: high pressure sodium vapor lamp
<
S.C: Steel Column I steel structure ofB.B and incoming feeders
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 20120

New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 7-A
6111 October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GJS S/St
CHAPTER SEVEN -A
CONTROL, MEASURING, METERING & PROTECTION SPECIFICATION
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company (EPS) Exhibit D Page 1/29

6 1h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/St
CHAPTER SEVEN-A
CONTROL, �MEASURING, METERING & PROTECTION
SPECIFICATION
Item Description Page
7.1 Scope of work and Supply

7.2 Control system 4
7.3 Annunciation system. 7
7.4 Transmission of alarms and indications. 10
7.5 Interlocking system. 12
7.6 Test facility. 12
7.7 Synchronizing. 12
7.8 Measuring instruments. 13
I c'
7.9 Metering. 14
7.10 Protection system. 15
7.11 Lap top specification. 27
7.12 Spare parts. 28
7.13 Submitals. 28
7.14 Inspection Test. 29

6'1' October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/St
CHAPTER SEVEN
CONTROL. l\1EASUR1NG. METERING AND PROTECTION
7.1 SCOPE OF \VORK & SUPPLY:-
This section specifies the facilities that should be provided in regard to
s-witchgear control, position indications, measuring of voltage, cunent
and power flow, protection, signals and alarm system as well as
transformer tap changer control & supervision.
The control, measuring & metering system shall be based on the
substation control system (SCS) with associated bay controllers as
described in the tender specs.
The control and protection systems described in this section have to
comply in all aspects with this tender specification, the late~t issues of
the IEC relevant standard and the relevant EUS documents (E10, Ell,
El2&E13).
The protection, control, measuring, metering system should be designed
and sized to cover the full switchgear as per S.L.D and the future
extension bays.
For remote end substations, contractor has to replace, test and
commission the relays in the existed protection panels including all
interface with the existing systems in the substation as follows:
• At 6th October (2) P.P:-
a) For 220 Kv (U.G.C) line feeder (Tap offDol) circuit Bay:
Reolacement of the existed tlvo (2) Transfonner differential
relays types (RET670-ABB) by other tlvo (2) Line cunent
differential relays as specified (Mainl) & (Main2).
b) For 220 Kv (U.G.C) line feeder (Tap off Do4) circuit Bay:
Replacement of the existed tlvo (2) line differential cunent
relays types (RET670-ABB) by other tlvo (2) line cmrent
differential relays as specified (Mainl) & (Main2).
The offered relays shall be compatible for integration by the
contractor with the existed (DCS) control interface requirements
including Bay Control Units Type (REC670-ABB), (PCM600-
ABB) & (SCADA).
The contractor shall cover all required interface signalling for
safe operation and reliable existed protection & control scheme of
the the 6th October (2) P .P.
At El-Gamma] & 6th October (2) S/St:-
a) For 220 Kv O.!Ji.T.L line feeders single circuit bays:
At El-Gamma! & 6 October S/Sts:
1) Replacement of the existed protection relays to be Line
cU1Tent differential relay (Main 1) as specified taking into
consideration all interfaces with the existed control &
protection svstems.
2) Keeping the existed second Main protection (Main2)
distance relays as it is in safe & reliable operation
schemes.
The scope of work includes design, manufacturing, factory testing,
delivery, installation, testing , commissioning and guarantee of the
supplied control, measnring, metering and protection equipment.
N.B: Tenderer is requested to site visit for all remote ends for scope of
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company (EPS) ExhibitD Page 3/29
6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/St
work evaluations.
220 Kv outgoing feeders protective relays requirement list:-
Quantities of the Quantities No of

relavs at the relays at Far end
Relay Types Circuit Type station under Side
contracting side
Line Current (U.G.C) feeders 4(Four) 4 (four) at 6'"

cliff.relays October P.P
(Mainl) &
(Main2)
Line Current Short (O.H.T.L) l(one) 1 (One) at El-
cliff.relays feeders Garmnal S/St
(Mainl)
Line feeder Short (O.H.T.L) l(one) -
Distance relays feeders
(Main2)
Line current Short (O.H.T.L) l(one) 1 (One) at 6'"
diff.relays feeders October S/St.
(Mainl) ;
Line feeder Short (O.H.T.L) l(one) -

distance relays feeders
(Main2)
-7.2 CONTROL SYSTEM:

• The 220 kV switchgear shall be controlled via a secured key operated
Selector switches to allow the following control modes of operation:
i. Local control mode from local control panels.
ii. Remote control panels ( Conventional control switches).
iii. BCUs installed in the remote control panels
iv. An additional loose devices of line feeder configuration to be

submitted for the two (2) future 220 K v line feeder bays.
v. (SCS) human machine interface (HMI) in the station control

room
v1. Dispatch centers (NECC &/ or RCC) remote control centers via
soft switches
• The MV switchgear (22kV) cubicles control shall be via selector switch

Local/ Remote indication to allow the 22 kV (incomer and outgoing)
6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/12/22 kV GIS S/St
control from the 22 kV cubicle or SCS. Only the incomer 22 kV shall be

permitted controlled from remote.
e N.B. Normal operation of all bays switchgears components shall be

secured in case (BCU Failure ) for other specified remote and local
control mode
7.2.1 Common features for local control.. remote control . protection and
meterin!! oanels:
• A separate panel should be provided for each feeder of free standing
type.
• Bottom cable entry type
o Made of sheet steel of thickness not less than 2 111111, painted from all
sides(inside and outside) with rust resistant then electrostatic paint and
of an approved color by EETC
" Identification labels should be fixed on front and rear of panels, written
in English and Arabic language with equipment designation engraved.
• The enclosure shall provide a degree of protection not less IPSO for
indoor panels special & IP55 for outdoor ones.
• A minimum of 25% free space without any components on terminals
should be left inside each panel for te1minal accessibility and easy
wiring connection.
• All panels should include terminal blocks with 25% spare for future
wiring. It is not allowed to use terminal blocks as junction point for
cables that are not being used. Terminals should withstand 600 V rating,
screw type, mounted on a common rail and with transparent cover of
insulated material. Each group of tenninals should be separated from
~~,,_,,,;<,
each other using insulated barriers and labeled strips should be attached
/ - /,,,.
/ '"
. •.1
0
,'
', ,.-.
· ,' -- ·-to them.
'
• Diciconnecting type terminal blocks for current transfonners and voltage
I! tran?formers secondary circuits should include facility of isolation, short
!, ,. circuiting and earthing of the current circuits and open circuiting
'11 . __ _ _ ;·(isolating) the voltage circuits with pin used in both circuits for
\: ;, ~- .;,,, :::;crIJ.aintenance and testing purposes.

'•·- ~~-Flame retardant materials should be used for panels, ducts, wmng,
tenninal blocks etc.
• All panels equipment should be flush mounted type and fixed at 60 cm
above FFL (finish floor level) and comprise the following :
i) Auxiliary relays.
ii) Lamp (LED).
iii) AC sockets (220V) (Local control panels should have 3 80 V AC
sockets)
iv) Tenninals for AC, DC, CT&VT circuits.
v) Cable glands.
vi) Heater and Hygrostat (only for local control panels).
vii) MCBs for AC, DC & VT circuits with alarm & auxiliary contact.
viii) A securely fixed earth bus.
6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS S/St
7.2.2 Additional Features
i. For Control Panels
A mimic diagram with different colored strips for each voltage level
(Red for 220 kV, Yellow for 22 kV and black for earthing parts), with
labeled control switches of earthing and isolating switches and C.Bs to
indicate their position.
ii. For Local Control Panel
• A secured key operated Selector switch of rotary type for control modes
selections (Local /Remote) .
• Measuring instruments (indicating meters for cu1Tent and voltage).
• By-bas interlock switch & lamp test facility is required.
iii. For Remote Control Panel

• Mosaic control board is not accepted.
• Arranged in the same sequence of high voltage equipment.
• A separate panel should be provided for each 220 kV feeder (including
future extension bays) comprising the following:
~~-=;"'::, ... o Control_ swi_tches.
;' .,: ···· . ,. , fa\ 11easurmg mstruments.
/,'.t ,,'\
{ . In addition Ashould comprise the following features:
I • !
\:
"¾
• . Rota1--y type switches for local, remote and supervisory control.
• Audible indication and visual flickering in case of mismatching between
·the actual status of Switchgear and the position of the switch shown.
• Synchro-switch should be provided to check synchronism (in case of
line and coupler energizing).
• Audible and visual alarm signals in case of disturbance.
• Control circuits should be designed to prevent simultaneous actuation of
ON/OFF switching orders.
• Control circuit having potential free contact terminated in a separate
tenuinal blocks & labeled SCS & RCC & NCC for SCADA system.
• Additionally for power transformer bav the following facilities

should be provided on the remote control panel and should be also
included in The BCU of the transformer bav:
o Tap changing push button control, indication, master/slave, and
manual/automatic switches.
o Cooling of£'on (two groups).
o Fan control switch (manual & automatic).
o Oil and winding temperature indicator.
6111 October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G IS S/St
o Position indication for 22 kV incoming C.B.

o Automatic voltage regulators (AVR).
7.3 ANNUNCIATION SYSTEJVI:

The following requirements as minimum:-
• Audible and visual signaling for all specified items herein after.
• If the D.C supply is interrupted it should be fed from A.C supply and
vice versa.
" All indicated alanns should be individually separated and labeled
according to its function (e.g. BBP trip and BBP fail, NOT
BBP(trip/fail))
• Alarming simultaneous actuation of operation devices.
• The annunciation panel power supply should be fed from the Two DC
sources and it is preferable to have redundant power supply for the
panel.
• An individual annunciation signaling alarm should be provided for each
feeder in addition to one main (common) annunciation panel.
7.3.1 Common annunciation alarm panel
The following alarm signal list (as minimum) should be as signal

windows with an audible and visual anunciator on the Common
annunciation, Alann Panel and also as signal list displayed with an
audible and visual anunciator on the LCD of a separate BCU dedicated
-"":foi:'common
' ,, ' i '~
signaling.....
a!ann and also on the working stations via LAN:
· -Fi;te fighting for each transfom1er.
2.2.0'·1<.v.Bus Bar 1 potential circuit failure for each section.
~201'.V.Bus Bar 2 potential circuit failure for each section.
22 lyV potential circuit failures for each section.
\:'' A. (Z System fails
: >:.220 V D.C System 1 fails.
0
~--~-"" 220 V D.C System 2 fails

220 V D.C earth fault.
48 V DC System fail.
Auxiliary transfonner failure ( 1, 2).
Maximum and minimum voltage levels at charging conditions.
Fault acknowledges push button.
Communication fails
Buchholz and temperature alarm and tripping for each auxiliary
transformer.
Indication for 22 kV switchgear (alarm, trip).
5 spare window.
Additionally the following push buttons should be provided:

111 Fault acknowledges push button.
6th October Eastern Extensions 220C!.2!22 kV GlS S/St
rll Lamp test push button.
7.3.2 Individual annunciation unit for each bay (220 kV)
An individual annunciation unit for each bay should be provided and

instailed on the remote control panel with the following (audible and
visual) alarm list and on the relevant BCU of each bay should be
displayed as minimum on its LCD and also on working stations via
LAN:
i) For 220 kV Transmission line bavs:

Main Protection relays (trip, fail, start).
Breaker failure (trip, fail, strut)
Directional over cmTent protection (trip - fail).
Directional earth fault protection (trip - fail).
CB. Mechanism fail.
Inter-trip receive.
220 V D.C supply 1 fail.
220 V D.C supply 2 fail.
Trip circuit supervision! fail.
Trip circuit supervision 2 fail.
V.T circuit failure.
SF6 GAS pressure drop 1st stage (AJann).
SF6 GAS pressure drop 2nd stage (Blocked).
Motor switches O.L.
✓.,,.--::----~'Gommunication link fails.
/ · Po!e,discrepancy (in case of single phase mechanism).
/ 1$".sJ\ES's motor (close -open) running time exceeded.
( :rv.rcl3's trip.
\. . 5 spai-e windows.
·,
' ' ·--~HLF9r power transformer bays for each main protective relay:
Differential protection (trip, fail).
Built-in 220 kV Directional Over current protection (trip, start).
Built-in 220 kV directional earth fault protection (trip, start).
Built - in 22 kV Directional Over current protection (trip, start).
Built - in 22 kV Directional Earth Fault protection (trip, strut).
Built - in Overload (alann).
220 kV Restricted earth fault protection (trip, fail, strut).
220 kV Neutral windings stand-by earth fault current relays (trip, fail,
start)
22 kV Zig zag transfonner Restricted eruth fault protection (trip, fail,
start).
22 kV Zig zag transformer Neutral windings stand-by earth fault current
relays (trip, fail, start).
22 kV incomer directional over current and earth fault relays (trip, fail,
6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/St
start).
Transfonner over-flux. (trip, alarm).
Tr. fans (1st group) (run - fail).
Tr. fans (2nd group) (run - fail).
BF (trip, fail, staii).
Buchholz relay 1st stage (alarm).
Buchholz relay 2nd stage (trip).
\Vinding temperature 1st stage. (Alann).
Winding temperature 2nd stage (trip).
Oil temperature 1st stage (alarm).
Oil temperature 2nd stage (trip).
Oil level (alann).
Tap changer - in progress.
Tap changer limit position.
Tap changer out of step.
SF6 GAS pressure drop 1st stage (alai111).
SF6 GAS pressure drop 2nd stage (block).
IS's / ES's motor (close-open) running time exceeded.
220 V DC supply 1 fail.
220 V DC supply 2 fail.
MCBs trip.
Pole discrepancy.
Status indication for:
• Fan control (manual-automatic)

• · Tr. Automatic voltage regulator (IN/OUT).
• Tap changing (manual-automatic). - 5 Spare.
iii) For 220 kV V Bus Bar, Coupler:
BB protection system (trip - fail),for each zone.

VT's circuit failure for each zone (BB 1 & BB2).
Over cunent (trip, fail).
B.F. (trip, fail).
IS's / ES's motor (close - open) running time exceeded.
SF6 GAS pressure drop 1st stage (alann).
SF6 GAS pressure drop 2nd stage (block).
A.C supply fails.
220 V DC supply !fails.
220 V DC supply 2fails.
MCBstrip.
5 Spare.
7.4 Transmission of alarms and indications:
The Transmission of alarms and indications will be through SCS

gateways enabling the following signals to be transmitted to the
specified control centers (as minimum).
7.4.1 For 220 kV line feeders:
Alarm indications for:
Main protection relays (trip).

Main protection relays (fail).
Breaker failure protection trip.
SF6 GAS pressure drop 2nd stage (Blocked).
Status indications for:
Circuit breakers.
Bus bar disconnectors & earth switches.
Line disconnectors & earth switches.
Local/ Remote control selector switch in service.
Measuring for:
Bidirectional MW, MVAR & Three phase Currents.
7.4.2 For 220 kV bus coupler:
Alarm indications for:
B.B. protection (trip, fail, blocked).

BF (trip, fail, blocked).
O/C protection (fail - trip).
Circuit breakers.
Bus bar disconnectors.
Bus bar earthing switches.
Local / Remote control in service.

Volume 2 : Technical Specifications Rev. (0)
6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22122 kV GIS S/St
lV[easuring for:
Bus Bar three phase voltages & three phase Currents for couplers and ties.
7.4.3 For each transformer
Alarm indications for each main protective relav:

Differential protection (trip-fail).
BF (trip, fail).
Built-in 220 kV Directional over current protection (trip).
Built-in 220 kV Directional Earth Fault protection (trip).
220 kV Restricted earth fault protection (trip).
22 kV Restricted earth fault protection (trip).
220 kV (22kV) neutral stand by earth fault current relay ( trip).
Built -in Over fluxing (trip - alarm).
Buchholz protection. (alarm - trip).
Winding temperature 2 nd stage (trip).
Oil & temperature 2nd stage (trip).
nd
SF6 GAS pressure drop 2 stage (block).
Oil level (alann).
Pressure relief (trip).
Transformer F/F (trip, fail).
22 kV directional O/C & E/F (trip, fail).
Circuit breakers.
Tr. disconnectors & earth switches.
Local / Remote control in service.
Measurinl:! for:
MW & MVAR, P .F & There phase Currents.

Winding & Oil temperature & Tap. Changer position indicators.
7.4.4 For common signaling alarm panel:
Alarm indication for:

AC supply to 48 V DC battery chargers fails.
220 V DC supply system fails (DCl, DC2).
Station battery No. 1 earth leakage.
Station battery No. 2 earth leakage.
48 V DC battery voltage low.
Telecommunications PABX fail.
Fiber optic ... major alann, minor alarm, major minor alarm.
61h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/St
MUX equipment fails.

For each link (PLC equipment Rx alarm, PLC equipment Tx alann,
Telepo1iation send, Telep01iation received, Teleportation signal
blocked).
BCU fail.
Spare for 5 future alarms.
7.5 Interlocking svstem:

• Interlocking system shall be designed according to site arrangement
According to IEC standards; interlocking system shall be designed for all
line bays, bus coupler, bus bars, transfonners and extension feeders.
• The BCU should include interlocking logic control for its relevant bay
and also horizontal interlocking with other BCUs.
7. 6 Test Facilitv:
• For all current and voltage secondary circuits, test facility (block, switch)
should be installed between the terminal blocks and the devices.
• Test blocks should include the facility of automatically short circuiting
the current circuits and open circuiting the voltage circuits for
maintenance and testing purposes.
• The principle should be applied for all CT's and VT's secondary cores, to
allow field and routine testing of measuring, metering and protection
devices (in other words, for control and protection panels).
• Test facility should be provided for all panels as specified and also for all
relays as specified in addition to a test plug.
• It should prevent tripping, signaling to remote control panels, and other
equipment in case of selecting the test mode, however, care should be
taken to prevent initiation of breaker failure. in addition, if real fault
condition do exist during the testing, the relay should carry out the
tripping function as normal. All accessories, connectors (up to the te~i;in~~-.
equipment), etc shall be considered as a part of the test facility
(block/switch).
fi
7.7 Svnchronizing: r'\ •.
1
• A synchronizing facilities on the 220kV circuit breaker S~f!li be
provided. ,,
The system provided is to be such that the synchronizing circuit musf·be ··
established before the circuit breaker can be closed.
Synchronizing check relays shall be suitable for the use with a future
remote supervisory control scheme, without further rnodification.
• A synchrocheck relay and a programmed synchrocheck built in function
L in BCU should be provided in the control panel with a key selector
switch to all feeders and capable of operation in all cases (life / life- life /
dead - dead/ life - dead/ dead - by passed).

'
L Volume 2: Technical Specifications Rev. (0)
6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS S/St
The system provided shall be subject to approval of the EETC Dedicated

Check synchronizing relays to prevent circuit-breaker closing under
adverse conditions are to be included.
Check synchronizing relays where specified, shall check the phase and
magnitude and slip frequency and voltage difference across the open
circuit breaker with contacts connected to prevent inadvertent manual
closing outside acceptable limits.
A guard feature shall be provided to monitor the contacts of the check

synchronizing relay to ensure these are not welded together or otherwise
permanently closed. Should this condition be detected, a..TJd closing of the
circuit breaker shall be prevented.
Means shall be provided to by-pass these when switching dead
equipment or lines, together with a warning lamp indicating that the
relays are out of circuit.
7.8 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS:

• All measurements data should be available on the SCS LAN and
obtained from CT measuring cores.
• Digital Measuring Instrnments shall be supplied from the S/S D.C system
& provided for each bay with accuracy class± 0.5 and should measure as
minimum the following:
220 bus bars coupler bavs:
For each bus bar: All phases and line voltages. - The cmrent of each
phase for bus coupler & Bus Tie.
Main power transformers bav:
For Primary side:
The current for each phase.

P.F.
L MW&MVAR
Winding temperature indicator.
Oil temperature indicator
Tap changer position indicators.
For Secondarv side
The current for each phase - All phases and line voltages.

New Urban Communities Amhority (NUCAJ Chapter 7-A
6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/22122 kV G 1S S/St
For 220 line feeder bav:
The current for each phase

MW & MVAR (Bidirectional).
All phases and line voltages.
For 22 kV incoming feeder:
The current for each phase - All phases and line voltages
For 22 kV outgoing feeder bay:
The current for each phase.

IvIW &MVAR.
For 22 kV Bus bar and Tie:

All phases and line voltages for Bus Bar.
.The current for each phase for Bus Tie.
Auxiliary transformer
The current for each phase
KW&kVAR
7.9 lVIETERING:
General
• Separate metering panel should be installed for 220 kV switchgear.
• All meters should be numerical mciroprocesser based with load profile
type for both direction of power flow.
• Accuracy class for WH meters is± 0.2 & VARH meter is± 0.5.
• All the following readings should be available on the SCS working
station via LAN and obtained from CT measuring cores.
The following meters should be provided to measure as minimum the

following values:
For each 220 kV cable feeders:
MVARH for both directions of power flow.
MWH with maximum demand for both directions of power flow.
For power transformer (for 22 kV side):
MVARH.
MWH with maximum demand.
For 22 kV outgoing & capacitor bank (if anv) feeders:

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/21 122 kV GlS S/St
MVARB meter.
MWH meter with maximum demand
For Auxiliarv transformer:
KV.A.RH.
KWH.
7.10 PROTECTION SYSTEM:
7.10.1 General:
* According to dual concept & redundancy , all protective relays should
be separated into two groups, each is being operated from separate, D.C
supplies, C.T core, VT, MCB ....... etc
* The bidder should offer Numerical microprocessor based digital
protective relays, designed to isolate all system's fault with the required
reliability, selectivity, sensitivity (according to C.T ratio) and in the
minimum possible time, avoiding false operation.
* The offer shall include "whether mentioned in this specification or not"

all necessary elements to ensure c01rect functioning of BCU &
protective relays and coordination with the remote end substation.
* Any relay or feeder manager which has no reference in EETC for three
years should be tested in the central protection sector in addition of four
year guarantee should be provided.
* All relays will be evaluated according to their perfonnance in EETC

network.
/'1'- ·The Contractor shall supply the necessary soft &hard documents,
,/_: · drawings, catalogs, wiring diagrams, burden calculations of current and
I
; •- voltage transfonners, to guarantee the c01rect functioning of the
\ / protection equipment without any danger of thermal deterioration in the
,. . relays.
V
\ •.
·· ••._ * - .Each protective relay should have a self diagnosis function (False
-------· operation should be prevented in case of internal failure occurrences)
with facility to monitor all external supplies and abnormal levels of DC
voltage, in addition to a built in test facility.
* The ma,-ximum interrupting current of 220 kV circuit breaker should be

used to detennine the stability requirements of the 220 kV bus-bar
protections.

6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/St
* The protective relay should be modular type mounted in 19" racks,

designed to prevent CT's open secondary circuit and VT's sh01i
secondary circuit , in case of being removed.
:;:
All protective relays should have sufficient programmable LEDs to
indicate that the relay has operated (or even staii to operate) and steps of
operation of each phase, in addition to tripping and supervision
indications.
* The protective relay shall continuously supervise cmTent and voltage

transformer's secondary circuits ~y means of audible / visual alarms and
it should also test cmTent and voltage transformers perfonnance and
connections during its operation.
,. All relays should not be affected by mechanical shocks.
* All protective relays should not be affected by haimonic interference,

conductive, electrostatic & electromagnetic influences and transients of
the neighboring circuits (control, CT's and VT's circuit, DC
circuit. .. etc). The bidder should provide infom1ation to describe how
these effects are minimized.
* All relays tenninations shall not be of sliding contact (socket & plug-in
types) and should not be affected by any transient over-voltage
occurrence in case of switching of the secondary AC and DC circuits.
* According to IEC standards, relays should be subjected to routine ;esc·-~-
before being installed in its panel, in addition type test ce1i~ftcates
should be submitted. 1
i
·
r
* BCD include internal (SOE) storage of 1000 events .
* All records from BCD & protective relay should be COI'v1TRAD f~iiiia..l_ __
* All protective relays should be synchronized through the GPS receiver

of the SIS.
* All relays should not be affected by any over-voltage occurrence in case

of switching of the secondary AC and DC circuits.
* All relays shall have sufficient number of auxiliai-y contacts required for
control, monitoring, c01m11unication, alann and tripping functions and to
make and break the flowing currents.
* Each protective relay should include fault aJ1d event recorders functions
keeping at least 3 records that could be stored, retrieved and ai1alyzed
later.
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company (EPS) ExhibitD Page J6/29
New Urban Communities Authonty (NUCA) Chapter 7-A
6'"October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/St
* For all protective relays ,I/P and 0/P data should be seen through LCDs
to. give information about (setting, measurements, faults, Ia, Ib, Ic, Io,
va,b,c, Vo tripping date & time ... etc), and also through external laptop
provided by the contractor according to specs over (RS232 &
RS485,RJ45,USB,network cables ... etc).
* Each function of a multi function relay should have a separate indication

on its LEDs, in addition to annunciation panel.
* Original sofuvares and firmware for all relays plug connections to PC

. laptop protection settings and test plugs should be provided by the
contractor
* All relays should be able to communicate with BCU and SCS using
latest IEC 61850 standard international protocol directly without
protocol converter
* The trip command of all- protective relays should be given to both trip
coils of C.B.
* All tripping and signaling contacts should withstand continuously its

tripping cun-ent (3A minimum) and should be accessible for cleaning
and replacement with the following specification:
a) Voltage across open contact ::::_ 250 V
b) Current carrying capacity (1 sec) ::::_ 10 A
* All protective relays should have its own Ethernet interface (port), this
interface shall be used for both monitoring & control.
* All relays should be tested in the central protection sector and evaluated
according to their perfonnance in EETC networks.
* For relays which have modifications in the (design, software,
function ... etc),will be evaluated as new relays.
* The relays of no reference in EETC network for 3years should have four
(4) years warranty instead of two (2).
7.10.2 Technical specification data for relavs:

Rated frequency 50Hz
Rated voltage (AC) 100 V
Rated cu1Tent IA
CmTent ca1Tying capacity for 1 sec ::::,40 In
Continuous cun-ent withstand ::::,2 In
Accuracy <+ 0.5%
Operation ambient temp -5 up to55° C
Supply voltage DC (auto range) °
110/220 ± 20 /0
Humidity 90% at 40° C
6 1h October Eastern Extensions '220/22/22 kV GlS S/St
7.10.3 220 kV (U.G.C) feeder protection:
The 220kV cable feeders protection shall comprise two (2) Main line
differential current Relays specified as follows:
A- 220 kV (U.G.C) and short O.H.T.L Current

Differential relavs specifications:
The relay should be microprocessor based high speed line
differential current protection including built-in distance relay as
follows:
The line differential current relav:

• It shall be numerical current differential relays of scheme comparing the
currents entering and leaving the protected under ground cable with cable
capacitive cmTent compensation and high sensitivity for internal faults at
the same time as it has excellent stability for external faults.
• Fiber optical cables shall be provided for communications and the
differential scheme shall be exactly matching (in the hardware, sofuvare
and finnware).
<> The relay shall belock tripping in case of system power swing detection.
•The line differential relay shall have a built-in distance relay as follows:
l. Full scheme distance relays
2. Having 3 forward zones and one backward zone (at least) for covering
all kinds of faults, the setting of each zone shali not depend on any
other zone. _---
3. Having measuring elements for each kind of faults with under ./"',
impedance and over cmTent stm1ing element. / ,.
4. The characteristic of the measuring element for earth faults shafl \Je
quadrilateral while that for inter phase faults shall be quadrila(e!al,
circular or mho shape. \ :'..
5. Accurate at high and low source impedance. '
6. VT&CT transients shall not affect accuracy of measurements.
7. Able to detect ground faults with tower footing of high resistance
min (30 ohm).
8. Suitable for overhead transmission lines and under ground cables.
9. Having a voltage memory with duration not less than 5 cycles.
10. The relay's directionality could be changed easily under any load
conditions even with high loading 0:'. 20 % In) disturbing CT & VT and
relay whing.
11. Having 14 LEDs (as minimum) sufficient for signaling of each phase
and steps of operation.
Electrical PO\ver Systems Engineering Company (EPS) Exhibit D Page 18/29
6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GJS S/St
12. Basic time of operation should not exceed 30 msec for any source
impedance ratio.
13. If the distance between the C.B & the CT is a dead zone, this area
should be protected.
14. Perform correctly even if the flow current is 20% of the rated
current.
15. Number of input and output contact shall not be less than 12
each.
16. Minimum reach impedance is 0.1 ohm for lA.
17. The relays shall have correct performance (instantaneous
tripping) during close up faults.
The following functions should be provided as minimum in the relav:

0 A close onto fault :function, which must initiate instantaneous tripping
during closing on any fault at any location along the protected circuit.
0 Line-check function when dead line is energized.
0 Mutual zero sequence compensation.
0 Block tripping in case of loosing the measured potential due to tripping
ofMCB/ Fuse that protects the VT with an indication given to indicate-··--'c:~
/ _,,
>·" 0
',,
MCB/ fuse failure . . f ·

0 Load compensation or Load encroachment. 1
0 Power Suring blocking . ;
0 Suitable for single and three phase tripping !. 1/
\ i
\ ,;:
\·
B- 220 kV (O.H. 1:L) feeder as (Main2)Distance •
relav specifications: ¾,
A Distance relay shall be suitable for pennissive over reach transfer trip,
pennissive under reach transfer trip, directional comparison block and
directional comparison unblock schemes etc. including auto reclosure
built -in :function.
• The Distance Relav shall fulfill the following:

1. Full scheme distance relays augmented by a separate directional each
fault relays operating in a pennissive over-reaching section via fiber
optic connection system.
2. Having 4 forward zones and one backward zone (at least) for covering
all kinds of faults, the setting of each zone shall not depend on any
other zone.
3. Having measuring elements for each kind of faults with under
impedance and over cmrent starting element.
4. The characteristic of the measuring element for earth faults shall be
Quadrilateral while that for inter phase faults shall be quadrilateral,
circular or mho shape.
5. Accurate at high and low source impedance.
6. VT&CT transients shall not affect accuracy of measurements.
7. Able to detect ground faults with tower footing of high resistance min
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G1S S/St
(30 ohm).
8. Suitable for overhead transmission lines and nnder ground cables.
9. Having a voltage memory with duration not less than 5 cycles.
10. The relay's directionality could be changed easily under load
conditions without disturbing CT & VT and relay wiring
11. Having 14 LEDs minimum sufficient for signaling of each phase and
steps of operation.
12. Con-ect perfo1m,mce (instantaneous tripping) during close faults
13. Basic time of operation of the relay shall not exceed 30 msec.
14. The distance between the C.B & the CT should be protected.
15. Perfonn co1Tectly even if the flowing cu1Tent is 20% of the rated
CUlTent.
16. The relay shall have a minimum of 12 number of DI & 12 number of
DO.
17. Minimum relay's in1pedance is 0.1 ohm for lA.
18. The following features should be included as minimum:

- A switch onto fault function shall be included in the relay, which
must initiate instantaneous tripping during closing on any fault at
any location along the protected circuit.
- Synchro-check function when dead line is energized.
- Power swing blocking.
- iviutual zero sequence compensation (could be activated or not).
- Block tripping in case of loosing the measured potential due to
tripping of MCB/ Fuse that protects the VT with an indication
given to indicate MCB fuse failure
- Load compensation or Load encroachment.
Suitable for single and 3 phase tripping.
- Instantaneous tripping in case of outgoing points faults and the line
isolator is opened.
18.1 Auto-Reclosing shall fulfill the following requirements:

o The Auto reclosure for 220 kV shall be included in both main! &
main2 as a built-in functions (necessary connection between main 1 &
main 2 auto reclosures to obtain good performance in-case of their
operation simultaneously and also in case of one of them is out of
service).
o The Autoreclosure for each (220 kV) line feeders shall fulfill the
following features:
- A single and three phase reclosure of single shot.
- Closing time shall be adjustable (0.00-20sec.) step 0.1 sec.
- Claim time shall be adjustable (0.00-200sec.) step 1 sec.
Output indication for its operation on control board.
- Single-phase reclosure and three-phase reclosure are to
give signals on the control board

- Autoreclosure shall be blocked in the following cases:

a)220 kV bus bar faults and/or power cables feeders faults.
b)Manual switching of circuit breaker.
c)Breaker failure protection tripping.
d)Tripping of breaker on back up protection stages, i.e zone
(2), (3) tripping or any time delayed tripping.
e) High resistance fault detected by supplementary ground
fault protection
" Both of the main 1 and main 2 shall comprise also the followings built -
in functions:-
i. Back up protection:
• Directional and non directional earth fault protection with. separate
indication
• Three-phase Directional & non-directional over cun-ent with multi
characteristics according to !EC 60255 :
-Ty1Je of protection Cun-ent range Time range

tc:arth fault (0.2-0.8) In step 0.05 (0.l-5)sec step 0.01sec.
3 phase over cmTent (0.5-3) In step 0.05 (0.1-5) sec step 0.01 sec.
ii Fault recorder:
• Shall have at least EIGHT (8) analogue channels for ( Va, Vb, Ve, 3Vo,
Ia, Ib, Ic, 3Io) ....
• Total recording time (pre-fault, fault, and post fault) is not less t h g ~
sec,
• Shall have Digital Channels covering at least the following events:/
. I
Startmg i
Faulty phase \
Main &Back up protection '
CB trip
• Shall have circular non volatile memory keeping four faults at least, shall
have the ability to keep all the records (digital & analog) in the memory
if the power supply is disconnected
iii. Fault locater:

• Shall be able to display the location of the fault in Km or percentage of
line length.
iv. Event recorder:

• Shall at least record the following events:
General starting (including that from other relays contacts).
Tripping & closing c01mnands, DC supply status, c01mnunication
611' October Eastern Extensions 220122122 kV GIS S/St
channels (send, receive), CB status, operation of other relays.

Faults (faulty phase).
Ail events shall be recorded with time tagging.
7.10.4 125 MVA Power Transformer Protection:
1. A Biased transformer Differential protection relays of Numerical relay
type specified as follows:
The Relay should be designed for protecting three-winding power

transfonners including the Zig-zag & neutral earthing resistor in the
differential zone relay against all types of fault (winding short-circuit,
internal fault, earth fault etc).
The relay should be stable, to prevent unwanted operations at faults
outside the protected zone and transformer imush cmTents.
Second harmonic restraint to prevent false operation during transformer
energization (inrush current restraint).or any other method.
Fifth harmonic restraint to prevent false operation during transformer
over-excitation. ·
The percentage restraint shall be adjustable over a range ( 20 % - 50 % )
of rated current
Relay's operating time shall not exceed 25m sec. - Test facilities shall
include measuring of restraint and differential currents for each phase.
-····
The numerical relay should have the following features as min. ·
a- Over current and earth fault protection on the H.V side.

b- Restricted earth fault (100% of the windings).
c- Disturbance recorder (oscillography)
d- Event recorder.
2- Separate High impedance Restricted Earth Fault current protection:
The relay should protect 100% of each 220 kV and 22 kV zig-zag

earthing transfonner windings and incoming zones against the ground
faults.
3- Separate neutral stand bv Earth fault current protection:
Separate relay connected with the CT core of each 220 kV and 22 kV

neutral earthing transformers.
4- Separate Back-up o/c & E/F current relays for H.V side
5- Mechanical protection of transformer and tap-changer:-
Gas protection: Buchholz relay sensitive for all types of faults shall be
6'" October Eastern Extensions 220 122/22 kV G IS S/St
Provided having tvvo steps one for alarm & the other for tripping both
Breakers high & low voltage sides.
Protection against excessive heating of core, oil & windings.
The -transfonner shall be equipped with detectors with contacts to sound
an alarm excessive temperature (stage 1) ,& to give a tripping order
(stage 2).
125 MVA transformer shall be equipped with an On-Line early fault
monitoring device of gas analyzing transfening data and signals to SCS
& conventional control systems for operation engineer actions.
Protection against low oil level to give an alarm when the oil level drops
below permissible limits.
Protection against over pressure inside the tank.
Tap changer protection by oil flow relay.
Automatic voltage regulator (AVR).
Any other function if needed.
7.10.5 220 kV Bus-Coupler Protection
Protection of the 220kV Bus Tie & bus - couplers should be 3-phase
over current and eaiih fault relay with time delay element and with multi
characteristics definite inverse ... etc( according to the latest edition to IEC
60255)
-Type of protection Cunent rai1ge Time range

earth fault (0.2.-0.8) In step 0.05 (< 0.1-S)sec step 0.01
sec.
3 phase over cunent (0.5-3) In step 0.05 ( < 0.1-5) sec step 0.01.
7.10.6 220 kV Bus Bar Protection:
The Bus bar Protection relay should include the following features:
Low impeda11ce numerical differential relay.
Shall be suitable for the required 220kV Switchgear arra11gements
covering future bays.
Shall trip& lockout each of the CB's connected to the respective BB a11d
initiate their BF relay. Shall have 5-zones, one check zone & and 4-
di?crirninating zones, tripping of any BB section shall occur only, when
both check and discriminating zones of the said BB are operated.
During shifting of a11y feeder from one B.B to a11other, the protection
should not be blocked and the C.T cunent shall be switched via latched
type replica relay and fed from the same auxiliary switch that operate
the isolators.
The protection shall be stable during CT saturation and external fault
conditions (no false operation).
6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/22122 kV GJS S/St
Shall cover the future extension bays.

The protection should not be sensitive to the effect of high frequency
components of switching surges.
The operating time including trip output relays shall not be greater than
25 milliseconds.
The protection shall trip both sides of transformer in case of failure of its
HV side CB operation.
Trip all breakers connected to associated bus inc. bus coupler.
Indications shall be provided to indicate faulty phase.
The scheme of protection shall include continuous monitoring of CB &
IS position and cun-ent circuits to sound an alann in case of open and/or
short of the current secondary circuit and to block the tripping signal in
case of false operation.
Prevent automatic reclosure operation of bus breakers.
The Busbar protection should be sufficient for the future CBs.
• Additional relay contacts shall be provided and wired to terminal
blocks. These additional contacts are required for:
• Initiation of breaker failure protection.
• Event recorder, fault recorder initiation & transfer tripping to i ; e ~
7
stations. ,>
• Annunciation to Signaling panel for (trip, fault) alarms.
• Blocking of associated CB automatic reclosure scheme.
\ ;,~
· The dead zones between the C.B and the CT should be protected\;,'.:.., .. _
A blocking facilities for B.B.P System to be provided. ·-s;~:::..'.
The relay should have suitable event and oscillographic disturbance sec
for the last four faults at least.
Selector zone switch to isolate the bus bar tripping circuit during bus bar
life testing.
7.10.7 Breaker failure Functions (Built-in 220 kV B.B.P):
The breaker failure relay shall be initiated by all protective relaying

system of220kV and mechanical protection oftransfonner.
The relay can withstand 40 times its rated cun-ent for I second.
The breaker failure relay shall contain a minimum of three phase cun-ent
detectors i.e. one per phase, the setting range from 0.2 to 1.5 normal
CUlTent.
The breaker failure relay shall be designed for proper operation during
three-pole tripping of the breaker.
The breaker failure protection relay must include 2 operational stages
Stage I: an instantaneous re-trip command, which re-trips the failed
breaker with time range (0----400 msec,< 10 steps},
Stage 2: Tripping command to all other breakers connected to the same
bus bar, with time range (0----800 msec< 10 steps).
The timer shall be started by tripping order of circuit protection and if
6th October Eastern Extensions 220122/12 kV GIS S/St
the three measuring elements do not reset after a preset time higher than
the tripping time of CB the relay shall transmit tripping signal to all CBs
connected to the same bus bar to which the faulty CB is connected.
In case of pressure drop in SF6 gas and/or the tvvo trip circuits fail of a
circuit breaker, when receiving a trip order, the breaker is blocked and
hence the breaker failure protection should initiates stage 2 without any
delay.
Trip both sides of transformer.
Additional Relay's contact should be wired through terminal block to
give annunciation alarm
Trip both local breaker and transfer trip to all breakers at tlie remote
tenninals of the transmission lines necc:s~ary to electrically clear the
faulty feeder with the defective breaker.
Prevent automatic reclosing of all local breakers that were tripped to
clear the defective breakers
The current measuring element shall have very short pick up & reset
time .the timer shall have high accuracy & very sh01i over shoot time.
A blocking facilities for B.B.P System to be provided.
Selector zone switch to isolate the breaker failure tripping circuit during
breaker failure life testing.
7.10.8 Tripping Relavs:
Tripping relays should be of electrically and manually reset type and

designed to operate from
60% to 120% of the DC supply rated voltage.
7.10.9 Lockout, Relav,
All tripping orders given to C.B should be through a lockout rel~-~

(automatic/manually/electrically) reset type but for transfonber CB
should be of (manual/electrical) reset type. /·,
I
7.10.10 Trip circuit supervision relays: '\: _
□ Supervision relays for all tripping circuits should be provided. \< .
□ In case of tripping circuit failure the following signals to be provided."·· • .______ .
a) Indicating lamp located on associated relay.
b) Visible and audible alarm announciator located on the remote control
panel.
□ In case of the both two tripping circuits failure the following functions to be
provided:
a) Block the circuit breaker closing.
b) Accelerate the breaker failure protection to stage 2 tripping.
7.10.11 22kV Protection Svstem,
A) 22 kV Incoming feeders protection
6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G!S S/St
a- Directional and non directional Eaiih fault relay ,the range of current setting
(0.2--0.5) of rated current and time setting (0.3-0.5) seconds included in the
BCU in the relevant bay.
b- Directional and non directional three phase over cmTent with time lag
element, and with multi characteristics (definite, inverse ... etc), the range of
current setting (0.5-2) of rated current and capacitor ba.'1k time setting (0.3-
0.5) seconds and instai1tai1eous element (high set) included in the BCU in the
relevant bay.
BJ 22 kV Outgoing and Capacitor bank Feeders Protection:

a- Three-µhase non- directional over cun-ent with time delay element ai1d with
multi characteristics (definite, inverse ... etc) included in the BCU in the
relevant bay.
b- Directional earth fault current protection relay with suitable ranges and
characteristics (definite, inverse ... etc).
C- Capacitor bank control unit should be connected to the operator workstation
via LAN.
C) 22 kV Bus bar Loss of voltage protection

Under voltages relays for each bus -section (under-voltage relay is energized
due to loss of voltage on a- certain bus, the bus tie connect it to ai10ther bus)
included in the BCU in the relevant bay.
D) 22 kV Bus -Ties Protection

- Three-phase non- directional over cunent with time delay element ai1d with
multi characteristics (define, inverse ... etc).
E) 22/0.4 kV Aux. Transformer Protection:
- Three-phase over cun-ent and earth fault protection with time delay eleme:n{
-~~----
•
and with multi c/cs (definite, inverse ... etc) included in the BCU iri the
relevant bay. {,;
?f f
•
- 0.4 kV Earth fault protection with suitable ranges and characteristics. '\ · :•
F) Under freguencv load shedding: •¥"',,
Under frequency load shedding relay shall auto blocked by built in

under voltage of adjustable setting monitoring function and shall
energized on each individual section of the 22 kV busbars.
The under frequency load shedding relay shall be numerical type. It

shall have 6 stages. It shall have three mode of operation for under
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company (EPS) Exhibit D Page26/29
61;1 October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GJS S:St
frequency time delay (F+t) scheme, time delayed rate of change of

frequency load shedding scheme (df/dt + t) and time delayed frequency
supervised rate of change of frequency load shedding scheme (df/dt + f
+ t). Programming of settings and PSL scheme shall be possible using
front panel interface local and remote communication ports.
Each load shedding scheme for each section of bus bar shall have under
frequency relays. Each relay shall have a minimum of six independent
frequency settings, such that the scheme has a minimum of 6 under
frequency stages.
The frequency settings shall be adjustable in steps of 0.1 Hz or less, over

system frequency limits. The frequency elements shall respond to an
under frequency condition in less than 5 cycles. Accuracy of detection
shall be better than± 0.05 Hz. The relay outputs shall be time delayed.
The time delay settings shall be adjustable between 0 and 10s in 0.ls
steps.
Ail outgoing feeders shall have a selector switch to select the frequency
stage at which the feeder is desired to trip. The selector switch should
have 7 positions - 6 frequency stages and one the OFF condition.
The under frequency load shedding relay shall be Auto belocked by

built-in an under voltage of adjustable settings monitoring functions and
shall energize separate trip relays which are independent from the feeder
protection trip circuits. Diodes shall not be used in trip circuits.
All necessary equipments, bus wiring, cross trip relays, etc., shall be
provided and overall scheme is subject to the approval of the EETC.
7.11. Laptop Specifications:
Portable laptop with all accessories and connections should be provided

including suitable software to allow the users to apply different functions
required by the relays and metering system with the following specification as
minimum Laptop
Core I7 with 4 GB Ram, HD graphics (1GB) screen card, 500 GB Hard disk
and serial ports
The laptop technical data should be provided in the bid offer

6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/22122 kV GJS S:St
7.12. SP ARE PARTS: ( According to the list of owner recommended

spare oarts ).
1- One of each relay & BCU offered type .

2- 20% of spare-terminal used in the offered panel.
~
.)- One of each type of metering instrument.
4- One of each type of measuring. Instrument.
5- 100% of signal lamps.
7.12 Submittals:
Soft & hard copies of all Detailed d;-awings, calculations, test
procedures, test reports, and literature are pe1iaining to specified items.
The submittals shall include but not limited to the following:
a) With Tender:
1) Manufacturer's Catalogues for all proposed equipment,
2) S.L.D. indicating (detailed) control, measuring, metering,
protection and other provisions specified in this sections,
3) Alarm system and boards,
4) Data for A. 0 and D. 0 panels.
5) Front view drawings with dimensions for ail panels (control,
metering, protection) and their layout drawing.
6) Reference list, data related to fault rate of protective and co11tp'lf
devices and type test repo1is.
7) List of DI &DO for each BCU protective relay.
b) At the Design and Erection Stages:
1) C.T calculation to be supplied before C.T design. --.-·~

2) Schematic diagrams for all control, measuring, metering,
protection... etc.
3) Wiring diagrams and tennination's schedules.
4) Setting calculations and tabulations for all relays.
5) Test procedures & test repo1is.
6) Operation & maintenance manual.
7) Spare paiis lists with catalogues part numbers suitable for
ordering.
8) The contractor should provide, internal layout drawings for the
control room to suit all equipments (control, measuring, metering
and protection pai1els, A.C &D.C boards, interface panel, etc)
with accessibility and ventilation betv;een panels, to be approved
byEETC.
9) All signals should be shown on the drawings.
~ ~

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/'J.2/22 kV GIS S/St
10) Alarm signaling list for all the S/St to be provided for EETC
approval.
11) updated single line diagrams.
c) As built drawings
All the above items in b.
7.16. Inspection Test:
General:
All inaterial furnished and all work performed under this
specification shall be inspected and tested.
i
L
Deliverables shall not be shipped until all required inspections and
tests have been completed, and deficiencies have been co1Tected to
comply with this specification and approved for shipment by the
owner.·
The contractor shall submit to the owner the test procedure and test
plan for review and approval at least two months before start of
factory acceptance tests and site commissioning tests.
Tests:
The scope of work shall include extensive testing of the entire
proposed system and all of the equipment, both as independent
pieces of equipment (Protection Relays, SOE, and FR) and as an
integrated system into Panels. The contractor shall be responsible for
demonstrating the required reliability, maintainability, functionality
and inter-operability of all of the system and equipment it provides.
Routine testing at each stage of manufacturing and assembly of each
equipment.
Type Tests: (type test ce1iificate and type test rep01is should be
t
submitted for all supplied equipment). Equipment references shall be
L submitted showing at least 2 years of field proven of each.
Factory Acceptance Tests: the Sequentional of event recorder and
fault Recorder must be subjected to factory acceptance tests in the
presence of the EETC representatives.
Field Installation test: a sufficient testing shall be performed to
determine that no problems have occu1Ted during the shipment. If
any equipment has been damaged or does not comply with the
specification. The contractor shall provide, install and replace the
L defected parts at its own cost and expense.
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company (EPS) ExhibitD Page29/29

New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 7-B
6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22i22 kV GlS S/S
CHAPTER SEVEN-B
SUBSTATION CONTROL SYSTEM (SCS)
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 1/l 8

Volume2: Technical Specification Rev. (0)
th
6 October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G1S S/S
CHAPTER SEVEN-B
SUBSTATION CONTROL SYSTE1i1

(SCS)
Item Description Page
1. General 3
2. Bay Level Requirements 4

,,.J. Station Level Requirements 5
4. Functional Requirements 8
5. System Support Functions 12
6. Configuration Tools 14
7. Testing 15
8. Guarantee 16
9. Training 17
10. Uninterruptable Power Supply 17
lL Submittal 17

6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G1S SIS
CHAPTER SEVEN-B
SUBSTATION CONTROL SYSTE!\1 (SCS)
1. General:
• This part of the specification covers trammg, guaranty and the
technical requirements for design, engineering, deliver, installation,
testing and commissioning of all necessary equipment for Substation
Automation System. ·
• The Automation System shall be connected with the protection
system in such a way to have a fully Automation System.
o The Substation Automation System shall monitor and control the
entire substation and shall be based on IEC 61850 standard protocol.
• The automation system shail be suitable for the complete substation
and any future extensions.
• The automation system shall be based on a decentralized architecture
and on the concept of bay-oriented, distributed control constituted by
intelligent electronics devices (IEDs ), connected by a LAN.
• All IEDs (i.e. relays, feeder manager and BCUs) shall have dual
optic fiber ports and shall be connected to the LAN directly without
any intermediate converters or adapters.
• The maintenance, the modification or extension of the components
shall not cause the collapse of a part or the whole automation system.
o The devices and functions of a substation automation system shall be
installed and allocated on two different levels; bay level and station
level.
..,---•--.The flow of information between the bay level (BCU & relays) and
./·. . .;fue'st.ation level shall be carried out by means of Ethernet network.
1
1 • A los~1 of power may not cause the loss of confignration data. After
/ restoration of power the svstem shall automatically start up again.
(.
F " • Cohtra&tor shall submit, the SCS system finnware and the SCS
1
V ,. , , ?-PPlfc,_cltions finnware.
'{... • Ali"Software provided for the automation svstem shall be licensed to
,._~.:..,·the Employer for an unlimited time period.,
• The offered automation system shall support remote control and
monitoring from control centre via gateways.
• At station level, the entire station shall be controlled and supervised
from the operator HMI. It shall also be possible to control and
monitor the bay from the bay level equipment.
• All computers and communication equipment of the automation
system shall be substation grade and shall be compliant with IEC-
61850-3 and IEEE 1613 environmental conditions.
• Bidder may suggest (submit as an optional offer) any other special
features based on his research, development work and experience
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 3/J 8
Vo1ume2: Technical Specification Rev. (0)
61h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS SIS
that may be of significant benefit to the overall perfonnance of the

substation. Suggestions will be subject to EETC approval in case of
Contract.
• The system offered will be evaluated according to their performance
in EETC network
2. Bav Level Requirements
• The bay level shall include the following:
" Remote control panels: including one bay control unit (BCU) per
220 kV bay and mimic diagram with conventional control facilities.
• Metering panel: including smaii energy meters as specified.
• For MV switchgear, combined control/protection unit for each bay
having dual optic fiber ports and compatible with IEC 61850
standai·d protocol.
• One (or more) bay control unit shall also be provided to cater for the
miscellaneous and co1mnon signals and alarms not related to the
switchgear equipment. The contractor may install this BCU in the
coupler remote control panel together with the coupler BCU.
" BCU shall provide all bay level functions regarding control and
monitoring.
., BCU shall be equipped with analogue and digital input ai1d output
cards for monitoring purposes, and digital output cards for
commands.
· • BCU shall be directly connected to the switchgear without any need
for additional interposition.
• BCU shall have display unit with sufficient resolution to display the
single line diagram, the associated alai·m ai1d measurements, make
control and local events.
• Each bay control unit shall be independent from each other and its
/,...-- ····>.. functioning shall not be affected by any fault occurring in any of the
· ·· · · o)l1er bay control units of the station.
/ • The BCU shall provide the following features, as minimum:
(\\. o <Dperation of switchgeai· equipment.
. o _.:Accesses to the transfonner tap changer and cooling fan control
· ' ... etc
o Status indication of switchgear equipment, measuring values,
oil/winding temperature, tap position, fan control (manual-
automatic), tap changer (manual - automatic) and AVR
(ON/OFF) ... etc.
o Initiating alai111s in case of failure through a watchdog function.
o Supervising the operation of breakers through Synchrocheck
function.
o Interlocking logic for relevant bay and horizontal interlocking
with other BCUs.
o Preventing simultaneous actuation of operating devices.

Volume2: Tec!mical Specification Rev. (0)
6'hOctober Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS SIS
o Automatic supervision of power supplies & position indications

of breakers and switches.
o Time stamp all events using true GPS clock signal.
o Phase discrepancy monitoring of the breakers.
o Operation counter for each circuit breaker trip/closing operation
together with tripping opening currents to allow proper
management maintenance.
o Sequence of event storage (1000 events at least).
o Operations counter for each circuit breaker closing/opening.
o Monitoring the operating time of motor driven switches.
o Phase discrepancy monitoring of the breakers.
o Test switch for commissioning & testing of all functions in the
device.
o Synchro-check function.
o Local/Remote selection switch should be provided to isolate
remote operating_facilities when BCU control is selected.
o In the event of power supply failure, the bay controller shall
retain all parameter settings & events recorder and functions by
mean of non-volatile memory.
o Dedicated bay control units shall be provided for substati01i
common signals not relating to switchgear equipment.
6 Intelligent metering system for energy (bidirectional MWH and
M\T_A.RH) shall be provided and connected to the LAN of the
SCS. All meters sl:iall have load profile function, reading freeze,
and shall be able to store measured and calculated values.
3. Station Level Requirements

o Station level equipment, to be installed 111 the control room,
comprising the following:
3.1 Redunant LAN

e A station LAN with Ethernet based on IEEE 802.3 and OSI TCP/IP
shall be used to interconnect the equipment at the station level.
j Necessary industrial type managed switches shall be provided to
L inter connect the BCUs, protection relays and other IEDs to the
station servers.
• LAN could be star or ring configuration or combined.
• Necessary industrial managed switches shall be provided to connect
the IEDs to the station servers.
• Switches shall meet requirements of IEC 61850 to allow
interoperability.
• Switches shall support substation hardened power supply with fail
safe contact.
• LAN speed should be 100 Mb/s at least for primary and redundant
LAN.

New Urban Co:.nmunities Authority (NUCA) Chapter i-B
6 th October Eastern Extensions 2'20/22/22 kV GIS S!S
e The SCS system software should be identified.

• Redundant managed switches should be used to manage the data in
the redundant LAN (Star topology).
" KEMA certificate test 61850 as managed switch should be provided.
3.2 Redundant Station Controllers (station server) (installed in the control

L room):
.. Station Controllers shall be of a modem industrial type computer,
and shall have the supervisory and control function, the substation
database and the application programs.
• Shall have the latest platfonn available.
o Statio,i ·controllers shall work in hot-hot configuration; one
automatically replaces the other in case of failure.
• Each Station Controller shall have the capacity to configure the
whole substation equipment.
e Each of the two redundant Station Controllers shall be accessed
through redundant LAN.
" The station controller shall fulfill the following minimum
requirements:
o Two independent non mechanical solid state drives (SSD).
o RA.ID 1 option for SSD with capacity 1 Tera for each hard disk.
o Latest multi-core processors (> 2.6 GHz).
o 8 GB RAM minimum.
o DVD.
o Type test according to IEC 61850-3.
o 5 USB 2.0 ports.
o Redundant power supply.
o Up to 6 Ethernet po1is.
o Option for 8 serial connections (RS232/RS485).
o Option for Fiber Optic connection.
3.3 Operation Workstation

• Two workstations shall be provided for the operators. It shall be
equipped with four 24 inch LED monitors.
" The workstation shall be dedicated computer cmmnunicating via
LAN with the station servers, running HMI software package which
shall contain supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA)
functions, under Windows professional operating system and
connected to both LAN.
• The HMI shall display switchgear status by a customized overview
and by detailed single line diagrams which represent status,
measured values, and transfonner tap position.
" Workstations desk should have enough space to accommodate 2
telephones, files.

Volume2: Technical Specification Rev. (OJ
Nmv Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 7-B
6111 October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS S;S
3.4 Engineering \Vorkstation

" One additional workstation is needed for the system engineering. It
shall be responsible for system configuration and editing,
modification of the IEDs settings, displays generation and
modification, and for the display of the disturbance recordings,
editing and modifying database.
o The engineering work station shall be similar to operator work
stations but equipped with one 24 inch LED.
3.5 Redundant
Gateways
" The station logic should be functional over the substation controller
gateway in order to keep the station functioning even if all the station
computers are malfunction
" Control centers shall be capable of monitoring the (switchgear
status,. measurements, metering. event list, alarm list, fault record,
etc) even if all the station computers are malfunction.
o Redundant gateways equipped with all necessary hardware and
software shall be provided in order to pennit the control and
monitoring of the substation from control centers, and each one shall
have two ports to communicate with each of the control centers.
• Shall guarantee no loss of events in case of gateway switchover.
o Redundant gateway should be equipped with an embedded industrial
grade operation system dedicated machine.
• The gateways shall support the following c01mnunicatiol},prot<rcols:
o IEC 60870-5-101. ' . .
o IEC 60870-5-104.
o IEC 60870-5- 103.
o IEC61850.
/l
o DNP3. \
o MODBUS.
o Any other protocol used in NECC & RCC ·for the
communication with the gateway.
3.6 GPS receiver

• A global positioning system (GPS) receiver shall be provided for the
synchronization of the entire system devices.
• The accuracy of the synchronization in the system shall be better
than 1 msec.
3. 7 Printers
• High-speed color laser printer shall be provided for reports printing.
" Can be accessed by any of the workstations.
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 7/J 8

New llrban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 7-B
e A printout of each display shall be possible on the hard copy printer.
4. Functional Requirements:
4.1 User access levels:

• To minimize the risk, which might be caused by unauthorized
access, the system must be password protected. Different groups of
users with different authorities shall be definable. e.g. for monitoring
only, for monitoring and control, for configuration, or for
superv1s10n.
• The access rights shall be defined by passwords assigned during the
log-in procedure. Only the system administr::,o: shall be able to
add/remove users and change access rights.
4.2 Control hierarchy

• The high-voltage equipment within the substation shall be operated
from different places, selector switches should be provided to allow
the following operation hierarchy:
o Local control panel.
o Remote control panel comprising the following control
facilities:-
o Conventional control facilities,
o Bay control unit (BCU).
o Operation workstation (HMI).
o Remote control centers (RCC & NECC via soft switch).
• The medium-voltage equipment within the substation shall be

operated from different places: One selector switch should be
provided and installed on the (22) kV cubicle with Local/Remote to
allow the control for (22) kV cubicle or HMI.
o M.V switchgear.
o Feeder manager device.
o Operation workstation (HMI).
• Operation shall be only possible from one control level at a time. The
priority shall always be on the lowest enabled control level.
• It shall be possible to open the selected Circuit Breaker with a push
button in case of emergency.
• The operation level having cmrently the proper authority to control
the switchgear in addition the transformer facilities such as (tap
changer and cooling fans, .. etc.) shall be indicated at the HMI screen
and the control centre. A change in control authority shall be logged
in the event list.
4.3 Monitoring of Switching Devices Status

6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/22122 kV GJS S/S
c The positions of circuit breakers, isolators, earthing switches,

transformer facilities such as (tap position, fan control
(manual/automatic), tap changer (manual/automatic) and AVR
(ON/OFF) ..... etc) shall be supervised continuously, and displayed
in the single line diagram on the station HMI.
o Every detected change of position shall be recorded in the event list.
" Alarms shall be initiated in the case of spontaneous position changes.
4.4 Measuring and Metering Values Monitoring

• The actual and calculated measured values of voltage (kV), cm,ent
(Amp), active power (IvfW), reactive power (MVAR), apparent
power (.['vJV/,), Tap changer position, MWH, MVARH ... etc.
• All measured and calculated values (MW, MVAR, MVA, Amp, P.F,
Hz, Tap changer position, MWH, MVARH .. etc) shall be displayed
on the single line diagram.
4.5 Control of Switching Devices

• In order to ensure a high degree of security against undesired
operation, a "select before execute" command procedure shall be
provided in the BCU & in the working station.
/ ~ -.. ·No more than one command shall be executed at the same time.
• After con:i.mand execution the operator shall receive a confinnation
/ that th::: new switching position has been reached or that the
\ switching procedure was unsuccessful with the indication of the
\ 1
reason for non-functioning.
\ ',,
___ • A new command may not be released before the previous one has
•. been executed or cancelled.
''--~~-"
4.6 Interlocking
• A comprehensive interlocking system shall be provided.
• The interlocking scheme shall be implemented locally in the IEDs,
and also centrally in the station controller.
• Station wide interlocking shall be done using IEC 61850
mechanisms between the IEDs.
• The station wide interlocking shall also be available when the station
computer fails.
4.7 Automatic Switching Sequences

• The available automatic sequences in the system should be listed and
described, (e.g. sequences related to the bus transfer).
• It shall be possible to initiate pre-defined automatic sequences by the
operator and also define new automatic sequences.
4.8 Alarm Management
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 9/JS

Volume2: Technical Specification Rev. (Oj
" Faults and errors occurring in the substation shall be listed in an

alarm list and shall be immediately transmitted to the control centre.
• The alarms shall be blinking until their acknowledgment. During this
phase the system shall produce a sound alarm, turned off with the
acknowledgment.
" Alarms are generated either by the switchgear, by the IED, or by the
station level unit.
.. They shall be recorded in a separate list and appear on the screen.
<> The alarms shall be time tagged.
• The alarms shall be grouped in categories of priorities associated to a
colour; groups and colours can be customized. Filters for selection of
a ce1iain type or group of alarms shall be available.
• The list of signal shall be defined during the project and shall be
agreed ,vith the Employer.
.. Conununication faults, en-ors in network shall be listed in separate
alarm list.
,. Alarm lists should have ability to insert a comment by the operator.
4.9 Event Recording and Management

· " The event recording shall be can-ied out by acquiring the infonnation
from tl1e field through the IED which will communicate with the
server of the substation.
" The event list shall contain events that are important for the control
and monitoring of the substation.
Events are generated either by the switchgear by the IED, or by the
\st:,ti(m level unit. They shall be recorded in a separate list and appear
on the screen.
• The events shall be time-tagged.
· • )fhe operator shall be able to call up the chronological event list on
/ the monitor at any time for the whole substation or sections of it.
• The list of signal shall be defined during the project and shall be
agreed with the Employer.
4.10 Disturbance Recording

• The disturbance recording shall be can-ied out by acqmnng the
information from the field through the !ED which will communicate
with the server of the Substation Automation System.
• The list of signal which will constitute the disturbance information
shall be defined during the project and shall be agreed with the
Employer.
• It will allow to the identification of the type and intensity of
disturbance and to the monitoring of protection.
• The ability to edit the list of signals according to substation needs in
the future by the operator shall be provided.

6'" October Eastern faJensions 220/22/22 kV GlS SIS
4.11 Fault Recording and Fault Location

• The workstation shall have a user friendly tool for the analysis of
fault records.
" The localization of fauits shall be caiTied out acquiring the
inforn1ation from the field through the IED which will communicate
to the server of the substation.
• It shall allow the identification of the type of fault and its distance
from the substation.
4.12 Reporting
• The system shall support creating and printing user-defined reports.
" The layout shall be user defined; a print preview shall ease the
design. Printing of predefined reports can be initiated by events, time
schedules or by the operator.
4.13 Trend Display

• It shall be possible to illustrate all types of process data as trends ~
input and output data, binary and analogue data.
• The trends shall be displayed in graphical fonn as column or curve
diagrams. Adjustable time span and scaling ranges must be provided.
4.14 Archiving of Data

• The memory management shall be configurable by the operator to.
modify the time period for recording. Software tools shall be
available to export data from the database to a mass memory to keep
a copy of all historical data.
• The HMI is to store historical data continuously with a time interval
user-definable in the database. The archived data shall cover
measured and metered values.
" The management and the size for the database shall be configurable
by the operator. ,,,--·--··.
• It should have the ability to make daily backup from the sy9te111 and
its database. In case of emergency failure to ease restoring 1datausing
External storage media. .!
" Archiving disturbance history for query purposes. \1
\ ,,
\
4.15 Time Synchronization ·•,,
• Time synchronization shall be performed via master clock ,vhich-
shall be connected to the station bus (NTP/SNTP).
• The station controller shall be synchronized by direct GPS
connection.

New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chapte, 7-B
" The time stamp shall be transfen-ed through the system as an integral
part of the event information.
" Upon failure of GPS receiver in the time synchronization system, the
GPS receiver shall transmit an alarm to both the HMI and SCADA.
4.16 System Engineering
" The engineering workstation shall be used for the following
pnrposes:
o System configuration.
o System testing.
o Help functions.
o Downloading and nploading of applications.
o System :;ommissioning.
o Database management.
• It shall be possible to access all IEDs for reading the parameters
(settings) from the engineering workstation.
4.17 Process Visualization (HMI)

• HMI shall have graphic displays for the entire switchgear bays as
well as for each individual bay forming the interface between the
operator and the automation system.
o Topological colouring shall be supported.
<> HM1 shall have graphic displays for th.e trending of analogue
parameters of the switchgear bays.
• A graphical representation of the secondary equipment and its status
shall be provided .
., The overview diagram shall show the switching status of the whole
switchgear in a simplified version. In overview diagrams, no control
or acknowledgments hall be caiTied out.
., The detailed diagrams shall show all relevant information of the
feeders of one voltage level. In the detailed diagrams, the measured
and calculated-values to be displayed.
" Display the sequence of event list, and the alarm list and enable
acknowledgement and clearance.
" Display curves, either real time or based on archived. /=T:---:--
.. Shall be configured as per IEC 61850 via a standard SCD fil~/. J/ ·•
• · Tagging facility should be implemented to perform the /olf~w,ing
tasks [pennit to work, control inhibit, remove from opefatkJn and
block and substitute measures). I; ·
\f
5. Svstem Support Functions ·•,<
\,''
"~...__,_~-
5.1. Diagnosi~
• To increase the reliability and the availability of the equipment and
to reduce their maintenance, the system shall be provided with self
supervision and auto diagnostic facilities.
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 12/J 8
6'h0ctober Eastern Extensions 120111122 kV GJS S/S
• The runtime diagnostics should be capable of detecting and alarming

any failures and deficiencies as they occur in any parts of control
system during service.
5.2 Interoperability
• The system shall support interoperability between the IEDs from
different suppliers. By supporting the following:
o The devices shall be connectable to the common protocol.
o The devices shall understand the infonnation provided by
other devices.
o The devices shall perfotm together a c01mnon or joint
function if applicable.
5.3 Expendabilit-y
• The Supplied hardware and software shall have adequate hard disk
and memory capacities to satisfy their requirements, (i.e. the
operating system, applications, data ... etc).
• There shall be enough spare capacity left in the system as extension
capacity for future use.
• Hardware, Software systems and the data bases shall be sized to
accommodate the cunent size and 50% spare for future extensions
(25% of which shall be equipped spare).
Q Each bidder shall state the ma.ximum expendability of the offered
system which shall be easy expandable to its maximum extent,
adding new software function or hardware equipment or adding
complete bay (even from third party) shall be possible through a well
defined procedures for which EETC trainees shall be trained.
5.4 Availability and Reliability.

.. The Substation Automation System shall have a total availability of
99.98% (i.e. the ratio of total time duration minus the actual outage
duration to total time dut'ation).
• The system must provide a high MTBF (mean time between failure)
and a low MTIR (mean time to repair) rate.
• The availability calculations should be included of all subsystems in
well documented and clearly described fom1.
• To provide highest reliability, HMI and the gateways shall work
completely independent meaning retrieving the process data <_!irecfly
from the bay level devices. Additionally the gateways /shall be
configured fully redundant to ensure full functionality. /
I
5.5 Security
I
• System shall provide the following security features:
o Malware protection
o Patch management
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 13/i8

o Security architecture
o Security manual
o Encryption
• Any Input/output peripherals activities shall be recorded m non
editable text file.
5.6 Performance parameters

" The following parameters should be tested during the FAT & SAT of
the SCS:
" Retrieval of status or measurement to the HMI or gateway shall be
less than 2 seconds for 220 kV part and less than 3 seconds for (22)
kV part.
• Control command shall be executed within 1 s from the HMI or
gateway to the process for 220 kV part and less than 1.5 s for the 11
(22) kV part.
• LAN redundancy latency shall be less than (1 ms).
" Measurement accuracy for 220 & 66 kV shall be 0.25% for RMS
th
current and voltage values (including up to 10 harmonic) and more
than 0.5% for active and reactive powers.
" For (22) kV feeders the accuracy of RMS current shall be more than
1 %.
• Sequence of events should have one millisecond (1 ms) resolution.
(At least 200 events during one week during communication failure).
,. Loss of BCU power shouldn't result in the loss of stored events.
• In case of sudden change in equipment status, system should provide
scan by exception.
6. Configuration Tools
• The configuration of the station shall be made using the operation
and engineering workstation in the Windows 7 environment as
minimum. The various functionalities shall be customized by easy-
to-use interactive configuration tools. The configuration shall include
the visual presentation of the object, adaptations needed in the
process database, and adaptations of the communication
configuration data.
,. A portable Personal Computer (PC) as a service unit shall be
provided for on-site modifications of the control devices. This
service unit shall be used for testing and commissioning. /----~----
" The PC- based service & engineering workstation system/s~all be >;\
used for the following purposes: '
o System configuration. / · ·\
o System testing. \ ./
]
o Help functions. \\ '

o Program documentation.
o System commissioning. ·····--·--___:.?·

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/12i21 kV GIS S/S
o Data base management.

o Changing peripheral parameters.
7. Testing_;_
,. The Contractor shall submit test ce1iificates required to demonstrate
that the equipment to be supplied under this specification meets the
electrical and mechanical duties required herein and by the
referenced codes and standards. The contactor shall submit test
procedures before testing to be reviewed/ approved.
• Contractor shall submit a complete test ce1iificate for the same
offered type of equipment in addition to the ce1iificate of automation
system cor11pliance with IEC 61850 protocol.
• - All data obtained from receiving, storage, maintenance, and testing
of the equipment sha!l be recorded and submitted to the Employer.
• Test repmis shall include the following:
o Summary of the test.
o Date that testing was perfonned.
o Test proc_edure followed by reference number.
o Description and identification of the equipment tested.
o Test equipment used and due date of next calibration.
o Test results.
o Conclusions.
• Contractor shall perform the following tests and allow the authorized
representatives of Employer to witness them.
• Actual End to End test shall be done between substation field and
control centre (JIECC & CRCC).
• FAT:
o Factory acceptance testing is a complete test of an integrated
system at the Contractor facility with functions, database, HMI,
displays and logs.
o IEC 61850 communication conformance and interoperability
shall be met. The Contractor shall comply fully with the logical
nodes described in the standard for the devices where they are
required.
• The manufacturer shall submit the test procedures and test forms for
factory acceptance test which will be perfonned for the Substation
Automation System components, and approved by the EETC prior to
the stait.
" The manufacturer shall be able to show the test plan and rest result
executed on the system architecture similar to the one in the project.

Volurne2: Technical Specification Rev. (0)
• The equipment shall be subjected to Contractor's routine shop tests in

compliance with requirements of applicable codes and standards and
specified additional tests.
a In addition, performance and functional tests for the supplied
equipment shall be conducted on a system basis to demonstrate that
all functions are available & performance is guaranteed.
• Contractor shall notify Employer at least 60 days in advance of such
tests, trials, and assembly, giving the date and place where such tests
will be made, to permit Employer to be present to witness the factory
tests. Contractor shall furnish Employer with certified copies of test
reports.
• SAT:
o A site acceptance test is run to verify that the system will operate
properly in the field with real devices connected to other
equipment.
o The Contractor shall demonstrate their availability guaranteed by
conducting the availability test (for 720 hours) on the total
substation automation system after c01mnissioning, test records
shall be examined to detennine the conformance with availability.
criterion.
o In case of any outage during the availability test, the Contractor
shall rectify the problem and after rectification, the test period
start after such rectification. If test object has not been met, the
test shall continue until the specified availability is achieved.
· o After the satisfactory conclusion of test, both Contractor and
Employer shall mutually agree to the test results before the test is
considered to be completed successfully .
.o After that the system shall be taken over by the Employer and
then the guaranty period shall start.
o The purpose of the Site Acceptance Test of the system shall be
the inspection of the general operation of the SCS following its
site c01mnissioning.
o Tests and inspection shall be provided in accordance with the test
documents submitted by supplier and approved by the user.
o The employer and EETC representatives shall witness all SAT
tests.
8. Guarantee:
• During guaranty period, the Contractor shall take continual actions to
ensure the guaranteed availability and shall make available all the
necessary resources such as specialist personnel, spare parts, tools,
test devices etc. for replacement or repair of all defective parts and
shall have prime responsibility for keeping the system operational.

61hOctober Eastern Extensions 220122/22 kV GIS S/S
9. Training:
.. As per Chapter (1) - Volume 2, part I.
10. Uninterruptable Power Supplv:

., The SCS shall be powered from the UPS system. However, Bay
Control Units shall be supplied from the substation 220 V DC
system.
• UPS system shall be sized with enough capacity to supply the loads
+ 25% spare for future loads.
• The UPS should be designed & synchronized to the main frequency
so that an automatic change over doesn't cause an inte1TUpti0n to the
load. Once normal supply is resumed a static by pass switch shall
change over to previous position. For maintenance reasons a manual
switch shall be capable of changing over the load without
interruption of supply. Preferably all equipments should be supplied
directly from 220 V DC Station supply.
11. Submittal
" Soft and hard copies of all detailed drawings, calculations, tesf
procedures, test reports and literature are pertaining to specified
items. The submittals shall include but not limited to the following:
o ·with Tender:
= Reference list, data related to the offered devices and type test
reports.
• Brief description of the systems to give full infonnation about
the offered systems.
• Manufacturer's catalogues for each component.
• Others which are required by tender document.
• SCADA system schematic diagram.
• DI & DO for each BCU.
o At the design and erection stages (for approved by Employer

/EETC):
• Clear procedure describing how to add an IED in future.
• Complete documentation of implemented protocols.
• Functional Design Document.
• Guaranteed availability.
• MTBF and MTTR figures for all equipment
• I/O Signal lists.
• LAN Configuration and Ethernet Switch interconnection
details.
• Lists of specified equipment manufacturer's recommended
spare parts.

• Lists of all equipment manufacturer's recommended special

tools, test equipment, and software required for efficient
operation.
• Listing of routine tests.
• Logic Diagram (hardware & software).
• Panels layout drawing.
• Power Input Distribution drawings for all equipment.
• Hardware Specification.
• Product l\1anuals.
• Schematic diagrams.
• System Architecture Drawing.
• Test Specification for Factory Acceptan~e Test.
• The operation and maintenance manual.
• Other documents as may be required during detailed
engineering.
o Prior to final acceptance, Contractor shall submit the following

documentation, as a minimum:
• All "As-Built" documentation for the system.
• Copies of all Commissioning Test data.
• Copies of final SCD (Substation Configuration Description)
and CID (Configured IED Description) files.
• Copies of the final SCI, (Substation Configuration language)
files for all IED's installed (in accordance with IEC 61850
fonnat).
• Copies of other final configuration data (such as relays / IED
settings, .. etc)
• Operator's / Operations Manuals for all equipment.
o Three sets of hard copy and four sets of CD ROM containing all
the as built documents/drawings should be provide
Electrical Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page I 8/18

New Urban Communities (NUC)
.---
CHAPTER EIGHT
TELECOMMUNICATION & SCADA SYSTEMS
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Page 1/47 CHAPTER (8)

Volume 2: Technical specifications Rev. (0)
6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS S/S
CHAPTER EIGHT
TELECOMMUNICATION & SCADA SYSTEMS

TABLE of CONTENTS
Clause Description Page
8.1 General
8.2 Objective & Requirements
8.3 Interconnections 4
8.4 Scope of supply 8

th
A) Scope of supply at 6 October Eastern Extensions
8
220/22/22 kV
B) Scope of supply at Remote Sites
I 11
8.5 Scope of Work 12
8.6 Technical specifications and requirements 16
8.7 Test equipment and tools 40
8.8 Spare Parts 40
8.9 Documentations 41
8.10 Factory Acceptance Tests 41
8.11 Type Tests 42

8.12 Training 42
8.13 Applied Standards 42
8.14 Submittals 43
8.15 Telecornm1mications Schematic 47
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Page 2/47 CHAPTER(8)

6'h October Eastern Extensions 220122/22 kV GJS SIS
CHAPTER EIGHT
TELECOI\1MUNICATION & SCADA SYSTEMS
8.1. General: .
EETC plans to establish communication subsystem as described here to

connect the new substation "6tl1 October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22
kV S/S" with NECC (National Energy Control Center) and CRCC
(Cairo Regional control center) teleco1mnunication networks.
8.2. Objective & Requirements:
The objective of that chapter includes but not limited to the design,
engineering manufacturing, factory testing, transpmiation to site,
installation, testing and commissioning, training, wananty, assistance
during wananty period and insurance till provisional acceptance of the
following (on turnkey basis) for 6th October Eastern Extensions 220 kV
and the remote S/Ss:
l. SDH fiber optic terminal equipment operating in (1 +1) protection
equipped with El(s) & optical line interface(s) and primary
multiplexers for 6th October Eastern Extensions 220 kV S/S. Its type
should be fully compatible with the existing OLTE type ABB [FOX
660 + FOX 515] located at each of the three remote S/Ss [El Gamma!
220 kV S/S, 6th October 220/66/22 kV & October (2) P.PJ.
The supplied SDH at 6th October Eastern Extensions will be
· supplied with Three (3) SFP modules [The first SFP module to
communicate with the existing SDH at El Gamma! 220 kV S/S &
the Second SPF to communicate with the existing SDH located at
6th October 220 kV S/S and the third SFP to communicate with the
existing SDH at October (2) P.PJ.
2. (Three) New Digital teleprotection equipment associated with (PO)

system [to work with the existing (PO) equipment type (FOX) from
ABB] to be supplied and installed in 6th October Eastern Extensions
220 kV in directions of El Gaimnal 220 kV, 6th October 220 kV &
October (2) P.P.
3. (Two) DPLC with multiplexer & associated Teleprotection tone

equipment to be supplied and installed at 6th October Eastern
Extensions 220 kV S/S in directions of El Gaimnal 220 kV S/S & 6th
October 220 kV S/S (as specified).
4. Co-axial cables & LMUs for the new supplied DPLC at 6th October
Eastern Extensions 220 kV S/S & remote sites [El Gainmal &
October (2) P.PJ.

6rn October Eastern Extensions 2'20i2?/22 kV GIS S/S
5. IP (P ABX) with laptop which can interface with NECC ex1stmg

telephone system and telephone sets to be supplied & installed at 6th
October Eastern Extensions.
Note: Remote subscribers from the existing NECC's PABX's at each
of El Gamma! 220 kV, 6th October 220 & October (2) P.P will
also serve 6th October Eastern Extensions 220 kV S/S, also
th
remote subscribers from the new supplied P ABX of 6
October Eastern Extensions will serve the three a/111 remote
substations.
6. Seven telephone sets [(5) desktop type + (2) IP phones to interface

with the J\J"ECC existing telephone system to be supplied & installed
at 6th October Eastern Extensions 220 kV S/S.
th
7. Three laptops with its original software will be supplied at 6 October
Eastern Extensions 220 kV S/S for testing and managing the DPLC,
FO & (IP P ABX) respectively.
8. Distribution frame (MDF/DDF) [stand alone (not wall mounted] with

separate cabinet necessaq for the termination and interface
th
connections of all telecommunication equipment for 6 October
Eastern Extensions 220 kV S/S (as specified) & each of El Gamma!
& 6th October 220 kV S/S remote substations.
9. 48 V DC system which includes two batteq chargers and one station

batteq bank (40 cells) & (-48V) positive grounded Nickel Cadmium
batteq with its associated batteq racks as specified for feeding all
Telecommunication equipment under that chapter to be supplied and
th
~-~··~ ... 111,ca11cou at 6 October Eastern Extension S/S.
N.B:
• The Fiber Optic Cables and its accessories needed for
the a/m optical systems shall be supplied by others.
• The outdoor coupling equipment (CCVT, WT) are

supplied and installed under this project (Chapter 5).
8.3. Interconnections:
8.3.1. For the 6th October Eastern Extensions 220 kV / El Gamma! 220
kV Link & 6th October Eastern Extensions 220 kV / 6th October
220 kV Link:
a. Redundant paths of voice & data (if available) have been taken into
account using both DPLC and Fiber Optic systems to interconnect 6th
October Eastern Extensions 220/22 kV S/S with the remote end

substations which shall result in redundant data channel paths with

NECC & CRCC telecommunication networks as well.
b. 220 kV Teleprotection signals shall be transfen-ed through two

different medias for safety of the links (using the DPLC & the fiber
optic systems) such that:
o Main (1) and breaker failure trip orders shall be transferred through
the fiber optic system.
o :Main (2) and other back up protection trip orders shall be transferred
through the supplied DPLC system.
8.3.2. For the 6th October Eastern Extensions 220 kV / October (2) P.P
Route:
Only Fiber Optic media will be used for serving the voice, data:..8,c
Teleprotection signals. The Fiber Optic route contains tw,9"'~iediO
cables [one Fiber Optic per each circuit]. f,
(A) Data Routes: \•
,1
\, '>'
Interconnection with NECC & CRCC: \',\},c, ._
Two different gateways (or equivalent devices will be used for tffr!'l.s-±:totring
data from/to both NECC and CRCC.
The ports shall be connected as follows:
1. ForNECC:
One (1) port from one of the gateways (the main gateway) shall be
connected to one RS232 data channel of the new supplied FO (equipment)
in direction of El Gamma! 220 kV S/S, and one port of the redundant
gateway will be connected to one RS232 data channel of the supplied
DPLC equipment in direction of 6th October 220 kV S/S.
2. For CRCC:
The remaining two ports: The second port of the main gateway, shall be
connected to one RS232 data channel of the F.O equipment in direction of
6th October 220 kV & the second port of the redundant gateway will be
connected to one RS232 data channel of the supplied DPLC equipment in
direction of El Gamma! 220 kV S.S.
The Contractor responsibility for data route connections shall be:
• In 6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22 kV S/S:

Connecting the gateway ports (main and redundant) to the new supplied
FO & DPLC cham1els through the supplied MDF/DDF(s) (as specified).

6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/2~ kV GIS SJS
e In remote stations (6 th October 220 kV. El Gamma! 220 kV S/Ss):

Terminating the F.O and DPLC data channels of 6th October Eastern
Extensions 220 kV in direction of NECC & CRCC on the new &
existing MDF/DDF(s) in coordination with EETC.
(B) PABX Interconnection:
6th October Eastern Extensions 220 kV shall be com1ected to the existing

PABXs at remote stations [El Gaimnal, 6th October 220 kV S/S &
Octobmer (2) P.P] via the specified [4W'E&M] trunks over the supplied
DPLC & (FO) equipment channels.
(C) Remote Subscribers:
a. Remote subscriber links shall be established to interconnect each of El

Gaimnal 220 kV S/S, 6th October 220 kV S/S & October (2) P.P to
NECC telephone system via the new supplied IP [PABX] of 6th October
Eastern E:x_rtensions through the FO and new DPLC cha1111els.
o Two (2) remote subscribers for El Gammal 220 kV S/S through new;
existing F.O & new DPLC channels respectively.
o Two (2) remote subscribers for 6th October 220 kV S/S through new,
existing FO & new DPLC channels.
o Two (2) from romte subscribers for October (2) P.P through new &
existing FO channels.
b. Remote subscribers from the existing NECC's PABX's at each of El

Gmmnal 220 kV, 6th October 220 & October (2) P.P will also serve 6th
October Eastern Extensions 220 kV S/S.
• It's the Contractor's responsibility to do any nesessary ··

modifications to achieve the voice calls through the existing,'PABX's
& equipment at El Gammal 220 kV, 6th October 220 kV & Octpber
(2)P.P. . { ! '
(D) Protection Scheme Arrangements:
1) 6th October Eastern Extensions

S/Ss:
- Main (1) and Breaker Failure (BF) trip orders shall be transfen-ed
through the new & existing fiber optic cha1111els.

61h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G1S S/S
- JV.lain (2) and the backup protection trip orders (as applicable) shall be
transfe1Ted through the new DPLC channels.
2) 6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22 kV - 6th October 220 kV

SIS:
lviain (I) and Breaker Failure (BF) protection shall be transfe1Ted

through the new & existing fiber optic channels.
- Iv.lain (2) and the backup protection (as applicable) shall be transfe1Ted
through the new DPLC channels.
3) 6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22 kV - October (2) F.P route:
-Main (1), lVlain (2) & BF for each circuit will be as follows:
a. Differential protection will transfer trip orders for Main (1) &
Breaker Failure for each circuit.
b. Distance protection will transfer trip orders for Main (2) for each
circuit.
Note: the differential protection for each underground route will operate
via the leased fiber optic buried cables [two (FO) cables for that
route].
(E) Channelization Scheme:
1. Channelization Scheme between 6th October Eastern Extensions

220/22 kV in directions of each of El Gammal 220 kV, 6th October
220 kV & October (2) P.P through the (FO) are as follows:
1.1. Northern extension - El GammaiC**l:
a. (6) Speech channels (4W-E&M).
b. (6) 0-19.2 kbps data channels (Digital 1/P), Asynchronous
(RS232/ V.24).
c. (4) Teleprotection commands (64 kbps, Digital l!Pfl. //
/~.
<,-t,""
d. (4) Two - wire exchange end at Northern extension (FXQ). ,
e. (4) Two - wire remote subscribers at El Gamma! S/S (FXS).
f. (4) El Electrical interface. I
i .
th
1.2. Northern extension - 6 October s1s<**l: \.">,
a. (6) Speech channels (4W-E&M). ''--. .... _~~.-,._.<"" ,
b. (6) 0-19.2 kbps data channels (Digital I/P), Asynchronous

(RS232/ V.24).
c. (4) Teleprotection commands (64 kbps, Digital IfPfl.
d. (4) Two - wire exchange end at Northern extension (FXO).
e. (4) Two - wire remote subscribers at El Gmm11al S/S (FXS).
f.( 4) El Electrical interface.
'
L Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Page 7147 CHAPTER (8)
1.3. Northern extension - 6th October (2) P.P:
a. (4) Speech channels (4\V-E&M) C")_

b. (4) 0-19.2 kbps data channels (Digital 1/P), Asynchronous
(RS232/ V.24).
c. (2) Two - wire exchange end at Northern extension (FXO).
d. (2) Two - wire remote subscribers at El Gamma! S/S (FXS).
e. (4) El Electrical interface.
2. Channelization Scheme between 6th October Eastern Extensions

220/22 kV in directions of each of El Gamma! 220 kV, 6th October
220 kV & October (2) P/S S/Ss through the (DPLC) are as follows:
a. (2) Speech channels (4W-E&M).

b. (1) Speech channels (2- FXS).
c. Data channeis (Digital I/P), Asynchronous (RS232N 0.24).
d. Teleprotection Commands ('l_
Note:
(*) Teleprotection Commands distributed in two cards.
(**) Types of E&M should be [type (1) & type (S)J.
8.4. SCOPE OF SUPPLY:

th
(A) Scope of Supnly at 6 October Eastern Extensions 220/22/2"2·~1rv•,,"",
y' ' ' '
S/S: /
/
P' // /
(A-1} Outdoor Equipment: [Under Section 4B] '
(A-1-1) Wave Trap: \:,>:,,:, '
a) Two (2) Wave Traps (in direction of El Gamma! 220 kV S/S) ;;;i;,o,,..>/
phase coupling) with all the necessary supported parts for pedestal
mounting (on CCVT's) as specified. The traps shall be equipped with
bird barrier and corona cups, and should have blocking resistance of
600ohm. Both the blocking B.W and frequency ranges will be defined
later.
b) Two (2) Wave Traps (in direction of 6th October 220 kV S/S) (phase to
phase coupling) with all the necessary supported parts for pedestal
mounting (on CCVT's) as specified. The traps shall be equipped with
bird barrier and corona cups, and should have blocking resistance of
600ohm. Both the blocking B.W and frequency ranges will be defined
later.

New Urban Com;nunities (NUC)
61h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS S/S
(A-1-2) Couplin:r Capacitive Volta:,:e Transformer:
a) Two (2) single phases CCVT's (in direction of El Gamma! 220 kV S/S) as
specified, included in the total supplied number for the substation, it
should include the earthing switch. It will work with the LMU as a high
pass filters. The CCVT shall be suitable for line trap mounting.
b) Two (2) single phases CCVT's (in direction of 6th October 220 kV S/S)
as specified, included in the total supplied number for the substation, it
should include the ea1ihing switch. It will work with the LMU (supplied
by others) as a high pass filters. The CCVT shall be suitable for line trap
mounting ..
Note: It is Contractor's responsibility to survey the remote ends to

identify the phase location (exact locations) on which the existing
WTS & CCVTS are installed.
(A-1-3) Two sets of line matching units [LMU)
Two sets each contains two units on the overhead transmission line
directed to El Gmmnal 220 kV & 6th October 220 kV S/Ss (single
Circuit lines each).
/'3--;~
The [Uv1.l.Js] shall operate with the CCVTs as high pass filt&s."The · .
LMUs shall meet IEC applicable standards and shall be su$.tib}t::(for
outdoor installation on the CCVTs pedestals. /{ ' f
(A-1-4) Coaxial cable (75 ohm)
For connecting the new DPLC equipment to the new LMU sets hl~th
•
October Eastern Extensions 220 kV S/S in directions of both El Gamma!
220 kV S/S & 6th October 220 kV S/S . The coaxial cable shall be
armored of direct buried type, together with all necessary signal cable to
connect the LMU unit to the associated CCVT.
The length of coaxial cable each direction is approximately 500 m

(for bid purpose).
An excess length of 5 meters of the coaxial cable should be left in a

shape of turns near the equipment in the communication room for
repair.
All miscellaneous (materials, ducting, accessories .. etc) needed

for proper installation is required.

(A-2) Indoor Equipment
1- DPLC equipment:
(1.1) For El Gammal 220 kV S/S & 6th October 220 kV S/S
Directions (single Circuit each):
Two (2) DPLC equipment with multiplexers [one in direction of

El Gammal 220 kV & the second in direction of 6th October 220
kV S/S] (as specified).
(1.2) Two (2) teleprotection tone equipments (if not integrated in

the DPLC). (one for each direction) Each equipment must
provide four independent "commands" to work with the
DPLC (as specified).
2- Fiber Optic Equipment:
One (1) new Optical Terminal Equipment (SDH & MUX) its type
. shall be compatible with the type of the existing (SDH & MUX)
types ABB [FOX 660 + FOX515] existing in El Gamma! 220 kV,
6th October 220 kV & October (2) P.P. It will be supplied and
equipped with two (2) pairs (Transmit/Receive) for each direction &
operating in (1 + 1) configuration distributed on at least two cards. The
supplied SDH & MUX shall be equipped with "2 x 20 El" working in
(1 + 1) configuration i.e. (20+20) for each direction as well as Two (2)
Ethernet cards & Three (3) SFP modules with its associated
connectors (for each direction) and also multiplexers (MUX) which is
equipped with number of channels as specified in the channelization
scheme.
- Three (3) digital teleprotection equipment (if not integrated with the
MUX) for the (6 th October Eastern Extensions 220 kV S/S / El
Gamma! 220 kV S/S) link, (6 th October Eastern Extensions 220 kV/
6th October 220 kV S/S) link & (6 th October Eastern Extensions 220
kV S/S / October (2) P.P.
- The supplied SDH & MUX shall be managed by the existing

management system type ABB located at remote sites.
3- IP PABX which can interface with the existing NECC telephone

system. The switch shall be equipped with (40) subscriber, (16)
trunk (4W E/M) & 10 El(s) & SIP. A laptop shall be provided
with the original software as specified.
4- Five (5) desktop telephone sets + two (2) IP phones sets to access
NECC existing PABXs (at remote sites) as specified.

61h October Eastern Extensions ,.,20/Yl/2'1 kV GIS S/S
5- One (1) JVIDF/DDF with cabinet for the termination of all SDH /
multiplexers & DPLC channels (not wall mounted) (as specified).
6- 48 V DC svstem:
For feeding the supplied DPLC, FO & IP PABX telec01mnunication

equipments, This system consists of one battery set (-48V positive
grounded) & 40 cells Nickel Cadmium type with racks, two (2)
battery chargers, four (4) bus breakers, one low voltage disconnect
device, AC and DC distribution panels as specified. NICAD battery
bank and associated AC and DC distribution panels (as specified).
The charger rating should not be less than 100 Amp. DC and the
battery capacity should not be less than 400 AH.
7- Stand alone Cabinets for housing each of the OLTE (SDH),

MUX, Digital teleprotection, DPLC, multiplexer, teleprotection,
IP P ABX and the MDF!DDF equipment.
8- All necessary cables, wires, installation materials and auxiliaries

required to complete the work. (all control and communication'
cables needed, shall be shielded as specified).
9- One set of spare parts as specified .
.--·-·~ 10- Test equipment & toois as specified.

Note:
• FO & DPLC will be installed in the comrnunication room.
• 48 V DC Batte1y shall be located in the battery room, while the

48 V DC chargers will be located in the chargers room.
Scope of Supplv at Remote Sites:
(B-1) At El Gammal 220 kV S/S & 6th October 220 S/S:
(B-1-1) Outdoor Equipment:

a. Two (2) sets ofline Matching Unit [LMU]. Each set contains two units for
phase to phase coupling for single circuit as follows:
• One for (El Gaimnal / 6th October Eastern Extensions) direction and
one for (6 th October.220 kV/ 6th October Eastern Extensions) direction.
• The LMUs shall operate with the CCVT's as high pass filters.
• The LMU's shall meet IEC applicable standards and shall be suitable
for outdoor installation on the CCVT pedestals.

b. Co-axial cables (75 Ohm) for connecting the supplied DPLC equipment to
the supplied LMU set in each remote site. The coaxial cable shall be
armoured of direct buried type, together with all necessary signal cable to
connect the LMU to the associated CCVT.
• All miscellaneous (materials, ducting, accessories .. etc) needed for
proper insta1lation is required.
• The length is approximately 500 111 for each direction (for tender
purpose).
" An excess length of 5 111 of the coaxial cable should be left in a shape
of turns near the equipment in the c01mnunication room for repair.
@-I-II) Indoor equipment:
1. Two (2) new supplied DPLC equipment with multiplexers. One at El

Gamma! in direction of 6th October Eastern Extensions 220 S/S and the
other at 6tl1 October 220 kV in direction of 6th October Eastern
Extensions (as specified).
2. Two (2) teleprotection tone equipment (if not integrated in the DPLC),
each equipment must provide four independent commands to work witn
the DPLC One at El Gaimnal in direction of 6th October Eastern
Extensions 220 S/S and other at 6th October 220 kV in direction of El
Masaead (as specified).
3. Two (2) MDF/DDF for the termination ofDPLC channels (one for each
remote site) as specified .
.~ 4 .. Stand alone cabinets for housing the supplied DPLC, MDF/DDF and the
// teleprotection equipment for both sites.
/
•t '
5. (2El\) cards to be suppiied and installed at the existing PABXs at each
site.!
- \. /'
\,:/'
<'" . 6i<:Ml necessai-y cables, wires, installation material and auxiliaries required
%--~~:_,,..P• to complete the work.
j
(B-2) At 6th October (2) P.P:
(2El) cards to be installed in the existing PABX at 6th October (2) PIS.
8.5. SCOPE OF VVORK:
The Contractor shall CaJT)' out ail necessary work in a turnkey basis to
cover the following scope of work, which will result in a full integral
system taking into consideration that the contractor shall submit to
EETC the system design document for review & approval before start of

Volume 2: Technical specificadons Rev. (0)
6 1h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS S/S
manufacturing. Also the contractor shall submit the Test procedure, Test
plan for review and approval at least two months before start of factory
acceptance tests and site commissioning tests.
(A) For 6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22 kV:
The contractor shall be responsible for:
i. Install, test and commission the supplied LMU sets in directions of

El Gamma.I 220 kV & 6tl1 October 220 kV S/Ss, making all
necessary connection from LMU's to the CCVT's.
2. Install, test and commission the supplied coaxial cable between the
supplied DPLC system (at the communication room) and the LMU
in directions of El Gamma! 220 kV & 6th October 220 kV.
3. Install, test & commission the supflied DPLC equipment in

directions of El Gaimnal 220 kV & 6t October 220 kV S/Ss, and
make all necessary wiring to the teleprotection tone equipment (if
not an integral part of the DPLC) and also wiring of its respective,
alarms to the common signaling unit in the control room and to the
common Bay Control Unit (BCU) supplied by the substation's
Contractor. The BCU shall transfer such alarms to l\TECC via
gateways. Additionally, the failure alarms of the DPLC channels
associated with teleprotection tone equipment shall be wired to the
relevant 220 kV S/S protection relays.
4. Wire the supplied DPLC data channels to the gateways through the
new supplied MDF/DDF to transfer data of 6th October Eastern
Extensions 220/22 kV S/S to NECC & CRCC SCADA systems.
5. Install test & commission the supplied Fiber Optic SDH & MUX's
in directions of El Gamma! 220 kV & 6th October 220 kV S/Ss and
make all necessary wiring including the connections to the patch
panels (patch panels & patch cords shall be supplied by others) and
to the supplied digital teleprotection equipments (if not integrated)
and also wiring of its respective alarms to the common signaling
m1it in the control room and to the common Bay Control Unit
(BCU) supplied. The BCU shall transfer such alarms to NECC via
gateways. Additionally, the failure alarms of the MUX chaimels
associated with digital teleprotection equipment shall be wired to
the relevant protection relays.
6. Install and test the supplied digital teleprotection equipments (if not
integrated in the MUX) and ma.lee all the necessary wiring to the
220 kV protection relays and to the dedicated multiplexer interfaces

New Urban Communities (NIJC)
61h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS SIS
and make all match and adaptation between the supplied

teleprotection equipment and the protection relays and also between
the teleprotection equipment and the fiber optic equipment and also
wiring of its respective alarms to the common signaling unit in the
control room and to the common Bay Control Unit (BCU).
7. Install and test the supplied iv!DF/DDF and make all the necessary
connections and wiring to all the telecommunication equipments
with all necessary cables, wires, breakers ... etc.
8. Install and test the new supplied [IP PABX] and telephone sets and
perfonn successfully the integrations and tests for the PABX with
NECC telephone networks. (locations of telephone sets shall be
defined later.
9. Wire the 4W E/M channels of the supplied DPLC equipment to the

trunk cards in the new supplied PABX thourgh the supplied
iv!DF/DDF (in directs of El Gamma! & 6th October 220 kV S/S).
10. Wire the DLPC & FO data channels to the gateways through the ·
data of 6th October Eastern Extensions to NECC & CRCC systems ·
(through El Gamma! & 6th October 220 kV as specified.
1 l. Wire exchange module (FXO) to the existing PABX to provide

remote subscriber service from El Gama! & 6th October 220 kV &
October (2) P .P existing P ABXs.
12. Wire the (El) circuits and 4W E/M channels of the SDH & MUX
equipment to the trunk · cards in the supplied PABX through
supplied iv!DF/DDF indirection of remote sites and make all
necessary configurations and interconnection related to (El) hunk
interfaces.
13. Wire the new 48VDC system to all supplied telecommunication

equipments with all necessary cables, wires, breakers, etc.
14. Perfonn successfully the end-to-end tests ai-id commissioning of all

supplied Telephony, data & teleprotection systems [for the FO,
digital PLC Systems] in co-ordination with the substation's
Contractor & NECC engmeers [i.e end to end tests from up to
NECC].
Note: Tests results for (FO) cables shall be given later by EETC.

Volume 2: Teclrnical specifications Rev. (0)
(B) At each of El Gamma! 220 kV & 6th October 220 kV S/Ss:
1. Install, test and commission the new supplied LMU sets and making
all necessary connections from LMU to the CCVT's and also lay the
new supplied co-axial cable in direction of 6th October Eastern
Extensions 220/22 kV S/S betlveen the supplied LMU and the
supplied DPLC in the communication room of each S/S [in direction
of 6th October Eastern Extensions S/S].
2. Install test & commission the new supplied Digital Teleprotection in

direction of 6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22 kV S/S and make
all necessary wiring of its respective alarms to the main
annunciation panel in the control room and to the existing RTU. The
RTU shall transfer such alarms to 1'1ECC. Additionally, the failure
alarms of the MUX channels associated with teleprotection
equipment shall be wired to the relevant protection relays.
3. Install, test & commission the new supplied DPLC and make all
necessary wiring to the teleprotection equipment (if not integreted)
and also wiring of its respecitve alarms to the common signaling'
unit in· the control room and to existing RTU. The failure alanns of
the DPLC channels associated with teleprotection equipment shall
be wired to the relevant protection relays.
4. Install and test the supplied IvIDF and DDF and make all the
necessary connections and wiring to all the existing & supplied
telecomunication equipment with all necessary cables, wires,
breakers, .... etc.
5. Wire the (2W) remote subscriber channels (at each of El Gamma!

220 kV, 6th October 220 kV S/Ss) to the remote subscriber telephone
sets through the existing MDF/DDF to interconnect these remote
S/Ss to 6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22 kV S/S new supplied
IP (PABX) ..
6. Install the (2El) cards in the existing PABX at each site.
7. Wire the existing 48 VDC to the supplied telecommunication

equipment. Also install (if required) any additional circuit breakers
(10 Amp each) in the existing 48 V DC Board for feeding the new
supplied DPLC equipments.
8. Perform successfully the end-to-end tests and comissioning of all

supplied telephony, data & teleprotection systems in co-ordination
with NECC engineers.
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Page 15/47 CJ-LL\PTER (8)

(C) At October (2) P.P:
l. Wire the [2W] remote subscriber channels at October (2) P .P to the

remote subscriber telephone sets through the existing l'vfDF/DDF to
interconnect October (2) P.P to the new supplied IP [PABX] at 6th
October Eastern Extensions.
2. Install (2El) cards in the existing P ABX.
8.6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS:
8.6.1. Coupling Capacitor Volta2e Transformer (CCVT):
Refer to Section (4B) for 220 kV outdoor equipment.
8.6.2. Wave Traps:
Refer to Section (4B) for 220 kV outdoor equipment.
8.6.3. 48 V DC Svstem:
The system should be designed to provide normal auxiliary power

supply to the communication system and for at least 8 hours after loss of
AC auxiliary power supply.
The system consist of:
l. Two battery charges.
2. A station battery bank.
:, .
~
Four bus breakers.
4. A low voltage disconnect device.
5. DC distribution panel.
8.6.3.1 Batterv chargers:

1. The tv.ro chargers should operate in a parallel mode and each
charger should be able to supply sufficient power for feeding
the total system load, (i.e. equipment load +25% future loads
+ fully discharged battery bank of the at the recharging
mode).
2. Nominal input voltage is 220 V single phase and 380 V three

phase[+ 10%, (+15% to -20% functional)].

611' October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS S/S
3. Input frequency is 50 Hz+ 5%.
4. Nominal output voltage is 48 VDC (stabilized).
5. Output voltage range shall be adjustable from 80% to 135 %

approx. of the nominal 01P voltage for floating charge and
boost (high rate charge).
6. For Rated DC O/P cmTent is (IO0A) for each charger, and the
battery capacity should not be; less than 400 AH.
7. Ripple should confonn to IEC standards.
8. Meter reading should be accurate to + I % of scale value (DC

voltage and DC current meters).
9. Overload protection is required.
10. Free potential contacts are required for remote indication

alanns for AC & DC conditions.
11. Ambient temperature range is [-10° C to 55° CJ.
12. Charges and battery bank should be sized properly to cater

for the loads and to recharge the discharge battery in
maximum 8 to 10 hours.
8.6.3.2 Battery:
1. 48 volt battery bank with enough capacity (40 cells) to supply
all supplied equipment and 25% for future loads and for at
least 8 hours of service after failing of AC charging power.
2. Nickel cadmium batteries stationary type is required.
3. Battery rack for battery bank with earthquake resistance should

be supplied.
4. The required battery is oflow maintenance type.
5. The bidder should submit the sizing calculation for approval.
6. The charging time should not be more than IO hours.
7. The capacity of battery shall not be less than 400 AH.
8. The positive terminal of the battery is connected to eaiih.
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Page ]7/47 CHAPTER(8)

New Urhan Communities (NUC)
8.6.3.3 Bus breakers:
The 4 bus breakers permit either chargers or the low voltage

disconnect and battery bank to be isolated from the -48 \TDC bus for
maintenance, tests and repairs without interrupting the power to the
station load.
8.6.3.4 Low voltage disconnect device:
The low voltages disconnect device (LVD) disconnects the station

battery bank from the (-48) VDC bus when this voltage drops below
approximately (-43) VDC. This protects the battery bank from
damage and shortens the time 11eeded for recharge.
The L VD device should remain open until AC restoration then it
should be automatically closed and the chargers begin to charge the
discharged battery bank.
8.6.3.5 AC & DC distribution panels:
Contractor shall supply all panels, including circuit breakers for

distributing all (48) VDC auxiliary powers to the communication
equipment.
8.6.4. Line Matching Unit:
The line Matching Unit (Ll\1U) should be suitable for inter-circuit

~-
coupling and have the following characteristics: /
,/
l. Average continuous power of200 watt at least.
2. Weather and climate proof for outdoor use.

(
\'
\, ~--•
3. Equipment side impedance should be 75 ohm (Unbalanced).'.::<•.
·, ..
4. Composite loss within the tuned range should not be greater than 2
dB for intercircuit coupling.
5. LMU should be provided with safety assembly which consists of:

earthing switch, drainage coil and surge arrestor.
6. Line side and equipment side return loss should be greater than 12
dB.
7. LMU should confirm to IEC-481 standards.
8. The LMU shall satisfy in all aspects the respective IEC standards.

Volume 2: Technical specifications Rev. (0}
6'h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GiS SIS
8.6.5. Coaxial Cable:
1. The coaxial armor cable shall connect the digital power line ca1Tier
(DPLC) in the corrtmunication room to the line matching units
(LMU).
2. The cable length shall be of 500 meters length approximately for

each direction (for bid purpose).
3. The cable shall be designed to be buried under ground through a

proper conduit in a separate trench.
4. The cable shall consist of inner conductor of plain annealed copp<::.c

su1Tounded by polyethylene dielectric.
5. The outer sheath shall consist of braided plain annealed copper

su1Tounded by a PVC sheath. The cable shall have an overall a1T11or
for cable mechanical protection. Characteristic impedance of the
cable shall match the characteristic impedance of the supplied power
line can·ier tenninal equipment and the existing coupling devices
and shall be 75 ohms.
6. The cable shall conform to IEC standards, and subject to tests

described in IEC publication (96).
7. Cable attenuation at 200 KHz< 2.5 dB/Km.
8. lvlinimum bending radius shall not exceed 10 times the diameter of

the cable.
9. The contractor shall supply also the tenninating connectors for the
coaxial cable and connect it to the DPLC tenninals inside the
communication room and to the Line Matching Units, connectors
shall be corrosion resistant.
10. The contractor shall supply, lay and test the

specified above.
11. Coaxial cable arn1ored type is required.
12. The test voltage must be~ 6 kV

''<,:.
13. The propagation speed must be> 0.66. '-~_,,,,
• The offered coaxial cable shall satisfy in all aspects the respective
IEC standards.

61h October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS SIS
8.6.6. Digital Power Line Carrier Equipment (DPLC):
A Digital Power Line Can-ier (DPLC) system ,vith the proper universal
service cham1el multiplexer is required mainly for protection and for
voice and data transmission.
The offered DPLC equipment with Muxs shall satisfy in all aspects the
respective IEC standards.
i) The DPLC equipment should meet the following characteristics:
Data transmission up to 28.8 kbps in 4 kHz bandwidth and up to 64 kbps

in 8 kHz bandwidth. RF bandwidth should not be more than 8 kI·{z in
any direction. Contiguous 16 kHz B.\V is not allowed due to frequency
spectrum congession.
- It should have drop and insert function.
- It should be capable of detecting at least the following fault conditions:
• Failure of power supply.
• Loss of incoming signals.
- Alann indication received from the remote multiplex equipment.
- Software programmable DPLC for the transmission of protection,

speech and data.
- The detection fault conditions should be indicated by audible and/or

visual alan-n indicator using light emitting diodes. The equipment
alan-ns shall be connected to the main annunciation panel in the control
room and to the remote te1minal unit to transfer such alanns to NECC
via the MDF/DDF.
..
- Integrated, so fuvare programmable, protect10n s1gna1·mg equ)p!I)ent.
-~ ·· -
- Direct digital frequency synthesis.

(
\\r'.
\ .
- Meets IEC 60495 and IEC 60834-1 requirements.
- Frequency stability should confonn to IEC standards for both ;oice·

and data Transmission.
- Equipment should operate from 48 V DC positive grounded.
- Return loss should confonn to IEC, ITU-T.

Nev.1 Urban Communities (NUC)
6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS SiS
- The power amplifier rating should be selected according to the path

calculation and shall be self controlled during overload condition.
- The local & remote loop back facility is required.
- The DPLC channels will be used for:
• Speech for telephone communication (4W E & M).
• Telephone signaling.
• Tele-protection.
• Data transmission with 2400 Baud.
• Remote subscriber.
ii) The DPLC equipment should meet the following characteristics :
1) The DPLC equipment should be of the single side band suppressed

caiTier type.
2) The transm1ss10n frequency allocation should be of the

progrmm1mble type (at AF & RF level).
3) The chaimels may be equalized ifnecessaiy.
4) The bandwidth of each channel is 4 kHz.
5) Frequency stability is: RF<+ 0.5 Hz.

AF<+2Hz.
6) Automatic Gain Control (AGC): the variation in the output AF level
should not exceed +0.5 dB for a variation in the input level from -26
dB to+ 14 dB or of 40 dB dynamic range of the system pilot.
7) Selectivity:
• 50 dB down at 0.6 kB:Z from band edge.
• 80 dB down at 4 kHz from bai1d edge.
• 80 dB down from image rejection.
• 60 dB down (at least) for crosstalk.

8) The output power should be calculated and designed in such a way

that the Signal-to Noise Ratio (SNR) must be 35 dB at minimum for
data channel and 40 dB at minimum for speech channel.
9) Adjustable audio level for input and output (2w) or (4w) m the
range:
a) Tx: (-16) up to (0) dB.
b) Rx: (-10) up to (+7) dB.
Any external amplifier is not accepted.
10) Nominal output impedance should be 75 ohm.
11) Frequency stability should conform to IEC, for both voice and data
transmission.
12) Frequency response equalization should be 6 dB.
13) Possibility to have data channel capable to transmit/receive

synchronous and asynchronous data connected direct to the channel
without any external interfaces.
14) Bidders should provide full technical data and block diagrams of the
offered equipment.
15) Calculations of path attenuation, output power and SNR should be

done and given by bidders, (data of transmission line will be given
later by EETC).
16) Bidders should provide certified test results for cross talk levels.
17) The frequencies of DPLC equipment shall be given to the contractor

later.
18) The local/remote RF loop back facility is required for the purpose of
testing.
19) The power amplifier should be self controlled during overload

conditions.
20) Signals shall be internally digitally processed. ~ - -..
21) Lap Top, Com1ectors, Extension cards, leads, cables.:·:

I -. . ·:
etc necessary
for test, maintenance, repair, monitoring and S29n;figuration & 1
Reconfiguration. i
1.• 1 \ ...
l l \?;,__.;.~;i
. . JJ
\~:.:::·,;·_·.·.. . .• i
. "·
'-·
~.. ___ .,..,,,,,,~-·"""?

6th October Eastern Extensions '1'10122122 kV GlS S/S
iii) Universal Service Channel l\1ultiplexer requirements:

The data charu1els shall be available with the rate higher than or equal to
64 Kbps for 8 KHz.
Aggregate data rate is more than or equal to 64 kbps.
Da:ta rate for each channel is individually adjustable.
Each channel can be used for data or speech transmission as needed.
Data format asynchronous and synchronous.
RS232, RS422/ V. 11 and X.21 synchronous mode.
Speech interface 4W Tx = - 16 dBm and Rx=+ 7 dBm.
48 VDC supply
Two wire remote subscriber (FXO, FXS).
Tcleprotection tone Equipment (if not integrated in the DPLC):

The teleprotection equipment shall transmit/receive the tripping signals
to protect the circuit lines using the DPLC charu1els. The teleprotection
equipment commands should enable the protection relays of the 220 kV
double circuit lines to initiate full tripping scheme commands (DUTT/
PUTT/ POTT/DCB/DCUB). The transmitted tripping signal shall be in
the voice band of the DPLC channel and speech is inten-upted while
transmission is taking place.
For each 220 kV circuit line, four (4) independent teleprotection

command signals are required. /~~"'"e:..,
//
The offered Teleprotection Tone equipment shall satisfy in all asp9(ts ·ti-ie
respective IEC standards. /
1'
l
\ '
The teleprotection distribution scheme will be as follows: V.
- Teleprotection equipment of high security and dependability type 's~oµld .
be provided (according to IEC 60834) if not available as a part of'tl:J.e_;;_ ..
DPLC i/p units.
- The nominal transmission time including DPLC delay and relay

operating times shall not exceed 15ms.
- Teleprotection equipment should be operated from 48VDC (positively

grounded).

- The teleprotection equipment should have the facility of the automatic

and periodic check for tripping commands. These tripping c01m11ands
are displayed on counters for TX and RX, also the periodic check time is
adjustable.
- Trip signals and equipment failure alan11s shall be provided as potential

free contacts and be wired to the protection equipment. The tripping
contacts shall be able to handle the tripping voltage of 220 VDC.
- The nominal transmission time, including the DPLC equipment delay

and relay operating times should be less than 10 rn sec (assuming point
to point connection).
- The delay time calculations should be submitted with the proposal

taking into consideration the sites delay and the length /of' -·~
the ~.
transmission lines. //
8.6.7. Fiber Optic And Multiplexer Equipment:
a) Fiber Optic Equipment:
1. General Description for Optical Equioment:
- The fiber optic equipment supplied unde;: this project shall be based on
the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) technology.
- The SDH system shall be designed for digital transmission using single
mode fiber optics and shall comply with the ITU.T. G707
Recommendation for SDH STM-1 level (155M bit/s).
- The fiber optic equipment consists of optical transmit and receive pair
(herein after cal!ed a transceiver).
- A Transceiver shall operate on STM-1 (155 Mbps) to satisfy the capacity

requirements and should be capable for upgrading to STM-4 as minimum.
- The multiplexing structure of the proposed SDH equipment shall pen11it

the extraction of individual circuits from high capacity systems without
having to demultiplex the whole STM-1 frame. Cross connect facilities
shall be provided to enable interconnections between different channels
and network components.
- The SDH optical equipment shall perfonn both multiplexing and optical
line te1minating functions. All features and functions of the SDH
multiplexer equipment shall be readily software configurable to suit
operational requirements of the fiber optic communication system.

6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/22122 kV GlS SIS
- The SDH system shall be capable of being used as cross connect, hub,
add/drop and terminal multiplexer.
- The SDH system shall support a comprehensive range of plesiochronous

tributaries including 2 M bit/s, 34 M bit/s, 140 M bit/s.
- The SDH Equipment shall meet the latest Recommendations of the ITU.T
being in force at the time of the bid and it should be operated in (l+l)
technique, equipped with 40 El (20 + 20).
- The SDH fiber optical equipment shall be housed In a cabinet and shall
comprise, but not limited to the following function elements:
• · Optical line interface.
• Tributary module.
• Switching unit.
• Alann and Supervisory Facilities.
• Engineering order wire (EOW) unit for service telephone.
" Service data interface.
o Power supply units.
• Electrical line interface.
The rated power supply shall be -48 V DC.
- The equipment shall be designed for continuous operation under

the following conditions:
• Operating Temperature : 0° C to 45° C .
., Humidity: 0 to 95 % (non- condensing).
- The Bidder shall submit the calculations of signal budget between the
two nodes showing that:
• The proposed transceiver shall cover all the fiber optic system losses
plus the specified margin (5 dB).

• Any node of the two nodes can act as a master which means that this
node can generate frames while the other node shall be synchronized
,vith it.
r
• Errors come out from fiber cable operation or interface cards shall be
detected by EMS, also visual indications by means of LED'S on the front
panel of the interface cards shall be provided.
• The delay time calculations should be submitted with the proposal.
• The equipment should have two power supplies cards (DC-DC power
converter card) for redundancy (sharing the load) each can work alone
when the other is faulty (it could be achieved by installing two units in
one rack, each is capable of supplying the system in case of failure of the
other).
• Network should be expandable to 5 nodes (the possibility of adding new

nodes).
• The offered Fiber Optic Telecom Equipment shail satisfy in all aspects
the respective IEC standards.
2. Optical line interface:
The optical line interface shall carry out the parallel to serial conversion
/<~-.. of the traffic from the switching unit into a STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s
/ stream. The optical section shall conve1i the electrical signal into an
l optical signal for transmission over a single mode optical fiber (G652)
/-,
, and perfom1 a reciprocal function on the receiver side. Each optical line
[ system shall be suitable for duplex operation at optical wavelength of
\ 1310nm or 1550 nm. The optical interfaces shall comply to ITU.T. G957
\: .. Recommendation. The electrooptic converter shall be of a
··a,._~··j semiconductor laser diode type such as FBRY-Perot (FB) or distributed
feedback (DFB) with power output suitable for the requirements of the
fiber optical links and for minimizing the number of repeaters.
The design of the transmitter shall be such that under fault conditions,
the launched power shall be significantly reduced to a safe level. It is
preferable that the optical transmit and receive equipment arc
interconnected in such away that a broken fiber will automatically
switch off the optical transmitters at both ends of the section.
• Transmitter shall provide data scrambling to facilitate the continuous

transmission of data timing information.

6'" October Eastern Extensions 720122122 kV GJS SIS
- The opto-electric converter shall use a photodiode detector such as PIN

photodiode detector or an avalanche photodiode detector (APD) with
narrow band phase locked loop synchronization to achieve low jitter
level.
- The line interface unit shall disassemble the incoming composite STM-1
data stream into its line, supervisory, control and EOW signals.
- The optical receiver equipment shall have a bit error rate performance
suited to the requirements of the network. A BER of 10-9 or better for
received- signal level at bit rate of 155.52 Mbit/s and at an ambient
temperature of+ 45° C shall be required as a minimum.
3. Fiber Optic Transceiver Characteristics :
Optical Wavelength : 1550 nm or1310 nm. (The selected wavelength

shall be according to signal power budget
calculations).
Optical source life span : Better than 15 years.
Optical Fiber Type : Single Mode.

-~-~------.
Jitter Perfonnance : Per CCITT Recommendation G.823/ ·
Power Supply Voltage : 48 VDC ( Positively grounded ).
Optical Source : Laser.
4. Electrical Line Interface:
The electrical line interface shall perfonn the same functions as the optical
line interface unit. The-STM-1 electrical line signals shall comply with
ITU.T.G.707 Recommendation.
5. Tributarv module:
The tributary module shall- perfonn the selective extraction/insertion of

2Mbit/s tributaries to and from the STM-1 signal whilst enabling other
traffic to pass through without inten-uption.
'
L The tributary module shall permit any 2 Mbit/s channel to be inserted-or
dropped without causing deterioration of the transmission quality. The drop
and insert functions shall be user configurnble both locally and remotely
through a user interface unit.
The tributary module shall be capable of supporting higher tributary data
rate up to 140 Mbits.

Nev, 1 Urban Communities (NUC)
6''' October Eastern Extensions 220/22/12 kV GIS SIS
The data from each tributary shall be mapped into virtual containers m1d
tributary units in accordance with ITU.T.G. 707 Recommendations.
6. Switching unit:
A switching unit shall be provided to allow traffic from any line interface
unit to be c01mected to any tributary port or any line p01i. Additionally, it
shall allow full cross connection between tributaries.
7. Alarms and Supervision Facilities:

The following alanns shall be provided as a minimum on the SDH fiber
optical equipment:
Power supply Failure or out oflimits.
- Loss of incoming signals at 2048 kbps inputs.
Loss of frame alignment.
- Optical receiver level low.
- Loss of clock signal.
The detected fault conditions should be indicated by audible and / or visual

almm indicator using light emitting diodes.
The equipment alarms shall be connected to main annunciation panel in the
control room and to the RTU. The RTU shall transfer such alarms to NECC
through the MDF/DDF.
8. Engineer Order Wire (EOW) unit:

Engineer Order Wire (EOW) unit providing call, ring and speech facilities
shall be provided with each SDH fiber optical equipment. The unit shall
operate on a service channel in the STM-1 bit stream. The units shall be
configured as an onmibus circuit, with telephone handset and selective
calling to reach any station along the SDH loops with an audible ale1i
provided at each station.
9. Service data interface:

Means shall be provided for accessing the auxiliary channels using spare
bytes in the SDH overhead bit stream.
10. Power induction protection:
- The fiber optical equipment shall be shielded from damage by power

induction.
f The equipment shall be capable of withstanding surges at rate of 2 kV per
L microsecond at least.

6 th October Eastern Extensions 2~0i22!22 kV GIS S/S
11. Connector:
The fiber optic equipment shall be provided with connectors having the
folloVv·ing features:
Insertion losses less than 0.5 dB
Return loss > 40 dB
Durability: 200 mating cycles at least
12. Si:wal Power Budget:
The overall optical signal power budget for the link to be provided taking
into account the following parameters:
a. Optical wave guide fiber loss (1550 / 1330 nm) average< 0.22 / 0.36
dB/km.
max. < 0 .25/ 0.4 dB/km
b. Splice loss max. < 0.03 dB/splice
c. End connectors max < 0.5 dB/connector.
d. Temperature dependent attenuation margin (-55°C to + 85°C) < 0.05
dB/km.
e. Chromatic dispersion < 3.5/18 ps/mn.km. for (1310 /1550) run.
f. The required signal power budget (system margin) shall be> 5 dB for
the whole fiber optic system (fiber optic cables & fiber optic
equipment).
g. The calculations shall be submitted taking into consideration the worst

case of optical cable and equipment parameters (i.e; max fiber Ioss,"i11.iir.
transmit power & Receiver sensitivity. ·
N.B: assume the reel length is approx. 4000m. l

!
b) Multiplexer Equipment:
1. Primarv multiplex equipment:
- 30 channels pulse code modulated (PCM) equipment, with associated

signaling, shall comply with the latest version of ITU.T.G703, G704,
G71 l, G712, G713 and G732 Recommendations.
- The equipment shall serve as the basic system for the higher digital
hierarchy level in accordance with ITU.T G702 Recommendation.
- Digital interfaces at 64 Kbits/s and 2,048 Kbits/s shall be provided in

accordance with ITU.T G703 Recommendation.

- The equipment should be capable of dropping and inserting multiple of

2.4, 9.6 and 64 Kbps.
- PCM transmission shall be based on a sampling rate of 8,000 samples/s

of each incoming VF element. The encoding law used shall be A-Law
using S binary digits per sample, thus generating a 64 Kbits/s signal in
accordance with ITU. TG 711 Reconunendation.
- 32 channels of 64 Kbits/s each, transmitted in 32 time slots of S bits per

frame, shall build up to a digital bitstrean1 of 2,048 Kbits/s. 30 channels,
corresponding to 30 time- slots. Time slot # 0 shall be used for frame
align.'Ilent and remote supervision and time slot (time slot # 16) shall be
used for cham1el associated telephone signaling.
- The multiplex equipment shall be equipped with alann circuits to detect

at least the following:
• Loss of incoming signal (2,048 Kbits/s).
• Loss of frame synchronization.
• Bit error rate (BER) greater than 10-9 .
• Alann indication signal (AIS) detection.
• Failure interfaces.
• Failure of power supply.
" Loss of clock signals.
The detected fault conditions should be indicated by audible and / or

visual alann indicator using light emitting diodes.
The equipment ala1ms shall be connected to main annunciation panel in

the control room and to the RTU. The RTU shall transfer such alanns to
NECC through I\.IDF/DDF.
2. Test points:
Facility shall be provided to access the digital signal at each multiplexer

tenninal for testing and measurement purposes without interrupting the
service of the equipment.

3. Branching multiolex / de-l\1ultiplex (IVIuldex) equipment:

Capabilities of the equipment:
1) Primary rate branching multiplex equipment shall comply with ITU-

T rec. G737 being capable of dropping and inserting of 64 kbps and
multiples of 2.4 kbps data circuits as well as of voice channels.
2) The equipment should be capable of multiplexing and de-

multiplexing between 2 IVlbps and 155 Mbps.
3) Synchronization and signaling shall be available for switching

equipment specified.
4) Equipment rack shall include two power supply units (DC-DC

converter).
4. Fiber Optic Svstem Performance Calculation and Protection:

F.O System Performance:
a) Performance of the F.O link between the two successive sites should
be calculated based on a minimum margin of 5 dB.
b) The perfom1ance calculations shall be based on the supplied

equipment in accordance with the above specification.
------•---. c) Bidder shall design the fiber optic equipment in such way to achieve
the required signal power budget minimum margin, 5 dB for the
fiber optic link.
d) The bidder shall identify in the system design all the margin
allowance and shall consider worst case approach by assigning an
additional overall unallocated margin.
e) The contractor shall submit test results verifying the above required
signal power budget.
F.O System Protection:

1) The F.O System protection should be for all the system components
(cable & Equipment).
2) For equipment protection, it should be at 155 Mbps & 2 Mbps

levels.
5. General Requirements For SDH F.O equipment & Multiplexers:
1) Drop & Insert function.

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GJS S/S
2) Local internal test loop and remote loop facilities.
3) Monitoring of basic elements and user interfaces alarm by using a

lap top.
4) Redundant power supply achieved by installing two units, each is

capable of supplying the system in case of failure of the other.
In case the power supply units are distributed as a part of each

card/module of the equipment, a full redundancy in the main cards /
modules must be considered to guarantee continues operation (i.e
Redundancy shall include the microprocessor module, switching
unit, matrix unit and control units).
5) Temperature & humidity: The equipment shall be designed for

continuous operation under the following conditions :
• Operating Temperature: 0°C to 45°C.
• Humidity: 0 to 95 % (non - condensing).
6) All software and lap top .... etc. needed for fiber optic equipment for
maintenance, tests, configuration and settings should be included.
7) Equipment should have loop back facilities (internal test loop and
remote loop facilities) to drop out the node or to avoid the fiber
break.
8) The tributary interfaces shall be able to handle the following :
• Audio band 300 - 3400 HZ speech for telephone or 2.4 kbps data
channel or remote subscribers.
~ PABX - PABX (4 W, E & M) having the capability to prg_.vide._

any one of the different signaling types. ./· · ·
• Submultiplexer for Synch. & Asynch. Data.
• 64 kbps data interfaces (V.35).
• Teleprotection commands /channels (64 bps, Digital I/P), - .....
• 0 - 19200 bis data channels (Digital I/P), Asynchronous (RS232 /

V.24).
• El circuits.

New Urban Communities (}JlJC)
6'" October Eastern Extensions ?20/21121 kV GIS S/S
[Taking into account that the channels or relevant cards distribution

should be even among the primary MUX unit]
Digital Telenrotection Equipment (if not inte!?:rated in the MUX)
The offered digital teleprotection equipment shall satisfy in all aspects

the respective IEC standards.
The teleprotection equipment shall transmit/receive the tripping signals

to protect the EHV lines using the fiber optic channels. The
teleprotection equipment should be able to handle full tripping schemes
commands (DUTT/PUTT/POTT/DCB/DClJB).
Each Tele protection device shall be able to initiate as minimum, four (4)
independent Tele protection command signals.
The teleprotection distribution scheme will be as follows:
l. Teleprotection equipment of high security and dependability type

should be provided (according to JEC 60834) if not available as a.
part of the MUX i/p units.
2. Teleprotection . equipment should be operated from 48VDC

(positively grounded).
3. The teleprotection equipment should have the facility of the

automatic and periodic check for tripping commands. These tripping
commands are displayed on counters for TX and RX, also the
periodic check time is adjustable.
4. Trip signals and equipment failure alanns shall be provided as

potential free contacts (N/O) and be wired to the protection
· equipment. The tripping contacts shall be able to handle the tripping
voltage of 220 VDC.
5. The nominal transmission time, including the fiber optic equipment

delay and relay operating times, should be less than 5 m sec
(assuming point to point connection).
6. The delay time calculations should be submitted with the proposal

taking into consideration the sites delay and the length of the
transmission Jines.
Notes:
a) In case of teleprotection system failure (teleprotection
equipment or fiber optic equipment), a relay contacts should be

provided to indicate tha, failure on the substation alarm system

and also to the protection relays to enable them to act
independently of telecommunication equipment.
b) N/O contacts of teleprotection failure alarm shall be provided

for connection to BCU. The BCU shall transfer such alarms to
NECC as well as to substation alarm system.
8.6.8. IP Switch. P ABX and Telephone Sets:
8.6.8.1. Technical Specification ofth PABX switch:

I. The PABX shall operate on 48 Vdc (Positive grounded)
The offered switch shall satisfy in all aspects the respective IEC
· standards.
2. The PA.BX shall interface with PLC and/or FO communication

systems, Le analog and digital via MDF and DDF.
3. The PABX shall use Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF)

dialing, E&rv1 signaling selectable type (I,II or V) with the
capability to select 20 or 50 baud speed for any trunk line.
4. Two El st·eam direct digital interface.
5. The PABX shall have the capability of automatic hunting, re-

routing of trunks and specified extensions and priority
assignment.
6. Data switching.
7. Power supply redunda,,cy.
8. The Switch shall have the following:
1) Wire to 4-wire trunk connections.
2) "\Vire to 2-wire subscriber connections.
3) Wire to 4-wire subscriber to trunk connections and vice versa.
4) Trunks to interface PA paging system.
5) El stream direct connection.
6) Interface with IP switch.
Electric Power Syste.ns Engineering Company Page 34/47 CHAPTER(8)

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS SIS
9. An administrative terminal (laptop) which can be plugged into

any time location shall be provided.
10. The posibility of automatically or manually blocking faulty

circuits and a diagnostic trouble shooting unit, either panel
mounted or pluggable.
11. The system programs and customer data shall be stored in a

built-in non-volatile memory, and also shall be stored in a back-
up memory or floppy disk to be loaded or progra1mned into the
system when required.
12. The Switch numbering plan shall acc01mnodate six (6) digits
dialing.
13. Ringing frequency 20 or 25 HZ.
14. Automatic switching to normal ac supply (220V, SOHZ) in case

of failure of the ring generator.
15. All subscriber lines shall be protected against over voltage and
over cmrent, in order to protect the Exchange.
16. IP Switch Alann Sytem
1) An alarm system shall indicate traffic failure caused by

loss of power, blown fuses ... etc.
2) Alarms shall be grouped in two groups, monor and major
and shall be displayed locally on the front of the switch
panel and remotely in the communication room. Selected
alarms can be transferred via the gateway to NECC.
17. Switch Ass emby Cabinet
1) The assembly cabinet shall be of modular construction

dust and vennin proof.
2) All equipment , apart from the switches, shall be
mounted on printed circuit cards which shall be plugged
into 19" shelves protection class IP53.
3) One LED can be provided on dust protection frame for
common alarm. The necessary wiring is done from
corresponding terminal block.

Ne\v Urban Communities (NUC)
6'h October Eastern Extensions 220122/22 kV GlS S/S
For safety and proper performance the cabinet shall

include a thennal sensor, which operates a fan on the
cabinet in case of high temperature degree.
4) The cabinet shall be equipped with light and outlets.
5) The cabinet shall equipped with fan.
6) The cabinet shall equipped with pouch.
8.6.8.2. Telephone Sets:
Five (5) i.ouch tone telephone sets (of the desktop type) and also two (2)
sets of the (IP Phone) type to be provided.
Telephone sets shall be equipped with dialing facilities, either dials or

push buttons and DTl'vlF dialing and capable for voice paging.
8.6.9. l\IDF/DDF (J\1ain Distribution Frame/ Digital Distribution Frame):
a) Main Distribution Frame (MDF):
MDF shall act as a marshaling point for all incoming and outgoing
communication circuits and have the following characteristics:
1. The frame shall enable terminating and transit circuits to be
conveniently cross connected to the appropriate cables. It shali be
/ " ~ .. modular in design in order to save the amount of space requested for the
;/ ·connection of the electronic exchange and transmission devices and
/ suitable for floor mounting.
I Cables shall be secured to the frame using cable ties or another approved
\~;; . method of suppmi.
11. The MDF shall be enclosed in a separate stand alone cabinet (not wall
mounted) to prevent accidental damage or contact; the cabinet shall
maintain the equipment in dust-free operation.
iii. The MDF shall be from the free standing type (19 inch frame) with two
sides.
iv. The connection components will be solder less electrical connections

type as defined in the IEC standards taking into account the following:-
!. The connection will be realized according to the insulation piercing

method: It will be made by clamping an insulated conductor into a
connecting tenninal which cut or pierce the insulation and grips the
core, without previous stripping of the insulation. Such a connection
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Page 36147 CHAPTER (8)

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22,'22 kV GlS SIS
is obtained in a fraction of the time required for a convential

soldering screwing or wrapping connection.
2. The insulation piercing connection component will be designed for
wires with single case conductors with diameters between 0.2 and
1.4 mm, and for wires with stranded conductors with a conductor
cross Section from 0.05 to 1.5 1mn2, used in the c01m11unication
teclmology and for infonnation processmg equipment and
installations.
3. The c01mection and disconnection will be realized with an unique

tool, allowir1g a sh01i time of operation.
v. Cables which enter buildings and tenninated directly on the l\1DF or any
cables which are not adequately protected by other means shall be fitted
with surge arresters at the l\IDF tennination point, surge arresters be
neatly grouped and shall not cause interference with other termination
and wiring.·
vi. Tennination blocks shall be adequately labeled to ensure ease of

identification of incoming, outgoing and cross connecting cables,.
Terminations shall be numbered and colored marking caps shall be
supplied by the contractor to identify ce1iain pairs to maintenance
personnel. [e.g. pairs that are critical, faulty ... etc).
vii.The capacity of the MDF shall be chosen to cover the capacity of the
supplied c01mnunication equipment +25% spare tenninals (for future
for eacli. site).
viii. For the (19) inch frame type should be possible to install three modules
that will be used as a data connection frame (for the V. 28 user
interfaces).
b) Digital distribution frame (DDF)
The DDF shall be used to interface and/or cross-co1mect betv,een the

digital multiplex equipment.
- The frame shall enable terminating and transit circuits to be

conveniently cross connected to the appropriate cables.
- It shall be modular in design in order to save the amount of space

requested for the connection of the electronic exchange and transmission
devices suitable for floor mounting.
Cables shall be secured to be frame usmg cables ties or another

approved method of supp01i.
Electric- Po>ver Systems Engineering Company Page 37/47 CHAPTER (8)

- The DDF shall be enclosed in a cabinet to prevent accidental damage or

contact, the cabinet shall maintain the equipment in dust free condition.
- The follmving basic functions of the DDF are required:
e Circuit rerouting/jumping.
• Circuit disconnection.
The connection components will be solder less electrical connections

type as defined in IEC 50 pa1i 5 81 publications.
The corrnection will be realized according to the insulation piercing

method: it will be made by clamping an insulated conductor into a
connecting tenninal which cuts or pierce the insulation and grips the
core, without previous stripping of the insulation.
Such a connection is obtained in a fraction of the time required for a

conventional soldering, screwing or vvTapping connection.
- The insulation piercing connection component will be designed for wires

with single case conductors with diameters between 0.2 and 1.4 nun, and
for wires with stranded conductors with a conductor cross Section from
0.05 to 1.5 1111112, used in the communication technology and for
infonnation processing equipment and installations.
- The com1ection and disconnection will be realized with an unique tool,

allowing a short time of operation.
- The capacity of the DDF shall be chosen to acconunodate the maximum

capacity of the conununication system equipment.
- Tennination blocks shall be adequately to ensure case of identication of

the incoming, outgoing and the cross connecting cables. Termination
shall be numbered and colored marking caps and shall be supplied by
the contractor to identify certain pairs to maintenance personnel (e.g.
Pairs that are critical, faulty, .... Etc).
- The DDF capacity shall be chosen to cover the capacity of the supplied
communication equipment +50% spare te1minals for future use.
-----,
- The offered MDF/DDF shall satisfy in all aspfcts the re;pective IEC
standards. / · · \
!'
(
\
\
\~. j/
·"-.. .;
- · ~ ~ - __.:.- y / ; /

6th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GI S S/S
8.6.10.Te!ecommunication Alarm Svstem (To be a nart of the substation

annunciation svstem):
The contractor shall allow all c01mnunication general alarms to be wired
to the main annunciation panel for the 220, 22 kV levels.
The system shall be sufficient to take care of each telecommunication
cabinet general alann. In addition to the alanns of the DC system as
specified.
The mentioned general alarms shall include the followings:
1. Four (4) alarms for 48 VDC systems.
2. Five (5) alanns for theDPLC equipments.
3. Five (5) alanns for the FO equipments.
4. Five ( 5) alarms for the IP [PABX].
The contractor shall be responsible to tenninate all above alarms

windows to the supplied BCU and subsequently to the contractor
supplied equipments.
8.6.11.Cables and Wiring:

1. All communication wiring should be of the twisted and screened type.
2. All control wiring should be property identified by pem1anent wire

sleeves tagged with assigned wire marks.
3. For ease of operation and maintenance, wiring tenninal drawings should

be furnished for all equipment and all mains voltage cabinets. The
wiring terminal drawings should include terminal block numbers
(arranged . according to. physical locations), circuit numbers,
interconnection cables, numbers and wire marks of each conductor.
4. The offered cables shall satisfy in all aspects the respective IEC
standards.
8.6.12.Cabinets:
1. All telecommunication equipment shall be h~us;d.frt "';?wen
constructed dust and vermin proof cabinets. /""
i
' .
2. Cabinet shall be with welded torsion free frame\ ;ind has a lock, it is
used for mounting 19" trays. \
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Page 39/47 CHAPTER(S)

6'" October Eastern Extensions 2'10122122 kV GlS SIS
3. Number of cabinets for housing the teleprotection equipment :tvI/C

system shall be according to manufacturer standard and
recommendation. Protection class IP54.
4. Cabinet alarm: One led can be provided on dust protection frame for
common alam1. The necessary wiring is done from co1Tesponding
terminal block.
5. For safety and proper pcrfo1mance of the system, the cabinet shall
include a the1111al sensor, which operates a fan on the top of the
cabinet in case of high temperature degree (if needed).
6. The supplied equipment should be installed in the cabinets such that

at least 30 cm should be left empty above cabinet bottom to allow
proper equipment maintenance.
Note: The offered cabinets shall also satisfy in all aspects the detailed
EUS - E20 specifications for indoor cabinets beside all a/m
technical requirements.
7. Cabinets shall be equipped- with lights, out lets.
8. Cabinets shall be labeled properly with link name, ... etc.
9. Cabinets shall be equipped with fan (if needed).
8.7. Test Equipment and Tools:
Bider shall supply the following test equipments with associated cables,
sockets and tools required for NECC engineering for testing and
maintenance of the supplied equipment:
One set ofFO, DPLC & IP Pli.BX test equipment shall include but
not limited to the following:
• Three laptop computers with all original sofuvare for configuration

and maintenance of the DPLC, FO & IP PABX respectively.
" Tool kit (wiring assembly and disassembly for DPLC, FO & IP
PABX.
• One set of all special cables a,,7.d sockets.
N.B:
- Master copy of software for all supplied equipment shall be provided.
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Page40/47 CHAPTER(S)

61h October Eastern Extensions 2'20/?2/22 kV GIS SIS
A breakdown price list of test equipment and tools for the DPLC, FO
& IP P ABX equipment maintenance must be submitted with the
bidder offer.
8.8. Snare Parts:
Bidder shall submit in his offer a comprehensive list of recommended

spares sufficient to keep operation of the FO, DPLC & IP P ABX with
high performance and availability.
Breakdown price of the offered spares shall be provided in the price
schedule which shall be one set of spare parts.
The set should include the following:
1. For FO, DTP, DPLC, TP and IP PABX equipment

A set of 10 % of each supplied module or printed circuit board with at
least one board and one module of each printed circuit board and
module type in use for all supplied equipment.
2. One set of all special cables and sockets connectors, adapters, etc
should be included in the spare parts list.
3. Consumable spares, i.e. lamps, fuses, ... etc., should be supplied

by the contractor. It should cover 30% of all types mentioned.
8.9. Documentation:
Contractor should provide all the installation, operation and maintenance

hardware and software documentation necessai.y for proper operation
and maintenance together with a reproducible copy of as built drawings.
Five copies of each should be provided to EETC.
Two sets out of the required five sets of the documentation for DPLC,
FO & IP P ABX manuals shall be submitted to NECC.
All design documents shall be submitted to EETC for approval before

manufacturing of the equipment.
8.10. Factorv Acceptance Tests:

/
I . '
Factory witness tests shall be conducted on SDH, MDX, DTP,
DPLC, TP & IP PABX equipment. For details of tests r!ferto EUS-
20. '

No equipment shall be shipped to EETC until the facto;y tests for

the equipment are completed satisfactorily and all variances resolved
and approved by EETC representatives.
Successful completion of fact01y tests shall in no way constitute
final acceptance of any portion thereof.
Fact01y tests shall not begin without the prior delivery and approval
of docwnentation for both the test procedures and the test plan.
FAT for all supplied equipment shall be done in the manufacturer's
facto1y in presence of EETC representative. [for all supplied
equipment [FO (SDH & MUX), DPLC & IP PABX)].
8.11. Tvpe Tests:
Bidder should submit ail equipment test certificates and type test reports,
valid through the last ten ( 10) years according to IEC standard.
8.12. Training:
As per Chapter (1) - Volume 2 - Part I.
8.13. Applied Standards:
The electrical equipment shall be designed, manufactured and tested in

accordance with the latest edition of the following relevant standards:
l. ITU-T/IEC Standards.
2. ISO standards.
3. Other referenced codes and standards.
Precedence of Codes And Standards:
In case of conflict between this specification and any of the referenced

codes and standards the following order of precedence shall apply:
- This specification.
- ITU-T/IEC standard.
- ISO standards.
- Other referenced codes and standards.
Compliance With Standards:
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Page 42/47 CHAPTER(S)

All materials and equipment used and provided under the contract must
· be in accordance with ITU-T / IEC or ISO publications and
reconunendations. Where no such recommendation exists then materials
shall be in accordance with such other authoritative standards
appropriate to the country of manufacture as in the op11110n of the
engineer ensures an equivalent or higher quality.
If the contractor offers materials, equipment, design calculations or tests

which conform to standards other than those mentioned in the specified
applied standards, full details of the differences bet\veen the proposed
standard and the specified applied standards in so far as they affect the
design or performance of the equipment, shall be submitted for owner
review.
The reco1mnendation or standards used shall be those last published

prior to the closing date of bids.
8.14. SUBMITTALS:
L
1. SUBMITTALS WITH THE BID:
1.1. For DPLC:
The contractor shall submit the detailed design which include but not
limited to the foilowing:
a. System perfonnance calculations (path calculations).
b. Equipment references.
c. Type test reports.
d. SNR calculations.
e. Output Power calculations.

f. DC calculations:
g. Coupling component connections drawings.
h. Outline dimensional drawings.
1. General layout drawings.
J. Schematic block diagrams.
k. Training Syllabus.
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Page43/47 CHAPTER (8)

6th October Eastern Extensions 220122/2? kV GIS S/S
1.2. FOR FIBER OPTIC EOUIP1V1ENT:
T11e contractor shall submit the detailed design which include but not
limited to the following:
a. System performance calculations (path calculations).
b. Equipment references.
C. Type test reports.
d. Signal power budget calculation.
e. Channel perfommnce calculations.
f. Outline dimensional drawings.
0
o· General layout drawings.
h. Schematic block diagrams.
l. Training Syllabus.
2. SUBMITTALS AFTER SIGNING THE CONTRACT (DURING

DESIGN TTh1E):
The contractor should submit during the design stage the following
"taking into account that design documents should be submitted much
early before manufacturing of equipment to get E.E.T.C approval":
2.1. FOR DPLC:
1. Installation instrnctions.
2. Factory and site acceptance tests procedures and plans.
3. Any other documents which help the owner to review the design
document such as operation and maintenance manuals, technical
specification, etc (in English).
4. Site manual reflecting the final arrangement with wiring lists and
diagrams for each site. This site manuals should cover the following:
a. Channelization plan as well as channel block and level diagrams.
b. General layout drawings and floor plan.
c. Outline dimensional drawings.
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Page44/47 CHAPTER (8)

6111 October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GlS S/S
d. Assembly drawings.
e. \Viring diagrams.
f. Schematic diagrams.
g. :Mounting drawings.
h. Site and factory tests procedures.
1. As built drawing including wiring diagrams & wiring list.
J. Equipment description.
k. Site Description.
I. Site diagrams.
m. Nameplate drawings.
n. FAT test results and field site tests.
5. Operation and maintenance manuals to cover :
" Equipment description.
• Power and alarm diagram.
• DPLC and digital teleprotection diagrams.
• Assembly drawings.
2.2. FOR FIBER OPTIC EQUIPMENT:
I. Installation instructions.
2. Factory and site acceptance tests procedures and plans.
3. Any other documents which help the ovmer to review the design
document such as operation and maintenance manuals, technical
specification, .... etc(in English).
4. Site manual reflecting the final arrangement with wiring lists and
diagrams for each site. This site manuals should cover the following:
• Channelization plan as well as channel block and level diagrams.

o General layout drawings and floor plan.
e Outline dimensional drawings.
e Assembly drawings.
• Wiring diagrams.
o Schematic diagrams.
<> lviounting drawings.
~ Site and factory tests procedures.
• As built drawing including wiring diagrams & wiring list.
• Equipment description.
• Site Description.
• Site diagrams.
,. MUX's diagrams.
• Nameplate drawings.
<> FAT test results and field site tests.
• SNR calculations.
5. Operation and maintenance manuals to cover:
o Equipment description.
" Power and alarm diagram.
• Fiber optic, MUX and digital teleprotection diagrams.
• Assembly drawings.
Notes:
l. Two sets out of the five sets required for the above design
documents shall be submitted to EETC for approval beside
I
L
other sets.
2. All above item shall be submitted in separate volumes (i.e

separate from substation document volumes

~,~ :~•.l~""":2~ , . . .r:•~""""l --
El Garnmal 220 l<V SIS th
6 OctoberEasten1 Extension
220/22/22 KV GIS S/S
Gth October220 l(V SIS
l
Singleciro.rtt OPGW OPG\111 Singfe circuij
On phases On phases
~:z:
< "';;-
0
i\.T 220kV '° L,T 0<~"'
Net;;ork r-L.T
- n
"8 ::i.
~ ], I : I ,(::LT ~c
0
er er
~
" n ccvr• ccvr' (ti ~:
.. ,
IV~ I ~
tn ()
:,
>--J ii
-r---:r I T ___ L_
"
n '-"
§"\~
n· ct
~
:,_,..
LMU ~1_,
LMU:
I
I : Ll1IVH UillJ:
1--,--' 1____ 1
.TT_ :=-r-i"'.T.
f l I I
"'
~§
:, cJ
~
0
,:LMU~LMU:
C
____, ·-,--'
__ , __ 1 , U11f.l LUU
- "'
I
!~---• tn ~
"' 3
~ I I L-1--
~ a:
Uew coaxial l ',I tl~w coaxial tl1;w coaxial .---1. Ucw
,.-, coaxial
t
~
Df=JI
1
"
(1> (1>
"O "
0, 00 1------, I
:-o;;Lc-: 1---'-.. -, Z·z~
n. s·
en n : DPLC i P.P I : DPLC l : DPLC: P.P
"5. 5·"' : (1) : ''
'
(1) ''
I
!
: (2) : : (2)
''-------J,
: ~j3
'"
0 00 I I
r"·-----J : ABB (FOX515) ' ' ABB (FOX 515)
"3 f-----~
T,P 'I'
i-, ... - ....... , 0
;;:;
'
·- ··r ·
' I
~ ()
0
' : J-JewSDH : '' Tp fxlstingSDM
I ...,~,.,
Tp I I
'··r··
Tp '"w
•--r--·
I I I
'··]:··
I
ABB iFOX515) (STI.H) : •
"~
hl ' MU:•:
Iv
r.-
'~
M2 Ml • M2 ABB (FOXf.Gv) <
--;;. 0
'"O
MUX
ABB iFOXGG0)
1--·----
-E---
, ~~~( MLIX
FOX6_6?~) J l._r_r_
. OTP2
tr.
(/J
VJ
3 1
"'
(/0 I
"-.J.,,. I ,------,
: CtTPl :-;;·-.::--: Ml BF
I
: 2 E1 Carcls :
'
Existing
1-------------J
:;;:
-.J
LEJ I
I
I
L.t.•t••' ,.... - .. _... ,,
: OTP 3 :
'•·t•·t-" l ,------------
: lvlDF/DDF
1-----------· .___
Pi\BX
t t Ml Br Ml Br ........J
Ml BF I
I
I
'rrf
Ml Ml OF :
,-----------··
1
I October (2) Power Pl~nt I
I
I ,.... __________ _ I r.r I:
Existing
P.A.BX
: tv1DF/DDF :
I
I
,------------- i MDF/DDF !
I 12 •~ F. 0 (8vrfo,j Cab~)
[___ P;P _ _J
I l------------- l-----------..
Q !-------- ---- I
I
----------, ABB (FOX515)
,: _____________
2E1 carcls ,: I E:{iSting
I 'I' ''I I I
:,:, .,,
)>
I I
PABX
fafstingSDH
"' ,_, I
•
-::. ~
~-
000
1,----------------,I :
---- NewSupplled Equipments.
*
I :
New sr;pplied Equipmer~ supplied by 816 :
contractor
1
I
''
New
IPPABX
L-----------
'
I'
:
:
o
i : 48VDC I
IC'
I
I
, .:,ystem I
,_________ .
I
I
I
I
I
11- - - - - - - - - - - - ... i MH,120F
1: 2E1Cards: I 11··•···--1·
11--------••---l
y t +
r,111:,
ABB (fOX6t50)
- - Existing Equipments or supplied by others. 1

I I
1 rmJ I
Schematic diagram for the 6th October Eastern Extension 220/22122 !\V GIS S/S Telecommunication SystemsEng.Molrnme<1Gam~1
_ _ _ _ _,,,,,, , ~ m w . = " · , . ,•,=,m=•-•,Ss MS~> ,CAmo,,u .. """" ''""''"'"''um, m0,.,_ ••--~ '""""' - - - - - - - -
6'" October Eastern Extensions 220/2°12? kV GIS S/S
- .
CHAPTER NINE
CABLES AND WIRE SYS1'El\t1

CHAPTER NL\TE
CABLES A1'lD WIRE SYSTEJvf
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Clause
I Description Paoe
9.1 MV Cables 22 (11) kV Cables 3
9.2 Low Voltage Cables, Control Cables And Wire System 7
9.3 Submittals 11
9.4 General Requirements For Fire Retardant Cable Coatings 12
9.5 Cable Trays 14

CHAPTER NINE
HIGH & MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER CABLES
9.1. JVIV Cables 22 (11) kV cables:
The voltage's rating for 22 kV cables (18/30/36 kV) and for 11 kV

(12/20/24 kV). The cables shall be designed for operation on the system
specified and to comply with the requirements laid down by this
specification.
The cables shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the

atmospheric and climatic conditions prevailing at the site and under such
sudden variations of load and voltage as may occur under working
conditions on the network
Straight joints and direct buried cables in the ground are not accepted
inside substation area.
9.1.1. Cable Type:

The cables shall be XLPE single core circular , stranded and compacted
copper conductor of cross section area 3x1Cx630mm 2 /phase
Minimum for cables of the power transformer (each secondary
,/·~-~,viµding). Three cores cable, shaped conductor of cross sectional area
· •' 3x150 1m112 for the Aux. transfo1111er 22/0.4 kV, 500 kVA, 3x240 rnm2
l' for ·capacitor bank and 4x1Cx630 1111112 Cu/phase for connections
{ between transfonners section as indicated on the single line diagram.
V
\ 9.1.2. Cable Construction:
The 22 kV cables shall be copper screened to withstand 31.5 kA. The

screen shall withstand the three phase symmetrical short circuit cu1Tent
31.5 kA /3 Sec - conductor screen, XLPE insulation and insulation
screen should be applied simultaneously using a true triple head and
with over all PVC" ST2" Flame Retardant extruded jacket. The jacket
shall be flame resistant with suitable anti oxidants and carbon black
ultraviolet protection. The construction of the cable shall contain water
blocking layers. The construction of the cables shall be submitted with
tender according to IEC 60502 and drawing indicating cross section of
each cable type showing all components, thickness and diameter of the
cable, moreover submit the drawing of the sealing end indicating all
data and dimensions. All PVC jackets shall be flame resistant with
suitable antioxidants and approximately 2.5% carbon black ultraviolet
protection more over a semi conductive layer graphite coating should
be applied over the jacket (non metallic sheath).
1. For copper conductor class 2, conductor measures should be taken to
achieve longitudinal water tightness.

6'" October Eastern Extensions 220122n2 kV GlS SIS
11. Metallic screen: It shall consist of one or more tapes or abraid or a

concentric layer of wires or a combination of wires and tape(s). It may
also be a sheath.
1. Conductor:
The conductor shall be circular. stranded, and compacted soft annealed
bare copper of (185, 240, 400 . : ... mnl.) The wire b-efore stranding shall
meet the physical requirements, of IEC 60228 for annealed copper wire.
The conductor has longitudinal and radial water tightness, swelling
powder and semiconducting water blocking tape.
2. Conductor Screen:
The conductor shall be shielded with an extruding semi- conducting
thennosetting compound. The conductor screen, insulation and
insulation screen are extrnded together in one pass through a three- die-
head, the process is known as "triple head extruded". It shall fit tightly,
but shall be free stripping from the conductor, also thoroughly bonded to
the insulation and to be of different color from that of the insulator and it
shall have allowable operating temperature equal to or higher than that
the insulation. The semi-conducting layer over conductor shall have
nominal thickness of not less than 0.75 mm.
3. Insulation:
i) The insulation shall be cross-linked thennosetting polyethylene (XLPE)
extruded on the screened conductor. It should have a good stability and
service performance. The nominal insulation thickness shall be as
specified in IEC 60502-2 and not less than 8.0 mm.
ii) Noting that the cable insulation should be manufactured using dry curing
dry cooling method.
iii) The outer surface of the extruded insulation shall be cylindrical ag4--·-
smooth; the insulation shall not contain any visible voids✓• or'
contamination.
iv) Insulation thickness= t min 2:: 0.9t110m -0.1
4. Insulation Screen: \. · ·
i) The insulation shall be shielded with an extruded layer of s;1rii-
conducting thermosetting compound.
ii) The semi-conducting screen shall be removable without damaging the

insulation and without leaving any traces over the insulation. The
nominal thickness of the semi-conducting layer over insulation should
be with suitable thickness not less than 0.9 1mn.

6 th October Eastern Extensions 120/12112 kV GlS SIS
5. Metallic Shield:
It is requested to deliver any of the following:
i) Copper Shield:
The metallic copper shield consist of a helically flat copper tape and
helically solid bar copper wires or two copper tapes to construct an
overall shield that have a cross sectional area of not less than 17 5
2
111111 and withstand short circuit current as specified in Volume 2,
chapter 2 (2S).
ii) Lead Shield : (N.A)

A lead metallic sheath shall be applied over the insulation, to pennit
the evacuation of homopolar short circuit current, and prevent any
humidity penetra~~on into the insulation. It shall have cross sectional
area to withstand the short circuit current as specified in Volume 2,
· chapter 2 (2S).
6. Bedding layer.
· When a tape armor is used, the inner covering shall be reinforced by a

taped bedding with a n01mal thickness of 0.5 mm if the annor tape
thiclrness is 0.2 mm, and 0.8 mm if the armor tape thickness is more
than 0.2 111111.
7. Armor Tapes
For annored cables, double steel tape shall be applied helically in two
··. layers of galvanized steel over the inner covering in accordance with
!EC 60502 clause (11).
8. .Jacket:
i) (Not Applicable)The cable shall be covered with an extruded

suitable durable, tough, ozone, heat and moisture resistant and
antic01Tosion, of high density polyethylene jacket which provides
protection against sunlight and most acids and alkaline and soil
condition.
ii) The outside surface of jacket must be coated with non flame
material (as fire resisting). PVC ST2 flame retardant+ 2.5% C.B.
iii) Non metallic sheath Gacket)

(a)tmin-?: 0.85 t00m-0.l or
(b )tmin?: 0.8 tnom -0.2
Shall be applied for M.V cables according to IEC60502

6'" October Eastern Extensions '2201221'22 kV GIS SIS
9. Protection Against ·water Penetration
i) Conductor should include swelling powder.

ii) Semi - conducting water blocking tape should be applied over
the bare conductor .
iii) A semi conducting swelling tape shall be applied under the copper
screen for longitudinal water tightness; it shall be 30% over-lapped
with nom. thick 0.5 mm & min. thick. 0.4 mm. An accepted
international test has to be proposed.
9.1.3. Electrical characteristics for 22 (11) kV:
The M.V cables shall be selected as follows:

Uo : rated power frequency voltage between conductor and earth or
metailic screen for which the cable is designed : 18 kV (12 kV).
U : rated power frequency voltage between conductors for which
the cable is designed : 30 kV (20 kV).
Um : The maximum value of the highest system voltage for which
the equipment may be used 36 kV (24 kV).
Up : peak value of lightning impulse= 170 kVp for 11 kV and 125 kVp
for 11 kV.
Uo/U/ Um= 18/30/36 KV for 22 kV cables and 12/20/24 kV for 11 kV
cables.
Maximum system short circuit level at the cable location 31.5 kA/3s
(3- phase synunetrical faults on solidly earthed system) for 22 kV - and
31.5 kA/ 3 sec. for 11 kV.
Short circuit current calculation should be submitted as per IEC 60-287
for review and approval by the owner.
9.1.4. Maximum conductor temperature:

The conductor temperature when the rated normal cun-ent is flowing and
the earth temperature does not exceed 35°c, shall not exceed 90 °c at
load factor 100% and the maximum conductor temperature during
emergency operation not exceed 100 ° c. The emergency operation
period is two hours.
9.1.5. Marking:
The following information should be clearly marked on the whole length
of the cable every one meter. The letters figures shall be raised
approximately 0.5 mm. The space betvveen one set of characters and
next shall not exceed 150 1mn:
1- Rated voltage.
2- Conductor cross- section.
3- Manufacturer or trade mark.
4- Insulation material
5- Manufacturing year.

New Urban Communities Authority O~UCA) Chapter 9
6111 October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G!S SIS
9.1.6. Indoor/ Outdoor Terminations

Indoor and outdoor tenninations will be constructed as a base of the
tennination. The cable's insulation wall ·will be reinforced by means of
suitable stress control cones. Stress cones will be made of an
insulating material allmving gradual increase of the insulation
thiclmess of cable at the end of the ground electrode or cable shielding
to decrease the longitudinal and radial stresses.
The tenninals should be compound filled suitable for single conductor
while their lower entrance is provided by a protective casing and
waterproof tapes to retain the insulating compound and keep moisture
from entering the tenninal and the specific leakage path is 3.5 cm/ kV
for indoor type and 4 cm I kV for outdoor. The terminatior.. should
have porcelain housing, ·and support insulators (i.e. the sealing end
porcelain type)
Sealing end support structure of heavy galvanized angle steel
construction shali be supplied.
The outdoor sealing· end should include arcing horns and post
insulators.
The indoor sealing end should -include post insulators
The structures and their foundations shall be capable of with standing
all static dynamic force to which they may be subjected. Detailed
calculation and drawing of the structures and their foundations shall
be submitted. Noting that the indoor sealing end should include
post insulators & the outdoor sealing end should include arcing
horns and post insulators.
· "For medium voltage cables. EETC accept Heat shrinkable cable
sealing end"
9.1.7. TESTS
i. Impulse voltage= 170 kVP for 22 kV and 125 kVP for 11 kV.
11. Routine test= 3.5 U0 , 5 minutes (i.e.63 kV, 5 minutes) for 22kV cables_-·~ ••. ,.
and (42 kV, 5 minutes) for 11 kV cables.
I
9.2. Low Voltage Cables. Control Cables and Wire Svstem:
9 .2.1. General:
a) Cable and wire system shall mean power cables, low voltage and control / ·
cables, signal cables and any other cables required for interconnection of ·
substation components, complete with their accessories hardware, cable
trenches, cable trays, cable ducts, terminal blocks, installation ,vorks, etc
required for proper operation of the substation.
b) Contractor shall submit the detailed design and manufacture of cables,
methods of cables installation and cables specification for approval
before starting the manufacturing.
c) Direct buried cables in the ground is not accepted.

9.2.2. Design Criteria and Cable Construction
Cables Required For Interconnection of the Substation Components

a) The cables \Vith their accessories shall be designed for continuous full
load operation based on the environmental conditions and electrical
specification of the contract.
b) The cables interconnecting the auxiliary transformers with the L.V
switchgear shall be capable to be loaded by 10% over load for two
hours.
c) The cables and wire system shall be fire-resisting cables with copper
conductors and an approved metal shielding.
9.2.3. Low Voltage Power Cables
a) All power cables shall have three phase conductors 1, 2 and 3 designated
R, Y and B and colored red, yellow and blue respectively with neutrals
colored green. Conductors carrying 220 V.D.C. power shall be colored
grey, conductors carrying 48 V.D.C. power shall be colored White.
b) Low voltage power cables for a single phase system shall have two (2)
full size conductors plus one (1) earth continuity conductor whose
cmTent rating shall not be less than 100% of the phase conductors.
Power cables for a three phase system shail have three (3) full size phase
conductors and one (1) neutral conductor whose cmTent rating not less
tha_ri 50% of phase conductor current. Voltage drops in the AC low
voltage power cables shall be limited to 5% (voltage drop from the main
distribution board to the load point).
/'~'-
/' ·- ,·· ""'·"
c} Cables shall be of PVC insulation P.V.C fire retardant sheathed type
with ·copper conductors with a current density not more than 2A/imn2
I and cross sectional area not less than 2 mm2 and rated voltage up to
750V.
·, < 9.2.4 ..Control Cables

---~·-·a)Control Cables means cables of control, metering, measunng,
Protection, Signal and Supervision Circuits.
b) The cables shall be them1oplastic insulated, shielded, PVC jacketed,
stranded, annealed, soft drawn copper and fire retardant.
c) Communication cables and low level signal cables, shall have each pair
twisted.
d) All multiconductor cables shall have their individually insulated
conductors or pairs bundled together into a round configuration and
covered by a non-hygroscopic core vvrapper.
e) The cable jacket shall be extruded over top of the core wrapper.
f) The minimum conductor cross-section shall be designated continuous
full load operation.
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 8/J 5

g) Cables insulation shall be rated voltage up to 750V.
r h) The construction of the cables shall meet the following requirements as

mnrnnum:
1) Conductor
Minimum conductor cross-section shall be as follows:

I) Voltage circuit cable 2 .:,- mm~?
II) Control circuit cable not less than 2.5 nmi2
III) Twisted pairs cable 1.2mm2
?
IV) Current transformer secondary circuits cable 6 mm~
V) Panel wiring, single conductor:
?
- For Control > 1.5 mm~
- For Power Circuit -2-
< .:, mm~?
l) Conductor Insulation
I. Each conductor shall be individually insulated and color or digit
coded.
II. Cable insulation shall be complied with IEC standard.
III. Communication cable insulation shall consist of low or medium
density polyethylene covered with PVC of equal thickness. Total
conductor insulation thickness shall not less than 1 mm.
IV. All conductor insulation shall be impregnated with a suitable
antioxidant.
V. Cables insulation shall be for rated voltage up to 750 V.
VI. Cable insulation shall be P.V.C with a thickness not less than the
IEC specification.
3) Shield
All the cables (except panel wiring) shall have a copper tape shield.
4) Overall Jacket (Sheath)

I) Cables overall jacket shall be PVC of thickness not less than the
IEC Specification.
II) All overall PVC Jackets shall be flame retardant with suitable
anti-oxidants and approximately 2% carbon black ultraviolet pro---
tection.
I
9.2.5. Installation and Erection I
aj G9~
\ ~
1) Cables shall be laid under raised floor and in R.C. (reinforced conci::ete)
trenches with suitable approved covers in other places. ·.

611' October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GIS SIS
2) Control, protection, measuring and signal cables and low voltage power
cables shall be laid in their own trenches and segregated in trays in the
following order.
I) A.C. low voltage power cables.

II) D.C. control and indication cables.
III) Cunent and voltage transfonner secondary circuits.
IV) Low level analog signal cables.
V) Main 1 protection circuits
VI) ~Jain 2 protection circuits.
Any two (2) of above are not allowed to be placed in the same
conduit or tray.
3) Fire barriers should be provided between the cables of each circuit.
4) Cable trays shall be fabricated from hot dip galvanized steel, tray shall
not sag more than 50 mm at midpoint between supp01ts when loaded
with cables, space between supports shall be according to the cable
weight but not more than 2 m.
5) Install cables as close as possible to points of ent.--y or exit from cable

trays.
6) Lay low voltage power cables in parallel runs and maintain a spacing of
1.0 times diameters for cables of section 50 1mn2 and above, clamp
cables with trays.
7) Conduits for installation above ground or on walls shall be rigid

galvanized steel. Each conduit length shall be threaded at both ends.
Threads on steel conduit shall be zinc treated, conduit for installation
below ground shall be P.V.C. covered with concrete and sealed at ends
with non- hygroscopic sealant.
8) Marshalling boxes and pull boxes shall be made of galvanized sheet

steel or cast aluminum, of rigid construction and shall have drain holes.
Sheet steel shall be minimmn 1.6 mm thick, pull boxes shall be with
enclosure protection as specified with gasket covers, secured by cad-
mium plated steel screw. Marshalling boxes shall be with enclosure
protection as specified with gasket hinged doors provided with pad lock.
9) Terminal blocks shall be non-flame stud type of unit construction

suitable for accepting cable sizes up 16 mm2 and shall have 25% freeJor-c::,,
future use by owner. t✓
1 • • • '
I, " . ;,
10) Cable trays, cable conduits, cable trenches should be proviadf arid"
sized for 25% spare for future use by owner. \:· ·• .
\<.:''.'"
New Urban Comraunities Authority (NUCA) Chapter 9
6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV GJS S/S
11) After installation and testing, seal wall and floor opening through
which cable tray, conduit or cable passes with an approved fire proof
and vennin proof sealant.
12) Cable joints are not permitted.
13) Cable trays should be executed for outgoing feeders as well as for
inside the substation
b) Low Voltage Power Cables
1) Main and back up AC power circuits shall be run in separate conduits

and trays.
2) Mai.11 and back up DC power circuits shall be run in separate conduits
and trays .
.3) Separate cables for AC & DC connections to be used.
4) The cable connection between the battery and the battery distribution
board shall be plastic-sheathed have single pole connections, and not be
earthed. The cables shall be laid on insulated surfaces, and a great
possible consideration shall be given to the risk of short circuit and
physical damage.
c) Control Cables, Protection cables And Signal Cables
1) Wires for go and return signals for each device or function to be run in
same cable.
2) Loops to be avoided.
3) Ivfeasures to reduce transient inductive pick up to be ta.1-:en.
4) Terminate control cables on numbered cable terminals in marshalling
boxes, relay panels or tenninal cubicles. Number conductors with ferrule
numbers at each end of each conductor and identify cables by cable tags.
5) Tenninate current transformer circuits on stud type terminal blocks using
ring type tenninals or any other approved tenninals.
6) Install cable wiring without splicing. Fit wire ends with crimped rings.
7) Terminate no more than two (2) wires on any stud or tenninal.
8) Ground shielding of cables entering cubicles at cubicle ground
9) Provide 25% spare cores for future use by owner.
9.3. Submittals:
Submit drawings, design, calculations, test reports, and lieterature per-
taining to specified items submittals shall include but not be limited to
following.
a) With Bid:
Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page l l/15

6 th Octobe~ Eastern Extensions 220/2'2/'22 kV G1S SiS
1) Reference list of all the components of the system.

2) Cross section of each cable type showing all the components of
the cable.
~) Method of laying of each type of cable with cross sections of the
.:,
;
rt cable trenches, cable ducts cable trays.

4) Fire protection of the cables.
5) Factory tests and site tests of the cables.
6) Estimated length of each type of cables.
7) Tem1ination of each type of cables.
S) Brief description of the cables.
9) Others which are required by Tender Document.
b) 1H the design and erection stages
l) Layouts of cables, trays, conduits, marshalling boxes etc.

2) Details of cables, trays, conduits, marshalling boxes etc.
3) Calculations showing circuit burdens for instrument transformers.
4) · Cable schedules
5) Calculations showing power cables voltage drop.
6) Test reports
7) Arrangement of cable trenches either concrete trenches or laying
directly in ground. ·
8) Others which are required by the contract and the owner.
9.4. General Requirements For Fire-Retardant Cable Coatings
9.4.1. Basic Requirement of the Fire-Retardant Cable Coatings

T11e fire-retardant coating to be used for the fire protection of single or
grouped cables, when applied as per manufacturer's rec01mnendation
and thickness, must delay short circuit and prevent flame propagation
along single or grouped cables, horizontally and vertically.
This coating will also prevent flame spread· in grouped cables when
exposed to a moderate fire source as might occur from areas or sparks
falling or occurring in a cable tray, or from fire exposure or trayed
arrangement.
Proof of effectiveness must be furnished by test reports as well as carry
approvals by either one of the following international institutions: FM,
UL, FIRTO, IFBT, Th1D, etc.
9.4.2. Characteristics
9.4.2.1. Non-Intumescent Cable Coatings
t
L

The cable coating system must NOT be of "Intumescent" type. Only

"Ablation" type cable coating systems are acceptable by this bid
specification.
9.4.2.2. Current Carrving Capacitv
The current canying capacity of power cables must not be affected by

the fire-retardant coating when applied at the thickness recommended
by the manufacturer and listed in the fire test reports.
9.4.2.3. Compatibility with Cable Jackets
The coating must not contain any solvents or other substance which
would adversely affect the cable jacketing and insulation material.
Compatibility with all types of cable jacketing material must be
proven.
9.4.2.4. Toxicitv
TI1e coating must, in its wet fonn, not contain any organic solvents,
phosphates, or any other substance identified as being toxic and'
hazardous to human health or the environment in general. When
subjected to fire, the coating must not emit any toxic a.'1.d/or corrosive
gases. e.g. Silicon monoxide and Silicon dioxides, which are harmful
to personnel ,md delicate electronic instruments.
9 .4.2.5. Health Hazards
The coating must not contain asbestos or any other substance

identified as being carcinogenic or suspected of being carcinogenic,
such as for instance antimony trioxide. The bidder is required to
supply Full Health & Safety Data for their proposed products.
9.4.2.6. Flexibility
When applied to a cable of 12 mm dia., the coating should

when the cable is bent to a 3 cm radius.
9.4.2.7. Water and Humiditv Resistance
The fire-protective effectiveness as well as all other properties of the

coating must not be affected in any way after prolonged (10 years
proof) exposure to high humidity, moisture, tap or rain water. This
must be verified by test report. A coating which requires over coating
with a moisture-protective top coat is NOT acceptable, since its

Nev,1 Urban Communities Authority (NUCA) Chap1er 9
effectiveness becomes dependent upon the maintenance of such a top

r· coat.
9.4.2.8. Radiation Exposure

The effectiveness of the coating must not suffer due to exposure to
ultraviolet light radiation when applied to cables installed in an
outdoor environment. Other technical data on effects due to nuclear
radiation exposures should also be provided.
9.4.2.9. Resistance to Chemicals

The coating must show long-term resistance to gasoline, diesel fuel,
fuel oils, insulating oils and motor oils. The manufacturer must
· furthennore furnish labo1;atory test results of compatibility tests with
at least 100 different chemicals in concentrated and diluted form.
9.4.2.10.Apnlication
The coating must be applicable by conventional methods, such as
brush or spray: the latter with conventional equipment which should
be generally available on the market. The cables should not require
previous cleaning with solvent or other liquid substances.
Furthe1more, the coating must be applicable in one operation,,
whereby first application of a quick-drying "Fog-coat" is acceptable,
as opposed to multi-coat applications which long d1ying times. The
final cable coatings should not subject to excessive shrinkages and
adhesion to the cable jackets must be in good bonding conditions.
Addition of new cables to the coated cable installations must be easy
and the quality of the retrocoating of the cables must meet the original
cable coating quality standard.
9.4.2.11.Life Expectancy
The life expectancy of the coating should correspond with that of the
cables. The manufacturer must furnish proof of indoor and outdoor
applications existing for at least 10 years under various temperatures
and environmental conditions.
_✓,,,-""';~r-,'.,:~,,,
/~ 9!5. CABLE TRAYS:

/'.
".JG;al:)le trays should be fabricated from hot dip galvanized steel. Vent trays
i 'on bottom with slots approximately 20 1mn wide and 40 1mn on
f'
\; / .'centerlines.
\ ~,'
\:_'•.'
'~~--t·· ,,;Tray
should not sag more than 50 mm at midpoint bet\veen supports when
.,,___:_,:,,J:oaded with cables. Space supp01i is 3 m maximum.
Generally all cables in the open trenches shall be installed on cable trays
or cable ladders.

r New Urban Communities Authority (NUCA)
6 th October Eastern Extensions 220/22/22 kV G1S S/S
Chapter 9
Each cable tray shall carry only one 3 phase circuit of HV/MV - But, for
control and LV cables only two layers of cables shall be installed on each
cable tray.
Cable trays, cable conduits and cable trenches should be provided and
sized for 25% spa.re for foture use by the owner.

Volume 2: Technical Specificarions Rev. (0)

VOL 02 - 02 - Tech. Spec. (P.01) PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VOL 02 - 02 - Tech. Spec. (P.01) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ARAB REPUBLIC OF EGYPT

MINISTRY OF HOUSING AND URBAN COMMUNITIES

Electric Power Systems Engineering Company

Volume.2: Exhibit D Technical specifications

Chapter Description Volume

Twelve Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switch Gear Part II

Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Content /'It'? ."'>•·.

One General Technical Specification and Conditions

Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Content

Gh"'NERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND

Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 1/33

GEJ\TERAL TECH�NJCAL SPECIFICATIONS AND COJ\TJJITIONS

1.26 Applied Standards ,,,�\i, ;,,;, 31

Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 2/33

1.1. PROJECT OBJECTIVE:

1.2. PROJECT INTERCONNECTION:

1.3. PROJECT DESCRIPTION:

1.4. INFORMATION TO BIDDERS:

1. The main equipment are:

2. All attached Bid documents drawings are conceptual.

three with their complete technical data and specifications. After

1.5. PROJECT SCOPE OF WORKS:

1.5.1.1. 220 kV GIS Switchgear m1d Equipments:

Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 5/33

E1ectric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 6/33

18/30/36 kV XLPE cables cross sectional area not less than

Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 7/33

1.5.9. (2) two zigzag earthing transformers 22 kV as indicated on the single

1.5.10. Six (6) 22 kV capacitor banks (each is three stages) as specified.

1.5.12. - Protection, control, measuring, metering, signaling, interlocldng

1.5.14. Protection Works at remote sites as specified.

1.5.17. Lighting (indoor and outdoor) for whole substation as specified.

1.5.18. Low voltage AC and 220 V DC systems for whole substation as

1.5.21. Any other deliveries/works required to give satisfactory operation of

Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 8/33

1.8. DATES Of COlVIPLETION AND GUARANTEE PERIOD

1.9. GENERAL PROGRAM

Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 9/33

applicable to the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall be

Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 10/33

equipment and other parts of the plant shall be guarded in strict

1.11. NAMES OF MANUFACTURERS, PLACES OF MANUFACTURE

1.12. GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND GUARANTEES

Electric Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 11/33

1.14. OUALITY AND MATERIAL

1.16.1.4. Validation that the manufacturers have past experience as required

1.16.1.5. Early fault detection as required in specification of the transformer.

1.16.1.6. Brief description and catalogues of on-load tap chm1ger of the

Electric Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 13/33

1.16.1.9. Transformer outline dimensional drawino-s showino- with its

b) Shipping outline drawings showing; dimensions, weights and

1.16.1.11. Description required giving full infonnation on the transfonner and

1.16.1.15. Transfonner sho1i circuit test certificate of similar transfonner as

1.16.i.16. Calculation of short circuit current in the primary, secondary and

1.16.2. Drawings, Calculations, Samples. etc ... after letter of award:

Electrfo Power Systems Engineering Company ExhibitD Page 14/33

arrangements of all details and accessories having regard to the conditions

J .16.2.3. Transfonner Outline Drawings, Showing:

1.16.2.4. Transfonner nameplate diagram.

catalogue number and characteristics in the instruction manual.

Calculations, samples, patterns, models etc., submitted to the Employer

E]ectiic Power Systems Engineering Company Exhibit D Page 16/33

1.16.2.14. Installation. Operating and Maintenance Manuals